Beruflich Dokumente
Kultur Dokumente
DISTRIBUTORS
ACTUATORS
DOCUMENTATION
ACCESSORIES
FITTINGS
UNITS
DISTRIBUTORS
ACTUATORS
A global company
ACTUATORS
Metal Work Concesio. One of P Services, the Italian subsidiaries. One of Metal Work subsidiaries abroad.
Metal Work was set up in 1967 for the production of push-in fittings for compressed air systems. The company gradually extended its production and sales structure to become a leader in pneumatic systems for automation. Now the production unit in Concesio has a staff of about 350, while the national and international sales organisation staff number around 450. In 1992 Metal Work has obtained the ISO 9001 certification. To the quality managment one, in 2000 we have add the one related to the enviromental managment according the ISO 14001. To these METAL WORK S.p.A. applied the OHSAS 18001 standard in 2007 to guarantee a Management System of Occupational Safety and Health. All the certifications above mentioned have been released by the German certification body DEKRA ITS, accredited by TGA. Products are distributed through 40 branches in Italy and abroad, which offer an efficient capilla y before- and after-sales service. The product quality and an efficient sales organisation are the basis on which Metal Work fi mly stands and enable the company to meet all possible requirements in pneumatic systems for automation.
DOCUMENTATION
ACCESSORIES
FITTINGS
UNITS
DISTRIBUTORS
DOCUMENTATION
ACCESSORIES
FITTINGS
UNITS
DISTRIBUTORS
ACTUATORS
Total quality
Metal Work obtained ISO 9001 certification in 1992 and ISO 14001 certification in 2000, and OHSAS 18001 certification in 2007, ample proof of our way of working and daily mission. Particular care is taken at all levels, from design to energy saving, and we can safely state that, compared with conventional products, the electrical power required to operate our valves has been cut by 75% over the last few years. Certification covers not only the holding company but also the other companies in the Group, allowing both our products and our philosophy to gain world-wide recognition. All Metal Work products meet EC and other standards including electromagnetic compatibility (EMC certificate) Metal Work engineers are on ISO, UNI and ASSOFLUID committees as product standardisation is always a guarantee of product quality.
DOCUMENTATION
ACCESSORIES
The product is not Metal Works only strong point. Great care is taken over customer service, with the aim of providing the best possible solution for a specific requirement within the allotted time and with the utmost safety. The Metal Work or P Service sales personnel work in close co-operation with the customer, providing the necessary backup to solve any technical problems, and search for new materials or information. Metal Work invests heavily in providing the customers with the necessary training. Our range includes all types of special products suitable for use in a wide variety of applications.
FITTINGS
A customer-oriented policy
UNITS
DISTRIBUTORS
Metal Work is a fully integrated manufacturing company. This system guarantees the customer a fully monitored production process and a consistently top quality product. Process engineering and product engineering come together in the constant quest for perfection. Virtually all the products are manufactured at the companys own production site allowing the company to monitor the entire process from the selection of raw materials to final assembl , thus cutting wastage and lead times. Production data and test results undergo critical analysis to enable the company to upgrade the products and the manufacturing process. Company-wide quality control is a permanent feature at Metal Work.
ACTUATORS
METAL WORK S.p.A. - Head Office - Via Segni, 5-7-9 25062 - Concesio BS Italy - Tel. 030 21 87 11 - Fax 030 21 80 569 - www.metalwork.it - metalwork@metalwork.it
ITALIAN SUBSIDIARIES
ACTUATORS
BARI P SERVICE S.r.l. Via S. Magno km 0,400 (zona industriale) 70033 Corato BA Tel. 080 898 73 94 r.a. Fax 080 898 71 45 www.pservice.it pservba@pservice.it BERGAMO P SERVICE S.r.l. Via Vienna, 28 Loc. Verdellino Zingonia 24040 Verdellino BG Tel. 035 88 53 79 Fax 035 48 20 492 www.pservice.it pservbg@pservice.it BOLOGNA P SERVICE S.r.l. Via dellArcoveggio, 190/d 40129 Bologna BO Tel. 051 70 27 11 Fax 051 70 31 14 www.pservice.it pservbo@pservice.it BRESCIA P SERVICE S.p.A. Via del Mella, 37 - Z.I. Fornaci 25131 Brescia BS Tel. 030 35 855 r.a. Fax 030 35 81 256 www.pservice.it pservbs@pservice.it CREMONA P SERVICE S.r.l. Via Sesto, 62 26100 Cremona CR Tel. 0372 27 64 8 - 32 26 7 Fax 0372 45 71 42 www.pservice.it pservcr@pservice.it LECCO P SERVICE S.r.l. Via Provinciale per Dolzago, 39 23848 Oggiono LC Tel. 0341 26 67 11 Fax 0341 26 67 12 www.pservice.it pservlc@pservice.it FILIALE DI VARESE Via Gasparoli, 197 21012 Cassano Magnago VA Tel. 0331 28 09 20 Fax 0331 28 09 21 www.pservice.it pservva@pservice.it MANTOVA P SERVICE S.r.l. Viale d/Libert, 9 - 46030 San Giorgio di Mantova MN Tel. 0376 37 41 81 Fax 0376 37 47 27 www.pservice.it pservmn@pservice.it
MILANO P SERVICE S.r.l. Via Altiero Spinelli, 57 20862 Arcore MB Tel. 039 61 80 056 039 61 50 064 Fax 039 60 120 29 www.pservice.it pservmi@pservice.it MODENA P SERVICE S.r.l. Via S. Giovanni Bosco, 267 41100 Modena MO Tel. 059 23 98 06 Fax 059 23 98 76 www.pservice.it pservmo@pservice.it NOVARA P SERVICE S.r.l. Piazzale A. Antonelli, 8 28060 S. Pietro Mosezzo Fr. Nibbia NO Tel. 0321 43 79 86 Fax 0321 43 79 93 www.pservice.it pservno@pservice.it PARMA P SERVICE S.r.l. P.za Lunardi 27/A 43100 Parma PR Tel. 0521 24 09 64 Fax 0521 24 28 47 www.pservice.it pservpr@pservice.it PAVIA P SERVICE S.r.l. Via F.lli Cagnoni, 7/9 27029 Vigevano PV Tel. 0381 83 333 Fax 0381 82 733 www.pservice.it pservpv@pservice.it PRATO P SERVICE S.r.l. Via Onorio Vannucchi, 21 59100 Prato PO Tel.: 0574 757298 Fax: 0574 757258 www.pservice.it pservpo@pservice.it RIMINI P SERVICE S.r.l. Via Piane, 23/A 47853 Coriano RN Tel. 0541 65 87 15 0541 65 81 36 Fax 0541 65 68 69 www.pservice.it pservrn@pservice.it
TORINO METAL WORK S.r.l. Via Bruino, 22/2 10040 Rivalta di Torino TO Tel. 011 90 32 666 Fax 011 90 03 632 www.pservice.it metalwto@pservice.it TREVISO P SERVICE S.r.l. Via P. A. Gemelli, 34/d 31038 Postioma di Paese TV Tel. 0422 48 45 78 r.a. Fax 0422 48 45 79 www.pservice.it pservtv@pservice.it VERONA P SERVICE S.r.l. Via Del Perlar, 92 37135 Verona VR Tel. 045 50 31 23 Fax 045 82 50 038 www.pservice.it pservvr@pservice.it VICENZA P SERVICE S.r.l. Via Progresso, 70 36035 Marano Vicentino VI Tel. 0445 56 05 90 Fax 0445 56 01 33 www.pservice.it pservvi@pservice.it
DOCUMENTATION
6
ACCESSORIES
FITTINGS
UNITS
DISTRIBUTORS
ITALY AGENCY
SARDEGNA G.CARLO LAI Via Ranieri Sampante, 6 09121 Cagliari CA Tel./Fax 070 280235 Cell. 328 3517832 lai.gianc@gmail.com
DOCUMENTATION
ACCESSORIES
FITTINGS
UNITS
DISTRIBUTORS
ACTUATORS
FOREIGN SUBSIDIARIES
ACTUATORS
EUROPE BELGIUM Metal Work Belgi/Belgique Mechelsesteenweg 277 B-1800 Vilvoorde - Belgium Tel. 0032 02 75 16 120 Fax 0032 02 75 16 161 metalwork@metalworkpneumatic.be www.metalworkpneumatic.be DENMARK Metal Work Danmark A/S Korskildelund 1 2670 Greve - Denmark Tel. 0045 70 22 23 11 Fax 0045 70 22 27 59 metalwork@metalwork.dk www.metalwork.dk FINLAND Metal Work Finland OY Lkkisepntie 11 00620 Helsinki - Finland Tel. 00358 10 836 5700 Fax 00358 09 272 2712 metalwork@metalwork.fi www.metalwork.fi FRANCE Metal Work France Sarl Parc dActivits de lEsplanade - BP 222 14 Rue Enrico Fermi 77463 Saint Thibault des Vignes Cedex - France Tel. 0033 01 60 94 00 00 Fax 0033 01 60 94 01 94 metalwork@metalwork.fr www.metalwork.fr GERMANY Metal Work Deutschland GmbH GERMAN OFFICE Rankinestrae 2 D-86899 Landsberg am Lech Germany Tel. 0049 08191 42894-0 Fax 0049 08191 42894-26 metalwork@metalwork.de www.metalwork.de AUSTRIAN OFFICE Tel. 0043 720 010100 Fax 0043 720 010100-99 metalwork@metalwork.at HOLLAND Metal Work Nederland B.V. Postbus 90 - 6710 BB EDE Voltastraat 9 - 6716 AJ EDE Holland Tel. 0031 0318 66 51 11 Fax 0031 0318 66 51 15 metalwork@metalwork.nl www.metalwork.nl POLAND Metal Work Polska Sp. z o.o. ul. Szamotulska 1, Baranowo 62-081 - Przezmierowo - Poland Tel. 0048 061 65 01 840 Fax 0048 061 65 01 849 metalwork@metalwork.pl www.metalwork.pl PORTUGAL Metal Work Portugal Lda Estrada Nacional, 1 P.C. Emiauto Pav-D Sobreiro Torio 3850 - Albergaria a Velha Portugal Tel. 00351 23 45 25 425 Fax 00351 23 45 25 426 www.metalwork.eu 8 CZECH REPUBLIC Metal Work Pneumatics CZ, s.r.o. Ostravsk 494 73925 Sviadnov Czech Republic Tel. 00420 596 748 577 Fax 00420 596 728 010 info@metalwork.cz www.metalwork.cz RUSSIA OOO Metal Work Pneumatic 121354, Moscow, Dorogobuzhskaya str., 14 build. 6 Tel.:+7 499 558 10 40 Fax:+7 499 558 10 40 info@metalworkpneumatic.ru www.metalworkpneumatic.ru SPAIN Metal Work Iberica S.A. Pol. Ind. Can Mag c/Can Mag, 9 08210 Barbera del Valles (Barcelona) - Spain Tel. 0034 937 180 244 Fax 0034 937 188 070 metalwork@metalwork.es www.metalwork.es DELEGACION NORTE Tel. 0034 946 203 999 Fax 0034 946 202 642 48220 Abadio (Bizkaia) metalwork.norte@metalwork.es DELEGACION CENTRO Tel. 0034 916 586 048 Fax 0034 916 710 638 28823 Coslada (Madrid) metalwork.centro@metalwork.es SWEDEN Metal Work Sverige AB Modemgatan, 7 235 39 Vellinge - Sweden Tel. 0046 040 42 07 00 Fax 0046 040 42 07 20 metalwork@metalwork.se www.metalwork.se SWITZERLAND Metal Work Pneumatik GmbH Langfeldstrasse 88 8500 Frauenfeld - Switzerland Tel. 0041 052 369 40 40 Fax 0041 052 369 40 41 metalwork@metalwork.ch www.metalwork.ch UK Metal Work UK Ltd Blackhill drive - Wolverton Mill Milton Keynes - MK 12 5TS Tel. 0044 01908 22 22 88 Fax 0044 01908 22 28 24 sales@metalwork.co.uk www.metalwork.co.uk UKRAINE Metal Work Ukraine TOV 26-G, Dniprovska Naberezhna Str., Litera A, 02098 Kiev Ukraine Tel. 00380 44 502 95 71 Tel. 00380 44 502 95 72 Tel./Fax 00380 44 502 95 73 www.metalwork.com.ua
AMERICAS BRAZIL Metal Work Pneumtica do Brasil Ltda RIO GRANDE DO SUL Av. Thomaz Edison, 2648 Scharlau CEP. 93125 - 140 So Leopoldo/RS - Brazil Tel. 0055 51 3590 - 7100 Fax 0055 51 3590 - 7111 metalwork@metalwork.com.br www.metalwork.com.br USA Metal Work Pneumatic USA, Inc. 1120 Eden Road, Suite 106 Arlington, TX 76001 Tel. 001 817 701 4000 Fax 001 817 701 4004 metalwork@metalwork.org www.metalwork.org
ASIA - OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Metal Work Pneumatic AUSTRALIA PTY Limited MELBOURNE OFFICE P.O.Box 4209 Dandenong South VIC 3164 10 Mickle Street Dandenong VIC 3175 Tel. 0061 03 97 06 67 18 Fax 0061 03 97 06 67 19 vicsales@metalwork.com.au www.metalwork.com.au SYDNEY OFFICE P.O. Box 6483 Wetherill Park BC NSW 2164 Unit 2, 504 - 508 Victoria Street Wetherill Park NSW 2164 Tel. 0061 2 97 25 35 99 Fax 0061 2 97 25 23 61 nswsales@metalwork.com.au CHINA Metal Work Pneumatic Components (Shanghai) Co., Ltd. SHANGHAI OFFICE Block C1, N3, Fulian third Road 201906 - Baoshan District, Shanghai - China Tel. 0086 21 36043088 Fax 0086 21 36043077 info@metalworkchina.cn www.metalworkchina.cn GUANGZHOU OFFICE Room 1923, Jinxiu Building, No. 1, Tianhe Road, Guangzhou, 510075 Tel: 0086 20 87308172 Fax: 0086 20 87308176 INDIA Metal Work Pneumatic India Private Limited BANGALORE OFFICE No. 18-20, 1St Cross, Bilekahalli Industrial Area Adj. IIMB Compound, Bannerghatta Road Bangalore - 560 076 (India) Tel. 0091 80 26480076 Fax 0091 80 26480012 sales@metalwork.in www.metalwork.in PUNE OFFICE Shop No. 1, 531/1, Shedge Villa, Post Bhugaon, Near Heera Garden, Pune-Paud Road, Tal. Mulshi, District Pune - 412 115 (India) sales.pune@metalwork.in MALAYSIA Metal Work Pneumatic (M) SDN BHD 11 Jalan Anggerik Mokara 31/52 Seksyen 31, Kota Kemuning 40460 Shah Alam Selangor Darul Ehsan - Malaysia Tel. 03 5131 3838 Tel. 03 5131 4848 Fax 03 5131 5666 metalwork@metalworkmal.com www.metalwork.it THAILAND Metal Work Pneumatic (Thailand) Co. Ltd 29/67 Moo 2, 345 Road Lumpo, Bangbuatong, Nonthaburi 11110 - Thailand Tel. 00662 961 7000 Fax 00662 961 7227 metalwork@metalwork.co.th www.metalwork.eu
DOCUMENTATION
ACCESSORIES
FITTINGS
UNITS
DISTRIBUTORS
DOCUMENTATION
ACCESSORIES
FITTINGS
UNITS
DISTRIBUTORS
ACTUATORS
DOCUMENTATION
ACCESSORIES
FITTINGS
UNITS
DISTRIBUTORS
ACTUATORS
10
INDEX
ACTUATORS
P P P P P P P
CYLINDERS GRIPPERS ROTARY ACTUATORS SLIDES HYDRAULIC-PNEUMATIC ELECTRIC CYLINDER SENSORS, T-SLOT ACCESSORIES, TESTER VALVES VALVES ISLANDS SLAVES FIELDBUS
PAG.
1-2
ACTUATORS
11
PAG. 1-167 PAG. 1-187 PAG. 1-205 PAG. 1-229 PAG. 1-247 PAG. 1-285 PAGE 2-2 PAGE 2-139 PAGE 2-189
DISTRIBUTORS
P P P
UNITS
P P P P P P
SYNTESI BIT SKILLAIR NEW DEAL ONE AUTOMATIC FITTINGS FITTINGS SERIES A - B - C - D TAPARED THREAD FITTINGS WITH PTFE
3-2 3-49
UNITS DOCUMENTATION ACCESSORIES FITTINGS
3-74
PAGE 3-144 PAGE 3-191 PAGE PAGE PAGE 4-4 4-28 4-33 4-50
PRECISION REGULATORS, PROPORTIONAL VALVES, PRESSURE SWITCHES PAGE 3-205 AUTOMATIC FITTINGS FOR USE IN THE FOOD INDUSTRY PAGE
FITTINGS
P P P P
ACCESSORIES
P P P P P P
LINE ON LINE COUPLINGS FLOW REGULATOR AUXILIARY VALVES VARIOUS ACCESSORIES PNEUMO POWER TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION ENVIRONMENT AND ENERGY SAVING EUROPEAN DIRECTIVE 94/9/EC (ATEX) ALPHANUMERIC INDEX
5-3 5-41 5-51 5-69 5-81 6-02 6-14 6-22 6-26 6-30
PAGE 5-101
DOCUMENTATION
P P P P P
DISTRIBUTORS
DOCUMENTATION
ACCESSORIES
FITTINGS
UNITS
DISTRIBUTORS
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
P P P P P P P
CYLINDERS GRIPPERS ROTARY ACTUATORS SLIDES HYDRAULIC-PNEUMATIC ELECTRIC CYLINDER SENSORS, T-SLOT ACCESSORIES, TESTER
PAG.
1-2
ACTUATORS
1-1
PAG. 1-167 PAG. 1-187 PAG. 1-205 PAG. 1-229 PAG. 1-247 PAG. 1-285
CYLINDERS SUMMARY
PAGE 1-4
ACTUATORS
CYLINDERS SUMMARY
PAGE 1-13
PAGE 1-15
PAGE 1-22
PAGE 1-23
PAGE 1-25
PAGE 1-27
PAGE 1-28
PAGE 1-29
PAGE 1-31
PAGE 1-32
PAGE 1-35
PAGE 1-37
PAGE 1-49
PAGE 1-54
PAGE 1-60
PAGE 1-72
PAGE 1-84
PAGE 1-87
P ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS FOR ISO CMPC, TWO-FLAT AND STOPPER CYLINDERS PAGE 1-91
OTHER CYLINDER
P ROUND CYLINDER SERIES RNDC PAGE 1-98
PAGE -103 1
PAGE -110 1
PAGE -112 1
RODLESS CYLINDERS
P RODLESS CYLINDER SERIES STD PAGE -118 1
PAGE -123 1
PAGE -127 1
PAGE -132 1
P ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS FOR RODLESS STD, GUIDE V, WITH BALL CIRCULATION GUIDE AND DOUBLE CYLINDERS P RODLESS CYLINDER SERIES PU
PAGE -133 1
PAGE -139 1
PAGE -149 1
PAGE -157 1
PAGE -161 1
1-3
CYLINDERS SUMMARY
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
Compressed air The cylinders have been designed for use with unlubricated air, in which case no maintenance is required. If lubricated air is used, lubrication must be continuous because the additional lubrication removes the lubricant applied at the factory. With reference to ISO/DIN 8573-1, the compressed air to use is class 3-4-3, i.e.: Solid particle classe 3: 10.000 particles/m3 with d , =1 micron and 500 particles/m3 with d , = 5 micron Humidity classe 4: Pressure dewpoint , = +3 C Oil classe 3: Concentration total oil , = 1 mg/m3 Gasket material Please refer to page 6-7 of the technical documentation for compatibility data. Some families of Metal Work cylinders are available with gaskets made of different materials. Polyurethane: the best in terms of long-life, resistance to wear and reduced friction. Chemically compatible with: Pure aliphatic hydrocarbons (butane, propane, gasoline) Any impurities (moisture, alcohol, acid or alkaline compounds) can chemically attack polyurethane Mineral oil and grease (some additives can chemically attack the material) Silicone oil and grease Water up to +50C Resistance to ozone and ageing Not compatible with: Ketones, esters, ethers Alcohos, glycols Hot water, steam, alkali, amines, acids. Good elasticity down to 35C (for low temperature PU version only). NBR: These gaskets have a shorter life than polyurethane gaskets. However, they are recommended for use in environments causing the formation of water condensate, such as tropical climates, where polyurethane gaskets may tend to deteriorate quickly due to hydrolysis. Chemically compatible with: Methane, butane, propane, oily acids Aliphatic hydrocarbons Lubrication oils Gasoline Not compatible with: Ozone and exposure to sunlight Good elasticity down to 35C (for low temperature NBR version only) FKM/FPM: Can withstand temperatures as high as 150C. This makes them ideal for use on rodless cylinders, high-speed applications, involving high temperatures at the sliding lips. Chemically compatible with: Mineral oil and grease, slight swelling with oil grade ASTM no. 1and 3 Silicon oil and grease Animal and vegetable oil and fat Aliphatic hydrocarbons (gasoline, butane, propane, natural gas) Aromatic hydrocarbons (benzol, toluene) Chlorinated hydrocarbons (tetrachloroethylene) Fuels Ozone, atmospheric agents, ageing Not compatible with: Polar solvents (acetone, methylethylchetone, diethyl ether, dioxane) Glycol-based brake fluid Ammonia gas, amines, alkali Superheated water vapour Low molecular organic acids (formic and acetic acid)
No-stick-slip cylinders Standard cylinders are designed to ensure trouble-free operation under any conditions, particularly at high speed. Operation tends to be irregular and jerky at very low speeds in the presence of side loads. In this case, no-stick-slip cylinders are recommended as they allow smooth operation. These versions feature specifi tribological properties and preferably polyurethane gaskets. Radial oscillation of the piston rod These cylinders have been designed to apply forces in the direction of the axis and not to withstand side loads. If you intend to use the cylinder piston rod with side loads, the play between the piston rod and guide bushing must be taken into account. Indicatively, each 100-mm stroke corresponds to 1-mm radial oscillation measured at the end of the piston rod. Cylinder operating life The life of cylinders depends on numerous factors including axial and radial loads, speed, frequency of use, temperature, shocks, air loss (limits). Below are a few factors that must be taken purely as a reference. They are not binding or guaranteed due to the variability of different factors. Without radial load: ISO 15552 cylinders and round cylinders with polyurethane gaskets: 15.000 km. ISO 15552 cylinders and round cylinders with NBR gaskets: 8.000 km. ISO 6432 cylinders, SSC cylinders and compact cylinders with polyurethane gaskets: 30 million cycles. ISO 6432 cylinders and SSC cylinders with NRB gaskets: 15 million cycles. Rodless cylinders: 5.000 km. Stroke tolerances The actual cylinder stroke has a tolerance with respect to the nominal stroke, in compliance with any applicable laws, within the following ranges: 32 - 50 ISO 15552 cylinders -0 +2 mm 63 - 200 -0 +2.5 mm -1 +1 mm 8 - 25 ISO 6432 Round cylinders 32 - 50 -0.5 +1.5 mm 12 - 50 SSC cylinders -1 +1 mm 63 - 100 -1 +1.5 mm 12 - 100 -0.5 +1.5 mm Compact cylinders Compact cylinders ISO 21287 20 - 100 -0.5 +1.5 mm Rodless cylinders -1 +2 mm 16 - 40 Air loss All the cylinders have air losses, mainly around the gaskets. ISO 10099 establishes the maximum loss allowed in a new cylinder (see table below): Cylinder diameter 8-10-12 16-20-25 32-40-50 63-80-100 125-160-200 Loss (Nl/hour) 0.6 0.8 1.2 2 3 Metal Works own standards are more rigorous than ISO standards, but air loss still occurs. Strokes exceeding the maximum value specified in the catalogu Metal Work can supply cylinders with strokes greater than those specifie in the catalogue, considering the production technological limits. The Metal Work Sales Department can provide you will full details. However, it is up to the end user to use these special cylinders properly, by guiding the piston rod, avoiding peak loads, etc. Magnetic sensors The magnetic fiel generated by permanent magnets housed in the piston assembly changes in shape and intensity depending on the presence of magnetic metal masses in the vicinity of the cylinder. These masses may prevent the sensors from switching correctly, in which case non-magnetic materials should be used. In particular, the tie rods of short-stroke and compact cylinders should preferably be made of stainless steel.
CALCULATING PEAK LOAD ON THE PISTON ROD During operation, the piston rod of the cylinder CONSTRAINT behaves like a rod subjected to peak load (bending + compression). In the case of long strokes, it is necessary to make sure the diameter of the piston rod is correct for the load applied and the type of cylinder and piston rod mounting. The following formulae can be used to do this. A. Calculating the maximum force with a given stroke and piston rod diameter:
#
0.7
B. Calculating the minimum acceptable piston rod diameter with a given stroke and force:
$
0.5
Where: F Force applied [N] Diameter of the piston rod [mm] C Stroke [mm] K Free length coefficient depending on the mounting see diagrams
1.5
CHART OF SPEED / MAXIMUM ABSORBABLE LOAD For the cylinder to reach the end-of-stroke position without suffering damaging impact due to intensity and repetition, it is necessary to annul the kinetic energy of the moving mass and the relative work generated. The maximum absorbable load depends on the transference speed and the absorption capacity of the standard pneumatic cushion in the various cylinders. The chart gives the speed and absorbable mass in various diameters at a pressure of 6 bar, under the best regulation conditions and in a horizontal direction.
1-5
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
Cylinder bore D mm 12 16 20 25
Motion thrust traction thrust traction thrust traction thrust traction thrust traction thrust traction thrust traction thrust traction thrust traction thrust traction thrust traction thrust traction thrust traction
Useful area Air consumption during thrust and traction in Nl/cm of stroke, depending on the working pressure P in bar at 20C cm2 1 bar 2 bar 3 bar 4 bar 5 bar 6 bar 7 bar 8 bar 9 bar 10 bar 1.13 0.0023 0.0034 0.0045 0.0057 0.0068 0.0079 0.0090 0.0102 0.0113 0.0124 1.00 0.0020 0.0030 0.0040 0.0050 0.0060 0.0070 0.0080 0.0090 0.0100 0.0110 2.01 0.0040 0.0060 0.0080 0.0100 0.0121 0.0141 0.0161 0.0181 0.0202 0.0221 1.73 0.0035 0.0052 0.0069 0.0086 0.0104 0.0121 0.0138 0.0156 0.0173 0.0190 3.14 0.0063 0.0094 0.0126 0.0157 0.0188 0.0220 0.0251 0.0283 0.0314 0.0346 2.64 0.0053 0.0079 0.0106 0.0132 0.0158 0.0185 0.0211 0.0238 0.0264 0.0290 4.91 0.0098 0.0147 0.0196 0.0245 0.0295 0.0344 0.0393 0.0442 0.0491 0.0540 3.78 0.0076 0.0113 0.0151 0.0189 0.0227 0.0264 0.0302 0.0340 0.0378 0.0415 8.04 0.016 0.024 0.032 0.040 0.048 0.056 0.064 0.072 0.080 0.088 6.91 0.014 0.021 0.028 0.035 0.042 0.049 0.058 0.063 0.070 0.076 12.56 0.025 0.038 0.050 0.063 0.076 0.088 0.100 0.113 0.126 0.138 10.55 0.021 0.032 0.042 0.053 0.063 0.074 0.088 0.095 0.106 0.116 19.63 0.039 0.059 0.079 0.098 0.118 0.137 0.157 0.177 0.196 0.216 16.49 0.033 0.050 0.066 0.082 0.099 0.115 0.132 0.149 0.165 0.181 31.16 0.062 0.093 0.125 0.156 0.187 0.218 0.249 0.280 0.312 0.343 28.02 0.056 0.084 0.112 0.140 0.168 0.196 0.224 0.252 0.280 0.308 50.24 0.100 0.150 0.200 0.250 0.301 0.351 0.402 0.452 0.502 0.552 45.36 0.091 0.138 0.181 0.227 0.272 0.318 0.363 0.408 0.454 0.500 78.54 0.157 0.238 0.314 0.382 0.471 0.549 0.628 0.706 0.785 0.862 70.50 0.141 0.211 0.282 0.352 0.423 0.493 0.564 0.635 0.705 0.775 122.66 0.245 0.368 0.490 0.613 0.736 0.859 0.981 1.104 1.226 1.349 114.67 0.229 0.344 0.459 0.573 0.688 0.803 0.917 1.032 1.147 1.262 201.06 0.402 0.603 0.804 1.005 1.206 1.407 1.608 1.809 2.010 2.211 188.49 0.377 0.565 0.754 0.942 1.130 1.319 1.508 1.696 1.884 2.673 314.15 0.628 0.942 1.257 1.571 1.885 2.199 2.513 2.827 3.145 3.456 301.59 0.603 0.905 1.206 1.508 1.810 2.111 2.413 2.714 3.016 3.318
Bore mm 32 40 50 63
Bore mm 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
Bore mm 8 10 12 16 20 25
ISO 6432 SINGLE-ACTING CYLINDERS Force with spring Max. stroke compressed N mm 3 50 5 50 7 50 20 50 22 50 28 50
Bore mm 32 40 50
P1 = Force with spring extended P2 = Force with spring compressed Cx = Required stroke Cmax = Max stroke
1-6
Bore mm 6 10 16 6 10 16 6 10 16
SINGLE-ACTING CARTRIDGE CYLINDERS Force with spring Max. stroke compressed N mm 3.7 5 7.8 5 7.2 5 3.9 10 9.6 10 13.3 10 3.9 15 9.1 15 13.3 15
1 bar 0.5 0.4 0.8 0.7 1.1 0.8 2.0 1.7 2.0 1.5 3.1 2.6 3.1 2.4 4.9 4.4 4.9 4.1 8.0 6.9 12.6 11.4 12.6 10.6 19.6 17.6 19.6 16.5 31.2 29.2 31.2 28.0 50.3 47.1 50.3 45.4 78.5 73.6 122.7 114.7 201.1 188.5 314.2 301.6
10 bar 5.0 3.8 7.9 6.6 11.3 8.5 20.1 17.3 20.1 15.1 31.4 26.4 31.4 23.6 49.1 44.1 49.1 41.2 80.4 69.1 125.7 114.4 125.7 105.6 196.3 176.2 196.3 164.9 311.7 291.6 311.7 280.3 502.7 471.2 502.7 453.6 785.4 736.3 1227.2 1146.8 2010.6 1885.0 3141.6 3015.9
1-7
ACTUATORS
WEIGHT OF CYLINDERS
ACTUATORS
8 10 12 16 20 25
Micro-cylinder series ISO 6432 Single-rod Through-rod Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm Stroke = 0 each mm 40 0.234 55 0.334 41 0.257 59 0.371 77 0.419 111 0.635 93 0.491 133 0.708 181 0.732 233 1.121 241 1.100 334 1.722
16 20 25
Micro-cylinder ISO 6432 series TP Single-rod Through-rod Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm Stroke = 0 each mm 66 0.377 101 0.604 94 0.628 131 1.03 144 0.908 207 1.536
12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Single-rod Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm 45 1.24 63 1.65 91 2.14 144 3.04 185 4.14 275 5.05 412 7.09 587 9.32 393 14.41 673 21.94
Short-stroke cylinder series SSCY Through-rod Non-ratating Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm Stroke = 0 each mm 52 1.47 64 1.35 72 2.05 88 1.6 104 2.75 126 2.37 167 3.65 189 3.25 200 4.72 260 4.56 295 5.94 373 5.49 437 8.9 592 7.89 621 10.91 854 10.57 1485 16.9 1740 25.87 2841 25.9 2692 30.77 Compact cylinder series CMPC Through-rod Non-ratating Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm Stroke = 0 each mm 104 1.82 105 1.90 124 1.90 109 1.81 204 2.95 181 2.78 233 3.32 220 3.15 282 4.05 306 3.96 408 5.29 457 5.20 605 7.98 709 7.64 656 8.90 977 8.56 1624 15.02 1851 14.33 3100 19.93 3710 17.87
Oscillating Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm 272 4.14 386 5.05 620 7.09 889 9.32 -
12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Single-rod Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm 96 1.59 105 1.51 171 2.35 201 2.73 246 3.17 370 4.41 552 6.42 779 7.34 1468 12.57 2988 16.11
Through-rod non-rotating Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm 114 2.12 129 2.20 214 3.39 252 3.76 343 4.84 495 6.08 768 9.21 1054 10.13 2027 16.78 3850 21.70
Cylinder series ISO 15552, ISO 15552 TWO-FLAT Single-rod Through-rod Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm Stroke = 0 each mm 433 2.2 494 3.09 660 3.15 783 4.73 1087 4.57 1348 7.04 1443 5.03 1718 7.44 2815 7.49 3260 10.16 3897 8.79 4425 12.33 6988 13.42 8040 18 12979 22.92 13800 30 17000 28 18000 39
32 40 50 63 80 100 125
Cylinder series ISO 15552 type A, ISO 15552 type A TWO-FLAT Single-rod Through-rod Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm Stroke = 0 each mm 460 3.09 576 3.98 716 4.08 916 5.66 1155 5.86 1513 8.33 1524 5.92 1945 8.33 2886 9.07 3520 11.74 3965 9.48 4779 13.02 7093 14.11 8642 18.69
32 40 50 63 80 100 125
Cylinder ISO 15552 series 3 Single-rod Through-rod Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm Stroke = 0 each mm 434 2.30 495 3.19 660 3.22 783 4.80 1079 4.50 1340 6.97 1427 4.78 1702 7.24 2774 6.73 3219 10.58 3836 7.726 4364 11.58 6529 11.63 7581 17.94
32 40 50 63
Cylinder ISO 15552 Ultra-low frictions Single-rod Weight [g] Stroke = 0 504 774 1245 1697
1-8
32 40 50
Round cylinder series RNDC Single-rod Through-rod Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm Stroke = 0 each mm 404 1.44 455 2.04 660 1.58 808 3.14 1235 3.59 1507 6.03
32 40 50 63 80
Compact cylinder series CMPC TWO-FLAT Single-rod Through-rod Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm Stroke = 0 each mm 261 3.17 297 4.05 394 4.41 432 5.29 595 6.42 648 7.98 845 7.34 129 8.90 1524 12.57 1680 15.02
20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
ISO 21287 cylinder series LINER Single-rod Through-rod Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm Stroke = 0 each mm 98 2.49 110 3.10 119 2.63 133 3.24 182 3.62 197 4.50 228 4.09 243 4.98 330 5.67 355 7.25 461 6.52 487 8.10 991 10.11 1066 12.58 1869 13.78 2029 17.63 Rodless cylinder Series Double Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm 561 1.72 1607 3.58 3737 7.68
32 40 50 63 80 100
Twin-rod cylinder series TWNC Single-rod Through-rod Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm Stroke = 0 each mm 725 2.57 790 3.79 945 2.81 1065 4.03 1499 3.96 1737 5.72 2360 5.72 2628 8.85 4300 9.59 4730 15.52 6270 10.89 6775 16.8
Standard 16 25 32 40 63 (Std) 63 (Heavy) Weight [g] Stroke = 0 244 746 1707 2911 7280 Weight [g] each mm 0.86 1.79 3.84 5.55 9.22
with Guide Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm 460 1.79 1.421 2.99 3.025 5.04 4.434 6.75 10.860 10.65 13.275 14.02
with Guida V Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm 953 1.98 2.150 3.21 3.210 4.67 9.230 9.27 -
25 32 40 50
Rodless cylinder series PU Weight [g] Stroke = 0 1009 1535 2702 4875 Guide unit Type GDS Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm 150 0.78 150 0.78 420 1.22 420 1.22 772 1.76 1000 1.76 1900 3.13 2300 3.13 3800 4.9 7000 4.9 Compact Stopper cylinder Trunnion version Weight [g] 210 420 1.190 -
16 20 25
Rodless cylinder series MAGNETIC SLIDE Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm 490 0.262 795 0.325 1250 0.487
12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Type GDH and GDM Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm 374 0.78 374 0.78 759 1.22 759 1.22 1200 1.76 2000 3.13 3300 4.9 4750 4.9 8500 7.26 12000 7.26
16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Compact guided cylinder Non-cushioned (approximate) Cushioned (approximate) Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm Stroke = 0 each mm 295 4.77 414 4.77 486 6.38 543 6.38 550 10.01 735 10.01 942 16.51 1.354 16.51 1028 18.04 1.479 18.04 1355 23.76 1.949 23.76 1900 32.56 2.714 32.56 3910 55.77 5710 73.48 -
1-9
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
ISO 6432 MINI-CYLINDERS SERIES STD
Mini-cylinders to ISO 6432 with a chamfered stainless steel barrel. The cylinder head dimensions have been reduced for some sizes so that they can be used where there are space restrictions. Can be used with different types of sensors. Available in various versions with a wide range of accessories: with or without magnet single and double acting single or through rod with pneumatic cushioning ( 16-20-25) gaskets made of NBR, POLYURETHANE, and FKM/FPM (for high temperatures), and low-temperature gaskets special executions on request fixin accessories, guide units and mechanical rod locking
TECHNICAL DATA
Max operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Bores Design Standard strokes bar MPa C mm mm
Polyurethane
NBR
FKM/FPM
Low temperature
Versions Magnet for sensors Inrush pressure single piston rod through-rod Forces generated at 6 bar thrust/retraction Weights Notes
bar bar
10 1 10 to +80 10 to +80 10 to +150 (non-magnetic cylinders) 35 to +80 Unlubricated air. Lubrication, if used, must be continuous 8; 10; 12; 16; 20; 25 Chamfered barrel Single-acting: for bores 8 to 25 strokes from 1 to 50 Double-acting: for bores 8 to 10 strokes from 1 to 100 for bores 12 to 16 strokes from 1 to 200 for bores 20 to 25 strokes from 1 to 500 Double-acting, cushioned: for bores 16 strokes from 1 to 300 for bores 20 to 25 strokes from 1 to 500 Double-acting, Double-acting cushioned, Single-acting retracted piston rod, Through-rod, Through-rod cushioned, Version with piston rod block, no-stick slip All versions come complete with magnet. Supplied without magnet on request. 8 10 12 16 20 25 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.6 0.6 0.6 1 1 1 0.8 0.8 0.8 See page 1-7 See page 1-8 For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s to prevent surging, use the version No stick-slip and non-lubricated air. Maximum recommended strokes. Higher values can create operating problems
COMPONENTS a PISTON ROD: C45 steel or stainless steel, thick chromed b HEAD: anodised aluminium alloy c PISTON ROD GASKET: polyurethane, NBR or FKM/FPM d GUIDE BUSHING: steel strip with bronze and PTFE insert e BARREL: AISI 304 steel f HALF-PISTON: acetal resin g PISTON ROD GASKET: polyurethane, NBR or FKM/FPM h MAGNET: plastoneodymium i CUSHIONING GASKET: NBR or FKM/FPM j NEEDLE: OT 58 with needle out movement safety system even when fully open k BUSHING (optional): self-lubricating bronze
1-10
8 10 12 16 20 25
AM +0.0;-2.0 12 12 16 16 20 22
CD H9 4 4 6 6 8 8
D1 4 4 6 6 8 10
G 6 6 6 6 8 9
EE M5 M5 M5 M5 G 1/8 G 1/8
EW d13 8 8 12 12 16 16
L 6.5 6.5 9 9 12 12
L2 10 10 13 13 14 17
L3 12 12 17 17 17 20
L4 10 10 10 10 15.5 17.1
L5 46 46 49 56 68 73
L6 46 46 47 53 61 66.5
KK M4 M4 M6 M6 M8 M10x1.25
XC 1 64 64 75 82 95 104
WF 1,2 16 16 22 22 24 28
KW 7 7 8 8 7 7
KV 19 19 24 24 32 32
MR 12 12 16 16 18 21
NA 15 15 17 18 24 30
NB 15 15 17 18 24 30
SW 7 7 10 10 13 17
CH 3 3 5 5 7 8
8 10 12 16 20 25
AM +0.0;-2.0 12 12 16 16 20 22
D1 4 4 6 6 8 10
G 6 6 6 6 8 9
EE M5 M5 M5 M5 G 1/8 G 1/8
L3 12 12 17 17 17 20
L4 10 10 10 10 15.5 17.1
L5 46 46 49 56 68 73
KK M4 M4 M6 M6 M8 M10x1.25
WF 1,2 16 16 22 22 24 28
KW 7 7 8 8 7 7
KV 19 19 24 24 32 32
NA 15 15 17 18 24 30
NB 15 15 17 18 24 30
SW 7 7 10 10 13 17
CH 3 3 5 5 7 8
1-11
ACTUATORS
KEY TO CODES
ACTUATORS
CYL 101 102 104 n 106 n 109 110 111 112 n 113 t 114 t n 115 116 n 117
112 TYPE SE axial coupling DEM axial coupling SE through-rod SE cushioned DEA DE SE DEM DEMA DEM through-rod DEMA through-rod DEM for mechanical lock DEMA for mechanical lock
0 0 Standard U Bronze rear head bushing V Without head nut S Non-magnetic s G No stick slip
16 BORE t 08 t 10 t 12 t 16 t 20 t 25
0020 STROKE For the maximum suppliable strokes, look at the technical data
A C Z X
C MATERIAL C45 chrome rod, aluminium piston rod C45 chrome rod, technopolymer piston rod Stainless steel piston rod and nut aluminium piston Stainless steel piston rod and nut technopolymer piston
Double-acting (non-cushioned, not magnetic) Magnetic double-acting (non-cushioned) Magnetic double-acting (cushioned) Cushioned double-acting (non-magnetic) Single-acting (magnetic)
s t n
Only available for non-magnetic versions (S) and with aluminium piston (A or Z) For speeds lower than 0.2m/s, to prevent surging. Use no-lubricated air only Stainless steel piston rod Available from 16 Available from 12 For 16 to 25 aluminium piston, stainless stell piston rod
NOTES
1-12
Minicylinders manufactured according to the ISO 6432 regulation having high resistance technopolymer heads and anodized aluminium liner. Available in various versions with a wide range of accessories: with or without magnet single and double acting-single or through rod gaskets made of POLYURETHANE fixin accessories and guide units.
TECHNICAL DATA
Max operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Bores Design Standard strokes Versions Forces generated at 6 bar thrust/retraction Weights Inrush pressure single piston rod through-rod Notes bar MPa C mm mm mm
POLYURETHANE 10 1 10 to +60 Unlubricated air. Lubrication, if used, must be continuous 16; 20; 25 Aluminium liner chamfered on the heads 16: from 1 to 200 20 to 25: from 1 to 500 Double-acting, Double Through-rod (for both there are magnetic and non magnetic versions) See page 1-7 See page 1-8 8 10 12 16 20 25 0.8 0.8 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.8 1 1 1 0.8 0.8 0.8 The standard version is lacking of the head nut Use of fittings with a taper thread is NOT recommended. Maximum recommended strokes. Higher values can create operating problems.
bar bar
COMPONENTS a PISTON ROD: C45 steel or stainless steel, thick chromed b HEADS: high resistance technopolymer c PISTON ROD GASKET: polyurethane d GUIDE OPERATOR: technopolymer e BARREL: drawn anoside aluminium alloy f PISTON GASKET: polyurethane g MAGNET: plastoneodymium h STATIC O-RINGS: NBR i COVER PLATE: technopolymer
1-13
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
ISO 6432 MINI-CYLINDERS SERIES TP
+ = ADD STROKE
16 20 25
AM 16 20 22
CD (H9) 6 8 8
D 21 25 30
D1 6 8 10
EE M5 1/8 1/8
EW (d13) 12 16 16
OH 12 16 17
L 11 15 15
L2 13 14 17
L3 17 17 20
L5 56 68 73
KK M6 M8 M10x1.25
XC(1) 82 95 104
WF 22 24 28
KW 8 7 7
KV 24 32 32
MR 16 18 21
SW 10 13 17
CH 5 7 8
16 20 25
16 20 25
AM 16 20 22
D 21 25 30
D1 6 8 10
EE M5 1/8 1/8
OH 12 16 17
L3 17 17 20
L5 56 68 73
KK M6 M8 M10x1.25
WF 22 24 28
KW 8 7 7
KV 24 32 32
SW 10 13 17
CH 5 7 8
16 20 25
KEY TO CODES
CYL 110 TYPE 110 DE non-magnetic minicylinder 112 DEM minicylinder 114 DEM through-rod minicylinder 3 3 TP heads (standard) 4 TP heads (standard) + head nut 16 BORE n 16 20 25 0 0 S Standard Non-magnetic 020 STROKE For the maximum suppliable strokes, look at the technical data C MATERIAL C C45 chrome rod X Stainless rod P GASKETS P Polyurethane
DE: Double-acting (non-cushioned, not magnetic). DEM: Double action magnetic (unless otherwise specified not cushioned.
As standard the cylinders are already no stick-slip version. This version dont provide the nut on the head. n 16 will be only in version with stainless rod (X).
1-14
FLANGE MODEL C
Code W0950080002 8 W0950080002 10 W0950120002 12 W0950120002 16 W0950200002 20 W0950200002 25 *ISO 6432 values D 12 12 16 16 22 22 W 1.4 13 13 18 18 19 23 FB H13 4.5 4.5 5.5 5.5 6.5 6.5 TF Js14 30 30 40 40 50 50 UF 40 40 52 52 66 66 UR 22 22 30 30 40 40 S 3 3 4 4 5 5 Weight [g] 10 10 26 26 52 52
COUNTER-HINGE MODEL BC
Code W0950080005 8 W0950080005 10 W0950120005 12 W0950120005 16 W0950200005 20 W0950200005 25 *ISO 6432 values AO 2.5 2.5 2 2 4 4 LG 22 22 25 25 32 32 TR Js13 12.5 12.5 15 15 20 20 NH 0.2 24 24 27 27 30 30 MO 18 18 25 25 30 30 AB1 4 4 6 6 8 8 AB H13 4.5 4.5 5.5 5.5 6.5 6.5 R 6 6 7 7 10 10 S 2.5 2.5 3 3 4 4 Weight [g] 24 24 40 40 78 78
1-15
ACTUATORS
D 12 12 16 16 22 22
XS 1.4 24 24 32 32 36 40
AU 11 11 14 14 17 17
AO 5 5 6 6 8 8
NH 0.3 16 16 20 20 25 25
TR Js14 25 25 32 32 40 40
US 35 35 42 42 54 54
R 10 10 13 13 20 20
S 3 3 4 4 5 5
Weight [g] 22 22 42 42 90 90
ACTUATORS
8 10 12 16 20 25
M 4 4 6 6 8 10
C 8 8 12 12 16 20
B 4 4 6 6 8 10
A 8 8 12 12 16 20
L 21 21 31 31 42 52
F 16 16 24 24 32 40
D M4 M4 M6 M6 M8 M10x1.25
N 11 11 16 16 22 26
Weight [g] 8 8 20 20 48 92
Note: Individually packed MATERIAL Circlip: stainless steel Sensor holder: plastic
1-16
Note: Individually packed. For the 16 in addition to the circlip 2 reduction rings, for the 20 and 25 1 reduction ring.
USE SENSORS
SERIES STD
SERIES TP
1-17
ACTUATORS
Operating pressure Temperature range Installation Mechanics Operation Fluid Locking force Pilot port MATERIALS body shoe spring piston gasket
bar MPa C
3 to 6 0.3 to 0.6 -10 to +80 In any position Double shoe with mechanical locking Mechanical stick-slip NC bidirectional Lubricated or unlubricated compressed air 12-16: 180 N / 20: 250 N 25: 400 N M5
OPERATING PRINCIPLE The mechanical piston rod lock is a normally-closed mechanism. In the absence of pneumatic piloting, the two shoes (A) lock the cylinder rod in both directions (Fig. 1). With pneumatic piloting, the piston rod guide forces the shoes to come right up to each other and overcome the counter spring (B) force and the piston rod can slide (Fig. 2). It is important to remember that the mechanical piston rod lock is a static type, which means that it is necessary to stop the cylinder piston rod pneumatically before locking the part mechanically. Fig. 1 Fig. 2
DIMENSIONS
+ = ADD STROKE
12 16 20 25
A m / 25 m / 25 27 27
B 25 m / 25 m / 38 38
C 31.5 31.5 40 40
D 20 20 20 20
E M5 M5 M5 M5
G 12 12 23 23
H 19 19 21 21
I 23 23 24 24
L 47 47 58 58
M 52 52 65 68
N 53 60 71 76
P(1.2) 57 57 72 76
1-18
* With bronze guide bushing ** With ball guide bushing GUIDE ELEMENTS
SERIES GDS-GDH Body: Guide bushing: Piston rod: Body: Guide bushing: Piston rod: aluminium alloy self-lubricating syntered bronze and wiper rings chromed rolled steel aluminium alloy linear guide ball bearings and wiper rings tempered and chromed steel
SERIES GDM
1-19
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
ACCESSORIES FOR ISO 6432 MINI-CYLINDERS
12 16 20 25
A 30 30 34 34
A1 27 27 32 32
B 65 65 79 79
B1 63 63 76 76
C 75 75 108 108
C1 10 10 12 12
Ch 8 8 13 13
Ch1 19 19 27 27
D 4 4 6 6
D1 5 5
E 15 15 20 20
E1 32 32 40 40
E2 54 54 68 68
E4 24 24 38 38
E6 22 22 23 23
E7 11 11 15 15
F M4 M4 M6 M6
F1 M4 M4 M5 M5
F4 7.5 7.5 9 9
L1 M N P 53 54 15 5.5 60 54 15 5.5 71 65 15 7 76 65 15 7
S U 10 37 10 37 12 58 12 58
STROKE
Cylinder stroke [mm] from to 0 75 75 125 125 175 175 225 225 275 275 345 345 425 425 525 Guide stroke [mm] 50 100 150 200 250 320 400 500
Note: Thanks to the dimensional features, it is possible to extend the use of GDH/GDM guides to cylinders with strokes up to 25 mm above the nominal guide stroke. The table here shows the stroke/cylinder range that can be used depending on the nominal stroke of the guide.
1-20
A 12 30 16 30
A1 27 27
B 65 65
B1 63 63
C 38 38
C1 10 10
Ch 8 8
Ch1 D 19 4 19 4
E 15 15
E1 32 32
E2 54 54
E3 E4 6.5 24 6.5 24
E5 25 25
E6 22 22
H 15 15
I 46 46
L 70 70
L1 53 60
M 54 54
N 13 13
A 20 40 25 40
A1 38 38
A2 24 65
B B1 100 90 100 90
C 48 48
C1 12 12
Ch 13 13
Ch1 D 27 6 27 6
E 15 15
E1 70 70
E2 55 55
E6 10 10
E7 30 30
F F1 F2 M8 M6 14 M8 M6 14
F3 9 9
F4 11 11
F5 G 6.5 22 6.5 22
H 20 20
I 76 76
L 77 77
L1 71 76
M 65 71
N 17 17
P 9 9
P1 S 6.5 12 6.5 12
STROKE
Cylinder stroke [mm] from to 0 50 51 100 101 150 151 200 201 250 Guide stroke [mm] 50 100 150 200 250
Note: Thanks to the dimensional features, it is possible to use the range of strokes - cylinders, as shown in the table here, without the guide piston rods projecting beyond the cylinder fixin value (L1 +).
1-21
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
Cylinders made to ISO 15552 available in various versions and with a wide range of accessories: Configuratio with or without magnet Single-or double acting single-or through-rod Wide choice of NBR, POLYURETHANE and FKM/FPM gaskets (for high temperatures, for low temperature) Special versions on request Fixing accessories, guide units and mechanical piston rod lock. They are available in three series, which differ according to the shape of the barrel and, consequently, the type of sensors and accessories that can be mounted. These cylinders are called series STD, type A, series 3.
TECHNICAL DATA
Max operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Bore Design Standard stroke bar MPa psi C
Polyurethane
NBR
FKM/FPM
Low Temperature
10 1 145 10 to +80 10 to +80 10 to +150 (non-magnetic cyl.) 35 to +80 Unlubricated air. Lubrication, if used, must be continuous mm 32; 40; 50; 63; 80; 100; 125 Heads with Tap Tite screws mm Single-acting: for bores 32 to 63 strokes from 1 to 250 Double-acting: for bores 32 to 80 strokes from 1 to 2800 for bores 100 to 125 strokes from 1 to 2600 Double-acting cushioned, Single-acting retracted piston rod cushioned, Through-rod cushioned, Long cushioning, High-temperature, Piston rod lock, Oil seal, Through-rod oil seal, Low friction, Non-stick-slip. All versions come complete with magnet. Supplied without magnet on request. 32; 40: 0.4 bar 50; 63 strokes < 1500 mm: 0.3 bar; strokes > 1500 mm: 0.4 bar 80; 100; 125 strokes < 1500 mm: 0.2 bar; strokes > 1500 mm: 0.4 bar For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s to prevent surging, use the version No stick-slip and non-lubricated air. Maximum recommended strokes. Higher values can create operating problems See page 1-7 See page 1-8
COMPONENTS a PISTON ROD: C45 steel or stainless steel, thick chromed b HEAD: die cast aluminium c PISTON ROD GASKET: polyurethane, NBR or FKM/FPM d GUIDE BUSHING: steel strip with bronze and PTFE insert e BARREL: drawn anodised calibrated aluminium f HALF-PISTON: self-lubricating technopolymer with built-in cushioning olives (aluminium with PTFE pad for diameters 80-100-125) g PISTON GASKET: polyurethane, NBR or FKM/FPM h MAGNET: plastoferrite i BUFFER + Static O-rings: NBR or FKM/FPM j CUSHIONING GASKET: polyurethane, NBR or FKM/FPM k CUSHIONING NEEDLE: OT 58 with needle out movement safety system even when fully open l SCREWS: Tap Tite for assembly
1-22
ISO 15552 cylinders, featuring a smooth barrel with no longitudinal slots. This means it is easier to clean the cylinder and there are fewer points where dirt can collect. Specifi brackets are required for mounting magnetic sensors.
1-23
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
CYL 120 121 122 124 125 126 127 134 136 137
121 TYPE Double-acting, cuschioned, non-magnetic Double-acting, cushioned Through-rod Double-acting, non-cuschioned Opposed Single-acting Tandem Rod lock version Version with piston rod lock Piston rod lock + guide unit
0050 STROKE For the maximum suppliable strokes, look at the technical data
A C Z X
C MATERIAL C45 chromed rod, aluminium piston rod: standard for all cylinders with 1000 mm-stroke cylinders and for cylinder with 80 mm and over C45 chromed rod, technopolymer piston: standard for cylinders of 32 to 63 mm with <1000 mm strokes Stainless steel piston rod and nut aluminium piston Stainless steel piston rod and nut technopolymer piston
N P V B
n In the code of cylinder with letter in fourth position 100 becomes A1; 125 becomes A2 Only available for versions with aluminium piston (A or Z) Available until 63 and only the versions with piston in aluminum (A or Z)
s For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s, to prevent surging. Use no-lubricated air only Available up to 100 Not available for gaskets V or B
A C Z X
A Z
1-24
ISO 15552 cylinders, featuring a barrel with longitudinal slots on three sides for inserting and securing retractable sensors. The same slots can also be used for valves and other mechanical parts.
1-25
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
CYL
121 TYPE 121 Double-acting, cushioned 122 Through-rod 124 Double-acting, non-cuschioned 125 Opposed 126 Single-acting 127 Tandem 134 Rod lock version 136 Version with piston rod lock 137 Piston rod lock + guide unit
0050 STROKE For the maximum suppliable strokes, look at the technical data
A C Z X
C MATERIAL C45 chromed rod, aluminium piston rod: standard for all cylinders with 1000 mm-stroke cylinders and for cylinder with 80 mm and over C45 chromed rod, technopolymer piston: standard for cylinders of 32 to 63 mm with <1000 mm strokes Stainless steel piston rod and nut aluminium piston Stainless steel piston rod and nut technopolymer piston
N P V B
Only available for versions with aluminium piston (A or Z) Available until 63 and only the versions with piston in aluminum (A or Z) For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s, to prevent surging. Use no-lubricated air only Available up to 100
A C Z X
A Z
1-26
ISO 15552 cylinders, featuring specially-shaped barrels designed to reduce weight to a minimum. Two T-slots on the same side as the threaded fitting can take retractable sensors. The other three sides of the barrel are smooth, with no slots, and hence easy to clean.
KEY TO CODES
CYL 121 122 124 125 126 127 134 n 136 n 137 121 TYPE Double-acting, cushioned Through-rod Double-acting, non-cuschioned Opposed Single-acting Tandem Rod lock version Version with piston rod lock Piston rod lock + guide unit 3 3 4 5 Series 3 Series 3 No stick slip Series 3 Non-magnetic 32 BORE 32 40 50 63 80 A1 = 100 A2 = 125 0050 STROKE For the maximum suppliable strokes, look at the technical data C MATERIAL C45 chromed rod, aluminium piston rod: standard for all cylinders with 1000 mm-stroke cylinders and for cylinder with 80 mm and over C45 chromed rod, technopolymer piston: standard for cylinders of 32 to 63 mm with <1000 mm strokes Stainless steel piston rod and nut aluminium piston Stainless steel piston rod and nut technopolymer piston N GASKETS NBR gaskets Polyurethane gaskets FKM/FPM gaskets Low temperature
A C Z X
N P V B
Only available for versions with aluminium piston (A or Z) Available until 63 and only the versions with piston in aluminum (A or Z) For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s, to prevent surging. Use no-lubricated air only
1-27
ACTUATORS
ISO 15552 LOW-FRICTION CYLINDERS (EX ISO 6431) CODE 123 FOR SERIES STD CODE 129 FOR TYPE A
ACTUATORS
ISO 15552 LOW FRICTIONS CYLINDERS The low-friction cylinder is typically used as a dandy or tensioning cylinder since it is a single-acting cylinder without a return spring. The configuration are shown below: 1) The best type is A as it involves less friction. 2) Type B should be used when the cylinder is working under normal conditions outside the pneumatic cushioning area. Cushioning is only for emergency use. It acts as a shock absorber in the case of malfunction. 3) Type C differs from type A due to the presence of a piston rod gasket that prevents dirt getting in when operating in dirty environments. 4) Type D differs from type B due to the presence of a piston rod gasket that prevents dirt getting in when operating in dirty environments. 5) Type E should be used when the pressurized chamber is the front one. 6) For type F, see point 2. NB. THE CYLINDER IS ALWAYS SINGLE-ACTING WITHOUT A RETURN SPRING.
TYPE Rear chamber pressure Rear chamber pressure and cushioning in case of impact Rear chamber pressure and piston rod gasket Rear chamber pressure, cushioning in case of impact and piston rod gasket Front chamber pressure Front chamber pressure and cushioning in case of impact A B C D E F GASKETS 1 1+3 1+5 1+3+5 2+5 2+5+4
COMPONENTS a Rear chamber piston gasket made of polyurethane ( 32 to 125) b Front chamber piston gasket made of polyurethane ( 32 to 125) c Rear chamber cushioning gasket made of polyurethane d Front chamber cushioning gasket made of polyurethane e Piston rod gasket made of polyurethane
1-28
TECHNICAL DATA
Max operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Bore Standard stroke Design Versions Sensor magnet Inrush pressure bar MPa psi C
NBR 10 1 145 10 to +80 Unlubricated air mm 32; 40; 50; 63 mm 1 to 1200 Heads with Tap Tite screws Double-acting magnetic, Double-acting non-magnetic (always no stick slip cylinder) All the versions with or without magnet bar 32 = 0.08 40 = 0.06 50 = 0.05 63 = 0.04 See page 1-7 See page 1-8 There may be leakage between the two chambers in the presence of low pressures (up to 1 bar)
COMPONENTS a PISTON ROD: C45 steel or stainless steel, thick chromed b HEAD: die cast aluminium c PISTON ROD GASKET: NBR d GUIDE BUSHING: steel strip with bronze insert e BARREL: drawn anodised calibrated aluminium f PISTON GASKET: NBR g HALF-PISTON: aluminium alloy h MAGNET: plastoferrite i GUIDE RING: special technopolymer j BUFFER + Static O-rings: NBR k CUSHIONING NEEDLE: OT 58 with needle out movement safety system even when fully open l SCREWS: Tap Tite for assembly
1-29
A typical ultra-low friction cylinder is generally used as an oscillating or tensioning cylinder. It is single acting, in the sense that compressed air is normally fed into one of the two chambers only. An external force acts on the other side. Metal Works ultra-low friction cylinder is designed as a double-acting one, which means the compressed air can be fed into the rear or either the front chamber. They are built to comply with ISO 15552 and are available with or without a magnet. Supplied with a series 3 barrel. A through-rod version is not available. These cylinders are always non-cushioned. The gaskets are made of NBR. A full range of accessories is available.
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
Pressure P [bar]
The clean friction values a in N have been obtained by inserting in the back chamber the pressure P in bars, and simultaneously by detecting the necessary force F in N to make the rod re-enter, applying the following formula: a = F [(P x S) x 9.81] where S is the thrust section in cm2 KEY TO CODES
CYL 123 TYPE 123 Ultra-low friction 3 3 5 Double-acting magnetic Double-acting not magnetic 32 BORE 32 40 50 63 0100 STROKE From 1 to 1200 mm A MATERIAL C45 chromed rod, aluminium piston rod Stainless steel piston rod and nut aluminium piston N GASKETS N NBR gaskets
A Z
ALL the cylinders are no stick slip. ALL the cylinders are non-cushioned. Ultra-low friction cylinders are not available in the through-rod version.
1-30
ISO 15552 CYLINDERS WITH COMBI PISTON ROD GASKET (EX ISO 6431)
FEATURES AND ADVANTAGES COMBI gaskets have three functions - sealing, scraping and securing. The outer projection of the scraper ring secures the cylinder head in its seat, so steel retaining rings are not required. This eliminates the risk of corrosion due to the presence of metal. Friction is reduced. The materials used in the scraper ring and sealing element make the gasket extremely long lasting. Cylinders with COMBI gaskets can be used with unlubricated dry air. The cylinder head seat is the same as for other Metal Work cylinder gaskets, so the cylinder head is standard.
OPERATING PRINCIPLE The gasket is housed in the cylinder head a. Inside the cylinder there is compressed air c. Dirt d deposits on the piston rod b. The sealing element e provides the pneumatic seal. The scraper ring f cleans the piston rod. The projection g on the scraper ring secures the gasket in the cylinder head seat.
TECHNICAL DATA Bores: 32; 40; 50; 63; 80; 100; 125. The same as for ISO 15552 cylinders with NBR gaskets. Maximum recommended speed: 1 m/s.
KEY TO CODES The codes for ISO 15552 cylinders apply, the last letter C identifying the type of gasket. Example: 1210320100CC: ISO 15552 cylinder, dual-acting, cushioned, magnetic, diameter 32, stroke 100 mm, piston rod made of C45 chrome, COMBI piston rod gasket, other gaskets NBR.
1-31
In some applications the piston rod is exposed to pollutants and dirt, which tend to adhere to the surface. Ordinary gaskets are made of relatively soft elastomers as their main job is to provide a pneumatic seal. In critical applications they are unable to scrape dirt off the surface of the piston rod. COMBI piston rod gaskets are designed to solve these problems. They are made up of two separate parts: a sealing element, inside the cylinder, made of a special NBR elastomer with a Shore A hardness of 80 to provide a pneumatic seal. a scraper ring, outside the cylinder, made of highly wear-resistant plastic.
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
TYPE A
32 40 50 63 80 100 125
PL 10 12 14 16 18 20 25
VD 6.5 8 13 14 12 14 20
A 10 10 10 10 12 12 10
B 30 35 40 45 45 55 60
B1 28 33 38 40 43 49 54
WH 26 30 37 37 46 51 65
C1 16 20 25 25 33 38 45
CH1 10 13 17 17 22 22 27
CH2 17 19 24 24 30 30 41
CH3 6 6 8 8 10 10 12
D 12 16 20 20 25 25 32
VA 4 4 4 4 4 4 6
F 22 24 32 32 40 40 54
P 6 6 6 6 10 10 12
Q 4 4 6 6 7 7 8
ISO ISO NON ISO NON ISO NON ISO NON ISO NON ISO NON ISO NON ISO NON ISO
1-32
TYPE A
32 40 50 63
PL 10 12 14 16
VD 6.5 8 13 14
A 10 10 10 10
B 30 35 40 45
B1 29 34 38 38
C2 96 97 101.5 101.5
CH1 10 13 17 17
CH2 17 19 24 24
CH3 6 6 8 8
CH4 27 30 35 35
D 12 16 20 20
F 22 24 32 32
RT M6 M6 M8 M8
E 46 54 64.5 75.5
P 6 6 6 6
Q 4 4 6 6
1-33
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
ISO 15552 CYLINDERS DIMENSIONS
32 40 50 63 80 100 125
WH 26 30 37 37 46 51 65
VA 4 4 4 4 4 4 6
R 55 55 68 68 92 92 120
32 40 50 63 80 100 125
WH 26 30 37 37 46 51 65
R 55 55 68 68 92 92 120
1-34
TECHNICAL DATA
Max operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Bore Design Maximun stroke Versions Sensor magnet Inrush pressure Max torque on piston rod Maximum rotation on the rod Forces generated at 6 bar thrust/retraction Weights Notes bar MPa psi C mm mm
POLYURETHANE 10 1 145 10 to +80 Unlubricated air. Lubrication, if used, must be continuous 32; 40; 50; 63 Heads with Tap Tite screws 32 = 300 40 = 400 50 = 500 63 = 500 Double-acting cushioned, Through-rod cushioned, no-stick slip All versions come complete with magnet. Supplied without magnet on request. 32 = 0.4 40 = 0.4 50 = 0.3 63 = 0.3 32 = 0.2 40 = 0.4 50 = 1 63 = 1 32 = 0.70 40 = 0.75 50 = 0.65 63 = 0.65 See page 1-7 See page 1-8 * For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s to prevent surging, use the version No stick-slip and non-lubricated air.
bar Nm degrees
Maximum recommended strokes. Higher values can create operating problems s For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s, to prevent surging. Use no-lubricated air only
Maximum recommended strokes. Higher values can create operating problems s For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s, to prevent surging. Use no-lubricated air only
1-35
This version of cylinder is used to keep the parts fixe to the piston rod at an angle and to apply torques within the specifie limits. The piston rod of the Two Flat has two opposing longitudinal surfaces; it is made of stainless steel. The front cylinder head includes a sintered bronze bush that matches the profil of the piston rod and prevents it from rotating on its own axis. A special polyurethane gasket ensures pneumatic seal and prevents the accumulation of dirt. This technical solution is more reliable and gives a better pneumatic seal than with square or hexagonal piston rods. Supplied in series STD, with a smooth barrel, and type A, with a barrel with slots for retractable sensors. They are available in several versions and with a wide range of accessories: with or without magnet double acting, single piston rod double acting, through rod; one piston rod is Two Flat, the other cylindrical fixin accessories.
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
ISO 15552 TWO-FLAT CYLINDERS
32 40 50 63
A 10 12 14 16
A1 7 9 14 14
A2 10 10 10 10
B 30 35 40 45
C 26 30 37 37
C1 16 20 25 25
CH 10 13 17 17
CH1 6 6 8 8
CH2 10 13 17 17
CH3 17 19 24 24
D1 12 16 20 20
D2 15 19 19 23
E1 5 5 5 5
F 22 24 32 32
G1 M6 M6 M8 M8
H 47 53 65 75
L1 74 81 78 89
M 9 9 12 12
P 6 6 6 6
Q 4 4 6 6
1-36
ACCESSORIES FOR ISO 15552 STD, TYPE A, SERIES 3, TWO FLAT: FIXINGS
FOOT - MODEL A
+ = ADD THE STROKE Code W0950322001 W0950402001 W0950502001 W0950632001 W0950802001 W0951002001 W0951252001 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 AB 7 9 9 9 12 14 16 AH 32 36 45 50 63 71 90 AO 11 15 15 15 20 25 15 AT 4 4 4 6 6 6 7 AU 24 28 32 32 41 41 45 TR 32 36 45 50 63 75 90 E 45 52 65 75 95 115 140 XA 144 163 175 190 215 230 270 SA 142 161 170 185 210 220 250 Weight [g] 76 100 162 266 456 572 1130
1-37
ACTUATORS
1-38
NOTES
1-39
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
INTERMEDIATE HINGE - MODEL EN, FOR TYPE A AND TYPE A TWO-FLAT SERIES
= ADD THE STROKE + + 1/2 = ADD HALF THE STROKE Code 0950322107 0950402107 0950502107 0950632107 0950802107 0951002107 0951252107 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 X (min) 63 72 83 86.5 104 113.5 135 XV 73 82.5 90 97.5 110 120 145 X (max) 83 93 97 108.5 116 126.5 155 TM 50 63 75 90 110 132 160 TL 12 16 16 20 20 25 25 TD e 9 12 16 16 20 20 25 25 TK 22 28 28 36 36 45 50 UW 65 75 95 105 130 145 175 Weight [g] 170 360 580 950 1480 2140 2950
1-40
Locking force MATERIAL body shoe spring piston gasket Pilot port
Aluminium Brass NBR Synthetic material with added Teflo NBR M5 or 1/8
OPERATING PRINCIPLE The mechanical piston rod lock is a normally-closed mechanism. In the absence of pneumatic piloting, the two shoes (A) lock the cylinder rod in both directions (Fig. 1). With pneumatic piloting, the piston rod guide forces the shoes to come right up to each other and overcome the counter spring (B) force and the piston rod can slide (Fig. 2). It is important to remember that the mechanical piston rod lock is a static type, which means that it is necessary to stop the cylinder piston rod pneumatically before locking the part mechanically. Fig. 1 Fig. 2
DIMENSIONS
+ = ADD THE STROKE
32 40 50 63 80 100 125
L2 48 55 70 70 90 100 122
L4 8 8 15 15 18 18 22
L7 45 50 60 70 90 105 140
L8 34 38 48 49.5 61 68 86.5
D 12 16 20 20 25 25 32
D1 30 35 40 45 45 55 60
D2 35 40 50 60 80 100 130
D3 25 28 35 38 48 58 65
T1 13 13 16 16 20 20 30
1-41
ACTUATORS
bar MPa C F
4 to 8 0.4 to 0.8 -10 to +80 14 to 176 NC - bidirectional Double shoe with mechanical lock Mechanical stick-slip 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 N 650 1100 1600 2500 4000 6300 8700
COMPONENTS
SERIES GDS-GDH Body: Guide bushing: Piston rod: Body: Guide bushing: Piston rod: aluminium alloy self-lubricating sintered bronze and wiper rings chromed rolled steel aluminium alloy ball linear bearings and scraper ring tempered stainless steel
SERIES GDM
1-42
VIEW X-Y
32 40 50 63 80 100
A 48 56 66 76 98 118
A1 45 53 63 73 95 115
C 48 58 59 76 90 110
C1 12 15 15 15 16 16
DH7 6 6 6 6 6 6
E3 58 64 80 95 130 150
F M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M10
F2H7 6 6 6 6 6 6
G 18 21 24 24 31 31
H 31 36 45 45 56 56
M 46 52 65 65 71 71
N 17 21 25 25 34 39
S 12 12 16 16 20 20
CH 15 15 22 22 27 27
VIEW X-Y
32 40 50 63 80 100
A 49 58 69 85 105 129
A1 45 54 63 79 99 120
C1 12 15 15 15 20 20
CH 13 15 22 22 27 27
DH7 6 6 6 6 6 6
F M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M10
F2H7 6 6 6 6 6 6
G 18 21 24 24 31 31
H 31 36 45 45 56 56
M 47 53 63 62 76 76
N 17 21 26 26 34 39
S 12 16 20 20 25 25
1-43
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
Bore 32 40 50 63 80 100
Type UNIT MW DS 032... UNIT MW DS 040... UNIT MW DS 050... UNIT MW DS 063... UNIT MW DS 080... UNIT MW DS 100...
32 40 50 63 80 100
UNIT MW DH 032... UNIT MW DH 040... UNIT MW DH 050... UNIT MW DH 063... UNIT MW DH 080... UNIT MW DH 100...
32 40 50 63 80 100
UNIT MW DM 032... UNIT MW DM 040... UNIT MW DM 050... UNIT MW DM 063... UNIT MW DM 080... UNIT MW DM 100...
Note: To complete the type and code, add the 3-digit stroke (e.g. 50=050)
1-44
* For use when standard sensors do not detect the magnet, e.g. near metal masses. Can be used on all ISO 15552 cylinders. Use the adaptor to secure to STD cylinders. For technical data see pag. 1-288
Code W0950000711
50 to 63
Code W0950001001
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM a ISO 15552 cylinder with Serie STD or Serie 3 barrel b Sensor bracket mod. DST ( 32 to 125) c Adaptor d Retractable sensor with insertion from above
Code W0950000712
80 to 125
Code W0950000713
1-45
Code W0952025390 W0952029394 W0952022180 W0952028184 W0952125556 W0952025500* W0952029504* W0952022500* W0952128184*
Description HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2.5 m HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 300 mm M8 REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2.5 m REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 300 mm M8 HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2 m ATEX HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 2.5 m HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 300 mm M8 REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 2.5 m REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 300 mm M8
Code Description W0950000201 REED sensor DSM2-C525 HS W0950000222 E.HALL PNP sensor DSM3-N225 W0950000232 E. HALL NPN sensor DSM3-M225 Can be used on ISO 15552 cylinders in the STD series and series 3. For technical data see pag. 1-286
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
ACCESSORIES FOR ISO 15552 CYLINDERS
With this type of cylinder, the valves (D) can be mounted directly using the retracting sensor slot, without requiring the use of intermediate brackets. This can be done using the special plates (A), which come with both the M3 and M4 threads, and screws (B) of the size, type and quantity shown in the table below. For ISO 1 and ISO 2 valves, the kit on which the valve is to be mounted (codes shown in the tables) will be fitte to the cylinder using the special plates (A) and the screws (B) listed in the table.
Type of valve to mount (D) MACH 11 SERIE 70 1/8 SERIE 70 1/4 SERIE 70 1/2 ISO 1 ISO 2
Screw (B) for connection to cylinder (one per plate) M3x16 UNI 5931 (DIN 912) M4x25 UNI 5931 (DIN 912) M4x30 UNI 5931 (DIN 912) M4x45 UNI 5931 (DIN 912) M4x8 UNI 7688 (DIN 965A) M4x8 UNI 7688 (DIN 965A)
Washer (B) (one per screw) A3.2 UNI 1751 (DIN 127A) A4.3 UNI 1751 (DIN 127A) A4.3 UNI 1751 (DIN 127A)
FIXING BRACKET SERIES KCV FOR TYPE A AND SERIES 3 CYLINDERS Fig.
Fig.
1-46
Code 009 . . . 0101F 009 . . . 0110F 009 . . . 0111 009 . . . 0604 009 . . . 0704F 009 . . . 0800
Bore 32 to 63 32 to 63 32 to 63 32 to 63 32 to 63 32 to 63
Type Set of polyurethane gaskets Complete polyurethane front head kit Complete polyurethane rear head kit Complete polyurethane piston kit Complete polyurethane head A+P+piston kit Magnet
1-47
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
SPARE PARTS FOR ISO 15552 CYLINDERS
TYPE A
SERIES 3
Code 009 . . . 0101 009 . . . 0502 009 . . . 0110N 009 . . . 0304N 009 . . . 0111N 009 . . . 0305N 009 . . . 0604 009 . . . 0604 009 . . . 0602 009 . . . 0602 009 . . . 0704N 009 . . . 0704N 009 . . . 0702N 009 . . . 0702N 009 . . . 0800
Bore 32 to 125 32 to 125 32 to 125 32 to 125 32 to 125 32 to 125 32 to 63 80 to 125 32 to 63 80 to 125 32 to 63 80 to 125 32 to 63 80 to 125 32 to 125
Type Complete set of polyurethane gaskets Complete set of NBR gaskets Complete polyurethane front head kit Complete NBR front head kit Complete polyurethane rear head kit Complete NBR rear head kit Complete polyurethane piston kit Complete polyurethane piston kit Complete NBR piston kit Complete NBR piston kit Complete polyurethane head A+P+piston kit Complete polyurethane head A+P+piston kit Complete NBR head A+P+pistion kit Complete NBR head A+P+piston kit Magnet
Parts 2-4-5-9-10 2-4-5-9-10 1-2-3-4-5-17-18 1-2-3-4-5-17-18 4-5-8-17-18 4-5-8-17-18 9-10-16-17 9-10-11-13-15-18 9-10-16-17 9-10-11-13-15-18 1-2-3-4-5-8-9-10-16-17-18 1-2-3-4-5-8-9-10-11-13-15-17-18 1-2-3-4-5-8-9-10-16-17-18 1-2-3-4-5-8-9-10-11-13-15-17-18 12
OLD RELEASE
STD
TYPE A
Code 009 . . . 0101 009 . . . 0502 009 . . . 0110 009 . . . 0304 009 . . . 0111 009 . . . 0305 009 . . . 0604 009 . . . 0604 009 . . . 0602 009 . . . 0602 009 . . . 0704 009 . . . 0704 009 . . . 0702 009 . . . 0702 009 . . . 0800
Bore 32 to 125 32 to 125 32 to 125 32 to 125 32 to 125 32 to 125 32 to 63 80 to 125 32 to 63 80 to 125 32 to 63 80 to 125 32 to 63 80 to 125 32 to 125
Type Complete set of polyurethane gaskets Complete set of NBR gaskets Complete polyurethane front head kit Complete NBR front head kit Complete polyurethane rear head kit Complete NBR rear head kit Complete polyurethane piston kit Complete polyurethane piston kit Complete NBR piston kit Complete NBR piston kit Complete polyurethane head A+P+piston kit Complete polyurethane head A+P+piston kit Complete NBR head A+P+pistion kit Complete NBR head A+P+piston kit Magnet
Parts 2-4-5-9-10 2-4-5-9-10 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-14-17-18 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-14-17-18 4-5-6-7-8-14-17-18 4-5-6-7-8-14-17-18 9-10-16-17 9-10-11-13-15-18 9-10-16-17 9-10-11-13-15-18 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9-10-14-16-17-18 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9-10-11-13-14-15-17-18 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9-10-14-16-17-18 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9-10-11-13-14-15-17-18 12
1-48
Anti-rotation cylinders with axial dimensions to ISO 15552. Serie STD barrel. standard configuratio with magnet double-acting passing twinner rods and single passing rod polyurethane gasket
TECHNICAL DATA
Max operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Bores Strokes Design Esecution Forces generated at 6 bar thrust/retraction bar MPa psi C mm mm 10 1 145 10 to +80 Filtered, unlubricated air. Lubrication, if used, must be continuous. 32; 40; 50; 63; 80; 100 from 25 to 500 Extruded profil Magnetic standard cushioned 32: 434/350 40: 678/597 50: 1060/940 63: 1683/1471 80: 2714/2295 100: 4241/3812 See page 1-9 Maximum recommended strokes. Higher values can create operating problems
Weight Notes
COMPONENTS a PISTON ROD: thick chromed steel b HEAD: aluminium alloy c PISTON ROD GASKET: polyurethane d GUIDE BUSHING: sintered bronze e BARREL: drawn anodised aluminium alloy f PISTON: aluminium alloy g PISTON GASKET: polyurethane h MAGNET: plastoferrite i BUFFER+STATIC O-rings: NBR j CUSHIONING GASKET: front NBR, rear polyurethane k NEEDLE: OT 58 brass l SCREWS: Tap Tite for fixin and assembly m GUIDE RING: special technopolymer n REAR CUSHIONING CONE: OT58 brass o FRONT CUSHIONING CONE: aluminium p FLANGE: zinc-plated steel
1-49
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
TWIN-ROD CYLINDER SERIES TWNC
32 40 50 63 80 100
PL 10 12 14 16 18 20
PL1 13 12 14 16 18 20
A 10 10 10 10 12 12
A1 10.5 10 10 10 12 12
B 30 35 40 45 45 55
CH3 6 6 8 8 10 10
VA 4 4 4 4 4 4
RT M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M10
P 6 6 6 6 10 10
P1 8 6 6 6 10 10
P2 19 22 30 38 50 70
Q 4 4 6 6 7 7
Q1 4 6 6 7 7
C 15 15 18 22 25 25
I 18 22 30 38 48 60
K h9 32 40 50 63 80 100
S 10 10 12 16 22 22
O 4 4 5 5 5 5
V 40 40 43 47 50 50
U 45 49 54 69 89 109
32 40 50 63 80 100
PL 10 12 14 16 18 20
PL1 13 12 14 16 18 20
A 10 10 10 10 12 12
A1 10.5 10 10 10 12 12
B 30 35 40 45 45 55
CH1 10 13 17 17 22 22
CH2 17 19 24 24 30 30
CH3 6 6 8 8 10 10
RT M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M10
P 6 6 6 6 10 10
P1 8 6 6 6 10 10
P2 19 22 30 38 50 70
Q 4 4 6 6 7 7
Q1 4 6 6 7 7
C 15 15 18 22 25 25
C1 16 20 25 25 33 38
D 12 16 20 20 25 25
F 22 24 32 32 40 40
I 18 22 30 38 48 60
K h9 32 40 50 63 80 100
S 10 10 12 16 22 22
O 4 4 5 5 5 5
V 40 40 43 47 50 50
VD 6.5 8 13 14 12 14
U 45 49 54 69 89 109
WH 26 30 37 37 46 51
KEY TO CODES
CYL W140 TYPE W140 Double-acting cylinder, magnetic, cushioned W142 Double-acting cylinder, magnetic, cushioned single through-rod 032 BORES 032 040 050 063 080 100 0025 STROKE 0025 to 0500 mm Maximum recommended strokes. Higher values can create operating problems.
1-50
Note: Individually packed with 2 screws For fixin the leg to the supporting surface, it is advisable to use a DIN 7984 sunk-headed screw
1-51
ACTUATORS
32 40 50 63 80 100
AB 7 9 9 9 12 14
AH 32 36 45 50 63 71
AO 35 43 47 47 61 66
AT 4 4 4 6 6 6
AU 24 28 32 32 41 41
TR 32 36 45 50 63 75
UH 45 52 65 75 95 115
ACTUATORS
32 40 50 63 80 100
B2 50 55 65 75 95 115
B3 10 10 12 12 16 16
B4 32 36 45 50 63 75
D4 7 9 9 9 12 14
V1 30 30 31 35 34 34
1-52
SENSOR BRACKET 32 to 40
Code W0950000711 Description Bracket D.32-40 DST 80
50 to 63
Code W0950000712
80 to 100
Code W0950000713
NOTES
1-53
ACTUATORS
Description REED sensor DSM2-C525 HS E.HALL PNP sensor DSM3-N225 E.HALL NPN sensor DSM3-M225
ACTUATORS
ISO 15552 CYLINDERS 160-200
Cylinders made to ISO 15552 available in various versions and with a wide range of accessories: configuratio with or without magnet double-acting single-or through-rod NBR gaskets or FKM/FPM (high temperature) available with mounted intermediate hinge special configuration on request
TECHNICAL DATA
Max operating pressure Temperature range Design Standard strokes Weight Forces generated at 6 bar (tensile stress) bar MPa C mm
NBR 10 1
FKM/FPM
-10 to +150 Round barrel with tie rods 25-50-75-80-100-125-150-200-250-300-350-400-500-600-700-800-900-1000 See page 1-8 See page 1-7
-10 to +80
COMPONENTS a PISTON ROD: C45 steel or stainless steel, thick chromed b HEAD: die cast aluminium c PISTON ROD GASKET: NBR or FKM/FPM d GUIDE BUSHING: sintered bronze e BARREL: drawn anodised aluminium alloy f PISTON: aluminium g PISTON GASKET: NBR or FKM/FPM h MAGNET: plastoferrite i CUSHIONING CAP: aluminium j CUSHIONING GASKET+ Static O-rings: NBR or KM/FPM F k CUSHIONING NEEDLE: OT 58 with needle out movement safety system even when fully open l SCREWS: galvanised steel m TIE RODS: galvanised steel n GUIDE BELT: technopolimer
1-54
160 200
B 180 220
C 65 75
E 65 75
D 140 175
G 50 60
L1 124 122
L2 260 275
Q 80 95
K 28 29
160 200
B 180 220
C 65 75
E 65 75
D 140 175
G 50 60
L1 124 122
L2 260 275
L3 338 370
Q 80 95
K 28 29
160 200
E 200 250
F 32 32
H1 150 165
H2 190 205
I 32 32
L2 260 275
Q 80 95
S 40 40
For the missing values, refer to standard cylinders. In your order, please specify the desired value for H1
1-55
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
CYL
W121 TYPE W120 Double-acting, cushioned, non magnetic W121 Double-acting, cushioned, W122 Double-acting, cushioned, through-rod W123 Double-acting, cushioned, through-rod, non magnetic W124 Double-acting, non-cushioned
160 DIAMETER-EXECUTION 160 200 160 stainless steel piston rod 200 stainless steel piston rod 160 FKM/FPM gasket, stainless steel piston rod VA4 200 FKM/FPM gasket, stainless steel piston rod KA3 160 FKM/FPM gasket, C45 piston rod KA4 200 FKM/FPM gasket, C45 piston rod AA3 160 + intermediate hinge AA4 200 + intermediate hinge GA3 160 no stick-slip GA4 200 no stick-slip 160 200 XA3 XA4 VA3
0200 EXECUTION Specify H1 value ONLY for version with intermediate hinge
Maximum recommended strokes. Higher values can create operating problems For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s, to prevent surging. Use no-lubricated air only
An alternative to the round barrel version is a version with a shaped barrel. The technical data, components and dimensions are the same as for the round barrel version. Note: Type with intermediate hinge not available.
Maximum recommended strokes. Higher values can create operating problems For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s, to prevent surging. Use no-lubricated air only
1-56
1-57
ACTUATORS
AB 18 22
AH 115 135
AO 80 100
AT 10 10
AU 60 70
H1 319 345
H2 300 320
TR 115 135
UH 180 220
ACTUATORS
B4 110 110
B5 154 154
D4 63 63
D5 110 110
N2 55 60
N3 140 140
S3 50 50
K3 18 18
COUNTER-HINGE MODEL EL
Code A W0951602009 160 92 W0951602009 200 92 A1 60 60 B 40 40 C 60 60 C1 30 30 D1 25 25 D2 17 17 D 32 32 E H L 16.5 22.5 48 16.5 22.5 48 Weight [g] 2740 2740
1-58
Code W0952025390 W0952029394 W0952022180 W0952028184 W0952125556 W0952025500* W0952029504* W0952022500* W0952128184*
Description HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2.5 m HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 300 mm M8 REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2.5 m REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 300 mm M8 HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2 m ATEX HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 2.5 m HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 300 mm M8 REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 2.5 m REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 300 mm M8
Code Description W0950000201 REED sensor DSM2-C525 W0950000222 E.HALL PNP sensor DSM3-N225 W0950000232 E.HALL NPN sensor DSM3-M225 NB: For technical data see page 1-286
* For use when standard sensors do not detect the magnet, e.g. near metal masses. NB: For technical data see page 1-288
Code 0951602093
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM a ISO 15552 cylinder with traditional barrel b Sensor bracket mod. ST ( 160 and 200) c Adaptor d Retractable sensor with insertion from above
Code W0950000715 Description Bracket ST 160
200
Code W0950000716
1-59
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
ISO 21287 CYLYNDER SERIES LINER
Compact cylinder to ISO 21287, LINER series, available in different versions to meet all possible requirements: With or without magnet Double acting, single or through piston rod Double acting, perforated through piston rod Single acting, extended, retracted or through piston rod Single acting, perforated through rod Double acting anti-rotating version and double acting through piston rod Polyurethane or FKM/FPM gaskets (for high temperatures) also available Dimensions and centre distances to ISO 21287. The heads have been eliminated for ease of installation, improved sturdiness and precision. The metal lining is designed to withstand heavy-duty work, tensile stress and impact. Technopolymer parts can withstand dynamic and pneumatic thrust. The lining virtually acts as a bearing to which most of user accessories are attached. The wide range of anchors provide numerous fixin points. Retractable magnetic limit switches can be mounted to identify the position in the cylinder grooves.
TECHNICAL DATA
Max operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Bores Design Versions bar MPa psi C mm
POLYURETHANE 10 1 145
FKM/FPM
Magnet for sensors Inrush pressure for single piston rod for through-rod Forces generated at 6 bar thrust/retraction Weights Notes
bar bar
-10 to +60 ( 20 to 63) -10 to +150 (non-magnetic cylinders) -10 to +80 ( 80 to 100) Unlubricated air. Lubrication, if used, must be continuous. 20; 25; 32; 40; 50; 63; 80; 100 with ISO 21287 fixin centre distances With profil Double-acting, Double-acting through-rod, Single-acting extended or retracted rod, Single-acting through-rod, Double-acting through-rod perforated, Double-acting non-rotating, Double-acting through-rod non-rotating, No stick slip All versions are available with male or female piston rod. All versions come complete with magnet. Supplied without magnet on request. 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.6 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.8 0.8 see page 1-7 see page 1-9 For correct operation, it is advisable to use 50 mm filtere air For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s to prevent surging, use the version No stick-slip and non-lubricated air.
COMPONENTS 20-25 a PISTON ROD: stainless steel, thick chromed b END CAP: high-performance technopolymer c BARREL: drawn anodised and calibrated aluminium alloy d PISTON GASKET: polyurethane or FKM/FPM (for high temperature) e MAGNET: plastoneodimio f PISTON ROD GASKET: polyurethane or FKM/FPM (for high temperature) g GUIDE BUSHING: sintered bronze h STATIC O-RINGS: NBR or FKM/FPM (for high temperature)
1-60
COMPONENTS 32-63 a PISTON ROD: C45 stell or stainless steel, thick chromed b END CAP: high-performance technopolymer c BARREL: drawn anodised and calibrated aluminium alloy d PISTON GASKET: polyurethane or FKM/FPM (for high temperature) e MAGNET: 32 plastoneodimio - 40 to 63 plastoferrite f PISTON ROD GASKET: polyurethane or FKM/FPM (for high temperature) g GUIDE BUSHING: sintered bronze h STATIC O-RINGS: NBR or FKM/FPM (for high temperature)
COMPONENTS 80-100 a PISTON ROD: C45 stell or stainless steel, thick chromed b END CAP: anodized aluminium alloy c BARREL: drawn anodised and calibrated aluminium alloy d PISTON GASKET: polyurethane or FKM/FPM (for high temperature) e MAGNET: plastoferrite f PISTON ROD GASKET: polyurethane or FKM/FPM (for high temperature) g GUIDE BUSHING: steel strip with bronze and PTFE insert h STATIC O-RINGS: NBR or FKM/FPM (for high temperature)
FIXING OPTIONS
A Fixing to structural work with a through screw, using the thread in the heads B Direct fixin from above using long through screws or tie rods. Non-magnetic stainless steel must be used (e.g. AISI 304) C Fixing with feet; the ordering code covers the supply of one foot and two screws for fixin to the cylinder D Fixing with a flang mounted on the front or rear head; the ordering code covers the supply of a flang and four screws for fixin to the cylinder E Fixing with articulated hinge to compensate for slight system misalignment and turn freely The ordering code covers the supply of a hinge and four screws for fixin to the cylinder.
1-61
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
20 8.40 20.90
25 13.90 33.20
32 19.00 35.90
40 24.80 53.70
50 36.30 62.20
63 50.20 82.30
80 77.60 118.90
MAXIMUM LOADS FOR NON-ROTATING VERSION TRANSVERSAL FORCE FOR NON-ROTATING TRANSVERSAL FORCE FOR NON-ROTATING THROUGH-ROD TORQUE DEPENDING ON STROKE
Stroke (mm)
1-62
20 25 32 40 50
AF 14 14 16.5 16.5 17
AM 16 16 19 19 22
CH 8 8 10 10 13
CH1 13 13 17 17 19
D1H9 6 6 6 6 6
KF M6 M6 M8 M8 M10
MM 10 10 12 12 16
PL 12 13 16 16 15.5
RT M5 M5 M6 M6 M8
T2 3 3.5 4 4 3
WH 6 6 7 7 8
ZA+0.3 -0 37 39 44 45 45
ZB 43 45 51 52 53
63 80 100
AF 17 22 24
AM 22 28 28
BG 21 22.5 25.5
CH 13 17 22
CH1 19 24 30
D1H9 8 8 8
D5 10.5 14 14
LA 4.5 5 5
MM 16 20 25
PL1 8 14 19
RT M8 M10 M10
T2 3.5 4 4
TG 0.2 56.5 72 89
WH 8 10 10
ZA+0.4 -0 49 54 67
ZB 57 64 77
1-63
ACTUATORS
DIMENSIONS OF THROUGH-ROD 20 to 50
ACTUATORS
+ = ADD THE STROKE ++ = ADD TWICE THE STROKE 1 = SENSOR SLOT 2 = SEAT FOR DIN 7984 SCREWS
AF 14 14 16.5 16.5 17
AM 16 16 19 19 22
CH 8 8 10 10 13
CH1 13 13 17 17 19
KF M6 M6 M8 M8 M10
MM 10 10 12 12 16
P1 3 3 4 4 6
PL 12 13 16 16 15.5
RT M5 M5 M6 M6 M8
WH 6 6 7 7 8
ZA+0.3 -0 37 39 44 45 45
ZB 43 45 51 52 53
ZM 49 51 58 59 61
63 80 100
AF 17 22 24
AM 22 28 28
BG CH 21 13 22.5 17 25.5 22
CH1 19 24 30
D5 E E1 EE KF 10.5 76.5 78.3 G1/8 M10 14 95.5 95.5 G1/8 M12 14 114 114 G1/8 M12
P1 6 G1/8 G1/8
P2 4 5 6
PL1 8 14 19
RT M8 M10 M10
TG 0.2 56.5 72 89
WH 8 10 10
ZA+0.4 -0 49 54 67
ZB 57 64 77
ZM 65 74 87
1-64
DIMENSIONS OF NON-ROTATING 20 to 50
+ * 1 2 = ADD THE STROKE = SECTION WITH TOLERANCE = SENSOR SLOT = SEAT FOR DIN 7984 SCREWS
20 25 32 40 50
AF 14 14 16.5 16.5 17
AM 16 16 19 19 22
CH 8 8 10 10 13
CH1 13 13 17 17 19
D1H9 6 6 6 6 6
D4 17 22 28 33 42
D6 M4 M5 M5 M5 M6
D7H9 14 17 17 22
FB 4 5 5 5 6
KF M6 M6 M8 M8 M10
ME 8 8 10 10 12
MM 10 10 12 12 16
PL 12 13 16 16 15.5
RT M5 M5 M6 M6 M8
WH 6 6 7 7 8
ZA+0.3 -0 37 39 44 45 45
ZB 43 45 51 52 53
ZM 49 51 58 59 61
1-65
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
+ * 1 2
= ADD THE STROKE = SECTION WITH TOLERANCE = SENSOR SLOT = SEAT FOR DIN 7984 SCREWS
AF 63 17 80 22 100 24
AM 22 28 28
BG 21 22.5 25.5
CH 13 17 22
CH1 19 24 30
D1H9 8 8 8
D4 50 65 80
D5 10.5 14 14
D6 M6 M8 M10
D7H9 22 24 24
FB 6 8 10
LA 4.5 5 5
ME 12 14 14
MM 16 20 25
PL1 8 14 19
RT M8 M10 M10
T1 5 7.5 7.5
T2 3.5 4 4
TG0.2 56.5 72 89
WH 8 10 10
ZA+0.4 -0 49 54 67
ZB 57 64 77
ZM 65 74 87
1-66
KEY TO CODE
CYL 28 TYPE 28 Compact cylinder ISO 21287 male piston rod 29 Compact cylinder ISO 21287 female piston rod 0 t 0 Double-acting 1 Double-acting through-rod 2 Double-acting through-rod perforated 3 Single-acting retracting piston rod 4 Single-acting extended piston rod 5 Single-acting through-rod 6 Single-acting through piston rod perforated 7 Double-acting non-rotating A Double-acting through-rod non-rotating 0 0 Magnetic m S Non-magnetic s G No stick slip 20 BORE 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 0 0 Standard 050 STROKE e f p X MATERIAL C C45 piston rod chromium plated X Stainless steel piston rod and nut A C45 chromed rod, aluminium piston Z Stainless steel piston rod and nut aluminium piston P GASKETS P Polyurethane gaskets E V FKM/FPM gaskets
For the maximum suppliabe stroke, see page 1-62 Can also be used as double-acting with spring return t For versions 29 only (female piston rod) s For 20 to 25 the standard version (0 or S) For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s, to prevent surging. Use no-lubricated air only In the code of cylinder with letter in fourth position 100 becomes A1 E Only for standard double acting and standard through rod double acting version m Compulsory for 20 and 25 version Z Only for 32 to 63 P version (Polyurethane gaskets) e Only for 20 to 63 P version (Polyurethane gaskets) f Only for 32 to 100 V version (FKM/FPM gaskets) and for 80 and 100 P version (Polyurethane gaskets) p Only for 20 to 100 V version (FKM/FPM gaskets) and for 80 and 100 P version (Polyurethane gaskets)
NOTES
1-67
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
Note: Individually packed with 2 screws * IMPORTANT: Values not to ISO 21287. Cylinder pins to ISO 15552 are used.
FEMALE HINGE-MODEL B
+ = ADD THE STROKE Code W0950322003 W0950402003 W0950502003 W0950632003 W0950802003 W0951002003 32 40 50 63 80 100 CB H14 26 28 32 40 50 60 CD H9 10 12 12 16 16 20 FL 22 25 27 32 36 41 L 12 15 15 20 20 25 MR 10 12 12 16 16 20 UB H14 45 52 60 70 90 110 XD 73 77 80 89 100 118 Weight [g] 112 159 250 390 668 1047
MALE HINGE-MODEL BA
+ = ADD THE STROKE Code W0950206004 W0950256004 W0950322004 W0950402004 W0950502004 W0950632004 W0950802004 W0951002004 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 CD H9 8 8 10 12 12 16 16 20 EW 16 16 26 28 32 40 50 60 FL 20 20 22 25 27 32 36 41 L 14 14 12 15 15 20 20 25 MR 8 8 11 13 13 17 17 21 XD 63 65 73 77 80 89 100 118 Weight [g] 44 48 94 124 220 316 578 850
Note: Supplied with 4 screws * IMPORTANT: Non ISO 21287 norm fixin distance
1-68
1-69
ACTUATORS
32 40 50 63 80 100
CX 10 12 12 16 16 20
DL 22 25 27 32 36 41
EX 14 16 16 21 21 25
MS 16 18 21 23 28 30
R1 12 15 19 20 24 25
XN 73 77 80 89 100 118
ACTUATORS
32 40 50 63 80 100
A 49 49 59 59 79 79
B 36 36 42 42 58 58
C 30 30 36 36 44 44
CH 13 13 15 15 22 22
D 11 11 14 14 17 17
G 39.5 39.5 44 44 59 59
G1 17 17 19 19 26 26
S 12 12 15 15 20 20
S1 10 10 13.5 13.5 15 15
COUNTER-HINGE 16 to 25 - MODEL BC
Code W0950200005 20 W0950200005 25 A 32 32 B 30 30 B1 16 16 C 20 20 D 6.5 6.5 E 4 4 F 30 30 M 8 8 R 10 10 S 4 4 Weight [g] 78 78
* For use when standard sensors do not detect the magnet, e.g. near metal masses. NB: For technical data see page 1-288
1-70
Code 009 . . .L001 009 . . .L001 009 . . .L001 009 . . .L101 009 . . .L101 009 . . .L201 009 . . .L201 009 . . .7401 009 . . .L401 009 . . .7401 009 . . .7501 009 . . .L501 009 . . .L901 009 . . .L901 009 . . .L901
Bores 20, 25 32 to 63 80, 100 20, 25, 80, 100 32 to 63 20, 25, 80, 100 32 to 63 20, 25 32 to 63 80 to 100 20, 25, 80, 100 32 to 63 20, 25 32 to 63 80, 100
Type Complete set of gaskets polyurethane Complete set of gaskets polyurethane Complete set of gaskets polyurethane Front head kit Front head kit Rear head kit Rear head kit Piston kit polyurethane Piston kit polyurethane Piston kit polyurethane Magnet Magnet Front + rear cylinder head + piston kit polyurethane Front + rear cylinder head + piston kit polyurethane Front + rear cylinder head + piston kit polyurethane
Parts dfh dfhlq dfhl bfgh bfghq hj hjq dek deklmq deklm e eq bdefghjk bdefghjklmq bdefghjklm
NOTES
1-71
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
COMPACT CYLINDERS SERIES CMPC
Compact cylinder series CMPC available in numerous versions to meet a full range of requirements: With or without magnet Single-acting extended rod, retracted or through-rod Dual-acting non-rotating and dual-acting through-rod versions Tandem with two, three or four stages Multi-position with two and three stages Fixing centre distances to ISO 15552 from 32 to 100 and from 20 to 100 complying with French standard NFE 49-004-1 and 2 (UNITOP). 12 and 16 have centre distances compatible with trade cylinders. The special profil and outer heads locked onto the barrel by screws ensure optimal guiding of the cylinder and multiple fixin options with a wide range of mountings. To determine the position in the relevant cylinder slots, it is possible to mount retracting magnetic limit switches. Available also in a version having FKM/FPM gaskets (for high temperature) from 20 to 100.
TECHNICAL DATA
Max operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Bores Design Versions Magnet for sensors Inrush pressure single piston rod through-rod Forces generated at 6 bar thrust/retraction Weights Notes bar MPa psi C mm mm mm
POLYURETHANE 10 1 145
FKM/FPM
bar bar
10 to +80 10 to +150 (non-magnetic cylinders) Unlubricated air. Lubrication, if used, must be continuous 12; 16; interchangeable with similar products 32; 40; 50; 63; 80; 100 with ISO 15552 fixin centre distances 20; 25; 32; 40; 50; 63; 80; 100 with NFE 49-004-1 and 2 fixin centre distances With profile heads with screws Double-acting, Single-acting extended or retracted rod, Through-rod, Through-rod perforated, Single-acting through-rod, Through-rod non-rotating, no-stick slip All versions come complete with magnet. Supplied without magnet on request. 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 1 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 See page 1-7 See page 1-8 For correct operation, it is advisable to use 50 mm filtere air For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s to prevent surging, use the version No stick-slip and non-lubricated air.
COMPONENTS 12 to 25 a PISTON ROD: stainless steel, thick chromed b HEAD: extruded anodised aluminium alloy c BARREL: drawn anodised and calibrated aluminium alloy d PISTON GASKET: polyurethane or FKM/FPM e MAGNET: neodymium-plastic f PISTON ROD GASKET: polyurethane or FKM/FPM g GUIDE BUSHING: steel strip with bronze and PTFE insert h STATIC O-RINGS: NBR or FKM/FPM i SECURING SCREWS: zinc-plated steel
1-72
COMPONENTS 32 to 100 a PISTON ROD: C45 steel or stainless steel, thick chromed b HEAD: extruded anodised aluminium alloy c BARREL: drawn anodised and calibrated aluminium alloy d PISTON GASKET: polyurethane or FKM/FPM e MAGNET: 12 to 32 neodymium-plastic 40 to 100 plastoferrite f PISTON ROD GASKET: polyurethane or FKM/FPM g GUIDE BUSHING: steel strip with bronze and PTFE insert h STATIC O-rings: NBR or FKM/FPM i SECURING SCREWS: zinc-plated steel
TECHNICAL DATA a Compact cylinder available with two separate fixin centre distances 32 to 100 to ISO 15552 20 to 100 to NFE 49-004-1 and 2 b Pre-wired retracting sensor with or without connector c Plastic strip to keep out dirt and/or protect the sensor wire cod. W0950000160 d Ball-and-socket joint code W095 2030 e Example of cylinder mounting with feet code W095 6001. All mountings come complete with cylinder assembly screws f Sensor slot g Piston rod with male or female thread as required
A Fixing to structural work with a through screw, using the thread in the heads B Direct fixin from above using long through screws or tie rods. Non-magnetic stainless steel must be used (e.g. AISI 304) C Fixing with feet; the ordering code covers the supply of one foot and two screws for fixin to the cylinder D Fixing with a flang mounted on the front or rear head; the ordering code covers the supply of a flang and four screws for fixin to the cylinder E Fixing with articulated hinge to compensate for slight system misalignment and turn freely The ordering code covers the supply of a hinge and four screws for fixin to the cylinder
1-73
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
12 4.40 9.80
16 4.90 14.20
20 8.40 20.90
25 13.90 33.20
32 19.00 35.90
40 24.80 53.70
50 36.30 62.20
63 50.20 82.30
80 77.60 118.90
MAXIMUM LOADS FOR NON-ROTATING VERSION TRANSVERSAL FORCE FOR NON-ROTATING TRANSVERSAL FORCE FOR NON-ROTATING THROUGH-ROD TORQUE DEPENDING ON STROKE
Stroke (mm)
1-74
12 16 20 25
A 29 29 36.5 40.5
B 18 18 22 26
C 6 8 10 10
CH 5 7 8 8
CH1 10 13 17 17
D 30 30 37.5 41.5
E H9 6 6 6 6
F 4 4 4 4
G 38 38 38 39.5
H 8 8 8 8
H1 30 30 30 31.5
M 8 10 12 12
O M4 M4 M5 M5
P M3 M4 M5 M5
Q M5 M5 M5 M5
R M6 M8 M10x1.25 M10x1.25
S 16 20 22 22
32 40 50 63 80 100
A 47 56 67 80 102 123
B2 13 17 21
C 12 12 16 16 20 25
CH 10 10 13 13 17 22
CH1 17 17 19 19 24 30
E H9 6 6 6 8 8 8
F 4 4 4 4 4 4
H1 37 38 38 42.5 47.5 56
M 14 14 16 16 20 24
P M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M12
S 22 22 24 24 32 40
1-75
ACTUATORS
DIMENSIONS OF NON-ROTATING 12 to 25
ACTUATORS
COMPACT CYLINDERS SERIES CMPC
+ = ADD THE STROKE ++ = ADD TWICE THE STROKE * = SECTION WITH TOLERANCE 1 = SENSOR SLOT
12 16 20 25
A 29 29 36.5 40.5
B 18 18 22 26
C 6 8 10 10
C1 5 5 6 6
CH 5 7 8 8
CH1 10 13 17 17
D 30 30 37.5 41.5
E H9 6 6 6 6
F 4 4 4 4
G 38 38 38 39.5
H 8 8 8 8
H1 30 30 30 31.5
N2 53 53 55 58.5
O M4 M4 M5 M5
P M3 M4 M5 M5
Q M5 M5 M5 M5
R M6 M8 M10x1.25 M10x1.25
S 16 20 22 22
T 2 2 3.5 4
U H9 6 8 10 14
V H8 3 3 4 5
Z M3 M3 M4 M5
1-76
32 40 50 63 80 100 32 40 50 63 80 100
A 47 56 67 80 102 123
D 48.5 57.5 69 82 105 126 Q G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/4
F 4 4 4 4 4 4 S 22 22 24 24 32 40
H1 37 38 38 42.5 47.5 56 V H8 5 5 6 6 8 10
1-77
ACTUATORS
DIMENSIONS OF THROUGH-ROD 12 to 25
ACTUATORS
12 16 20 25
A 29 29 36.5 40.5
B 18 18 22 26
C 6 8 10 10
CH 5 7 8 8
CH1 10 13 17 17
D 30 30 37.5 41.5
G 38 38 38 39.5
H 8 8 8 8
H1 30 30 30 31.5
M 8 10 12 12
M1 x strokes ,5 >5 5 8 5 10 7 12 7 12
N2 47 47 47 50.5
O M4 M4 M5 M5
P M3 M4 M5 M5
P2 1.5 1.5
Q M5 M5 M5 M5
R M6 M8 M10x1.25 M10x1.25
S 16 20 22 22
32 40 50 63 80 100
A 47 56 67 80 102 123
B2 13 17 21
C 12 12 16 16 20 25
CH 10 10 13 13 17 22
CH1 17 17 19 19 24 30
H1 37 38 38 42 47.5 56
M 14 14 16 16 20 24
P M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M12
P1 1/8 1/4
P2 2.5 2.5 4 4 5 6
S 22 22 24 24 32 40
1-78
TANDEM 3 STAGES
TANDEM 2 STAGES
20 25
A 36.5 40.5
B 22 26
C 10 10
CH 8 8
CH1 17 17
D 37.5 41.5
E H9 6 6
F 4 4
G G1 114.5 89 118 92
G2 63.5 66
H 8 8
H1 8 8
L 10 10
M 12 12
N2 68 71.5
O M5 M5
P M5 M5
Q M5 M5
R S M10x1.25 22 M10x1.25 22
1-79
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
++ = ADD TWICE THE STROKE +++ = ADD THREE TIMES THE STROKE ++++ = ADD FOUR TIMES THE STROKE
2 = CYLINDERS OUT FOR 32 to 63 5 = CYLINDERS IN FOR 32 to 63 6 = CYLINDERS IN FOR 80; 100 9 = CYLINDERS OUT FOR 80; 100 1 = SENSOR SLOT 7 = ONLY FOR 63 to 100 8 = SLOT FOR DIN 7984 SCREWS
TANDEM 2-STAGES
32 40 50 63 80 100
A 47 56 67 80 102 123
B2 13 17 21
C 12 12 16 16 20 25
CH 10 10 13 13 17 22
F 4 4 4 4 4 4
K 10.5 14.5
K1 10.5 14.5
32 40 50 63 80 100
M 14 14 16 16 20 24
P M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M12
S 22 22 24 24 32 40
1-80
CIL 3
CIL 2
CIL 1
MULTI-POSITION 2-STAGES
2 = CYLINDER 1 OUT 3 = CYLINDER 2 OUT 5 = CYLINDERS 1-2 IN X1 = CYLINDER 1 STROKE X2 = CYLINDER 2 STROKE
CIL 2
CIL 1
12 16 20 25
A 29 29 36.5 40.5
B 18 18 22 26
C 6 8 10 10
CH 5 7 8 8
CH1 10 13 17 17
D 30 30 37.5 41.5
E H9 6 6 6 6
F 4 4 4 4
G 89 89 89 92
H 8 8 8 8
H1 8 8 8 8
H3 59 59 59 60
L 10 10 10 10
M 8 10 12 12
N1 68 68 68 71.5
O M4 M4 M5 M5
P M3 M4 M5 M5
Q M5 M5 M5 M5
R M6 M8 M10x1.25 M10x1.25
S 16 20 22 22
1-81
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
1 = SENSOR SLOT 2 = CYLINDER 1 OUT FOR 32 to 63 3 = CYLINDER 2 OUT FOR 32 to 100 4 = CYLINDER 3 OUT FOR 32 to 100 5 = CYLINDER 1-2-3 IN FOR 32 to 63 6 = CYLINDER 1-2-3 IN FOR 80 to 100 7 = ONLY FOR 63 to 100 8 = SLOT FOR DIN 7984 SCREWS 9 = CYLINDER 1 OUT FOR 80 to 100
32 40 50 63 80 100
A 47 56 67 80 102 123
B2 13 17 21
C 12 12 16 16 20 25
CH 10 10 13 13 17 22
CH1 17 17 19 19 24 30
E H9 6 6 6 8 8 8
32 40 50 63 80 100
K 10.5 14.5
K1 10.5 14.5
M 14 14 16 16 20 24
P M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M12
S 22 22 24 24 32 40
1-82
FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAMS
MULTI-POSITION TANDEM
LEGENDA P = Stage 1 stroke R = Stage 2 stroke T = Stage 3 stroke Fa Fb Fc Fd = F1+F2 [N] = F1+F2+F3 [N] = F1+F2+F3+F4 [N] = F5 [N]
KEY TO CODE
CYL 23 TYPE 23 Compact cylinder centre distances to UNITOP male piston rod 24 Compact cylinder centre distances to UNITOP female piston rod n 25 Compact cylinder centre distances to ISO male piston rod n 26 Compact cylinder centre distances to ISO female piston rod 1 0 Double-acting 1 Double-acting through-rod 2 Double-acting through-rod perforated 3 Single-acting retracting piston rod 4 Single-acting extended piston rod 5 Single-acting through-rod 6 Single-acting through-rod piston rod perforated t 7 Double-acting non-rotating A Double-acting through-rod non-rotating 0 0 Magnetic m S Non-magnetic s G No stick slip 25 BORE 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 O 0 A B C Standard 2-stage tandem 3-stage tandem 4-stage tandem 050 STROKE e f p X MATERIAL C C45 piston rod chromium plated X Stainless steel piston rod and nut A C45 chromed rod, aluminium piston Z Stainless steel piston rod and nut aluminium piston P GASKETS P Polyurethane gaskets E V FKM/FPM gaskets
For the maximum suppliabe stroke, see page 1-74 In the code of cylinder with letter in fourth position 100 becomes A1 n Codes only for cylinders 32 to100 Can also be used as double-acting with spring return Available from 20 t For versions 24 and 26 only (female piston rod) s For 12 to 25 the standard version (0 or S) its already no stick slip For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s, to prevent surging. Use no-lubricated air only E Only for standard double acting and standard through rod double acting version m Compulsory for 20 and 25 version Z Only for 32 to 63 P version (Polyurethane gaskets) e Only for 12 to 63 P version (Polyurethane gaskets) f Only for 32 to 100 V version (FKM/FPM gaskets) and for 80 and 100 P version (Polyurethane gaskets) p Only for 20 to 100 V version (FKM/FPM gaskets) and for 80 and 100 P version (Polyurethane gaskets)
The ordering codes for a Multi-position cylinder is a combination of several codes, each describing a stage. Coding example for a UNITOP multiposition cylinder 2 stages 20 strokes 40 + 10 (total stroke 50 mm) male rod: 1 STADIO (P) : 230020P040XP + 2 STADIO (R): 230020R050XP Coding example for a UNITOP multiposition cylinder 3 stages 20 strokes 15 + 30 + 40 (total stroke 85 mm) male rod: 1 STADIO (P): 230025P015XP + 2 STADIO (R): 230025R045XP + 3 STADIO (T): 230025T085XP
1-83
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
COMPACT CYLINDERS SERIES CMPC TWO-FLAT
This version is used to keep at an angle the objects fixe onto the piston rod and to apply torques within the specifie limits. The piston rod in two-fla cylinders has two opposing longitudinal surfaces and is made entirely of stainless steel. The front head of the cylinder includes a sintered bronze bush that engages the piston rod and prevents it from rotating. A special polyurethane gasket guarantees air-tightness and dirt removal. This technical solution is more airtight and reliable than square or hexagonal piston rods. These compact cylinders come in the following versions: with or without a magnet dual-acting, single piston rod dual-acting, through piston rod one piston rod is two-flat and the other is cylindrical fixin centre distances compatible with ,ISO 15552 (former ISO 6431), or with French standard NFE 49-004-1 and 2 (UNITOP). The special profil and the fact that the external heads are screwed onto the liner give an excellent guide. Numerous fixin options are available thanks to wide range of anchor points. Retractable magnetic limit switches can be mounted in slots in the cylinder to measure the position.
TECHNICAL DATA
Max operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Bores Design Maximum strokes Versions Magnet for sensors Inrush pressure Max torque on piston rod Maximum rotation on the rod Weights Notes bar MPa psi C mm mm mm
POLYURETHANE 10 1 145 -10 to +80 Unlubricated air. Lubrication, if used, must be continuous 32; 40; 50; 63; 80 with ISO 15552 fixin centre distances 32; 40; 50; 63; 80 with NFE 49-004-1 and 2 fixin centre distances With profile heads with screws 32-40 = 300; 50-63 = 400; 80 = 500 Double-acting, Double-acting Through-rod All versions come complete with magnet. Supplied without magnet on request 32 = 0.8; from 40 to 80 = 0.6 32 and 40 = 0.2; 50 and 63 = 0.4; 80 = 1 32 and 40 = 0.70 ; 50 and 63 = 0.75; 80 = 0.65 See page 1-9 Maximum recommended strokes. Higher values can create operating problems For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s to prevent surging, use the version No stick-slip and non-lubricated air.
bar Nm degrees
COMPONENTS 12 to 25 a PISTON ROD: C45 steel or stainless steel, two-fla b HEAD: extruded anodised aluminium alloy c BARREL: drawn anodised and calibrated aluminium alloy d PISTON GASKET: polyurethane e MAGNET: 32 neodymium - 40 to 100 plastoferrite f PISTON ROD GASKET TWO-FLAT: polyurethane g GUIDE BUSHING: steel strip with bronze h STATIC O-rings: NBR i SECURING SCREWS: zinc-plated steel
1-84
FIXING OPTIONS
A Fixing to structural work with a through screw, using the thread in the heads B Direct fixin from above using long through screws or tie rods. Non-magnetic stainless steel must be used (e.g. AISI 304) C Fixing with feet; the ordering code covers the supply of one foot and two screws for fixin to the cylinder. D Fixing with a flang mounted on the front or rear head; the ordering code covers the supply of a flang and four screws for fixin to the cylinder E Fixing with articulated hinge to compensate for slight system misalignment and turn freely The ordering code covers the supply of a hinge and four screws for fixin to the cylinder
KEY TO CODE
CYL 23 24 25 26 23 TYPE Compact cylinder centre distances to UNITOP male piston rod Compact cylinder centre distances to UNITOP female piston rod Compact cylinder centre distances to ISO male piston rod Compact cylinder centre distances to ISO female piston rod 1 0 Double-acting 1 Double-acting through-rod 0 0 Magnetic S Non-magnetic s G No stick slip 32 BORE 32 40 50 63 80 0 0 Standard 050 STROKE F MATERIAL F TWO-FLAT piston rod AISI 303 stainless stell P GASKETS P Polyurethane gaskets
For the maximum suppliable strokes, look at the technical data s For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s, to prevent surging. Use no-lubricated air only
1-85
ACTUATORS
DIMENSIONS OF DOUBLE-ACTING
ACTUATORS
+ = ADD THE STROKE 1 = SENSOR SLOT 7 = ONLY FOR 63 to 100 8 = SEAT FOR DIN 7984 SCREWS
32 40 50 63 80
A 47 56 67 80 102
B2 13 17
C 12 12 16 16 20
C1 9 9 11.5 11.5 13
CH 10 10 13 13 17
CH1 17 17 19 19 24
E H9 6 6 6 8 8
F 4 4 4 4 4
H1 37 38 38 42.5 47.5
K 30 35 40 45 45
M 14 14 16 16 20
N 59.5 61 64.5 69 77
ISO M6 M6 M8 M8 M10
P M6 M6 M8 M8 M10
S 22 22 24 24 32
DIMENSIONS OF THROUGH-ROD
+ = ADD THE STROKE ++ = ADD TWICE THE STROKE 1 = SENSOR SLOT 7 = ONLY FOR 63 TO 80 8 = SLOT FOR DIN 7984 SCREWS DE MALE PISTON ROD
32 40 50 63 80
A 47 56 67 80 102
B2 13 17
C 12 12 16 16 20
C1 9 9 11.5 11.5 13
CH 10 10 13 13 17
CH1 17 17 19 19 24
H1 37 38 38 42 47.5
K 30 35 40 45 45
M 14 14 16 16 20
ISO M6 M6 M8 M8 M10
P M6 M6 M8 M8 M10
S 22 22 24 24 32
1-86
Compact stopper cylinders designed for stopping moving parts or chucks. With or without magnet execution Single-acting, oversize extended piston rod Can be also used as double-acting whith spring return Fixing centre distances to ISO 15552 for 32, 50, 80 and French standard NFE 49-004-1 and 2 (UNITOP). In the relevant cylinder slots, it is possible to mount retracting magnetic sensor.
COMPONENTS 20 a PISTON ROD: Stainless steel, thick chromed b HEAD: extruded anodised aluminium alloy c BARREL: drawn anodised and calibrated aluminium alloy d PISTON GASKET: polyurethane e MAGNET: neodymium-plastic f PISTON ROD GASKET: polyurethane g GUIDE BUSHING: steel strip with bronze and PTFE insert h STATIC O-RINGS: NBR i SECURING SCREWS: zinc-plated steel j RETURN SPRING: spring stainless steel k WHEEL: zinc-plated steel
1-87
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
COMPACT STOPPER CYLINDER
a PISTON ROD: Stainless steel, thick chromed b HEAD: extruded anodised aluminium alloy c BARREL: drawn anodised and calibrated aluminium alloy d PISTON GASKET: polyurethane e MAGNET: 32 neodymium-plastic - 50 to 80 plastoferrite f PISTON ROD GASKET: polyurethane g GUIDE BUSHING: steel strip with bronze and PTFE insert. h STATIC O-rings: NBR i SECURING SCREWS: zinc-plated steel j RETURN SPRING: spring stainless steel k WHEEL: zinc-plated steel COMPACT STOPPER CYLINDER FIXING OPTIONS A Fixing with screws, using the thread in the rear heads B Direct fixin from above using long through screws or tie rods. Non-magnetic stainless steel must be used (e.g. AISI 304) C Fixing with screws, using the thread in the front heads. D Fixing using flang fixe onto the cylinder.
With stopper cylinders it is important to keep to the values shown in the graph to prevent early breakage of the mechanical parts. The values shown are only valid with about 1 mm plastic deformation (stopper on chuck).
1-88
Code Description 23B0200015XP Compact stopper cylinder, trunnion 20, stroke 15 23BS200015XP Compact stopper cylinder, trunnion 20, stroke 15 (non-magnetic version)
B A 32x20 47 50x30 67 ISO 32.5 +0.1 -0.4 46.5 UNITOP 32 +0.4 -0.1 50 C 20 32 D 48.5 69 D1 38 53 E H9 6 6 F 4 4 G 64.5 75.5 H 7.5 7.5 H1 57 68 L 4 4.5 N 80.5 99.5 N1 20 30 ISO M6 M8
O UNITOP M6 M8
Q G1/8 G1/8
Description Compact stopper cylinder, trunnion 32, stroke 20 UNITOP Compact stopper cylinder, trunnion 32, stroke 20 ISO 15552 Compact stopper cylinder, trunnion 32, stroke 20 UNITOP (non-magnetic version) Compact stopper cylinder, trunnion 32, stroke 20 ISO 15552 (non-magnetic version) Compact stopper cylinder, trunnion 50, stroke 30 UNITOP Compact stopper cylinder, trunnion 50, stroke 30 ISO 15552 Compact stopper cylinder, trunnion 50, stroke 30 UNITOP (non-magnetic version) Compact stopper cylinder, trunnion 50, stroke 30 ISO 15552 (non-magnetic version)
1-89
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
COMPACT STOPPER CYLINDER
1 = SENSOR SLOT
Code Description 23C0200015XP Compact stopper cylinder, roller 20, stroke 15 23CS200015XP Compact stopper cylinder, roller 20, stroke 15 (non-magnetic version)
A 47 67 102 102
B2 17 17
C 20 32 50 50
D1 38 53 76 76
E H9 6 6 8 8
F 4 4 4 4
H1 57 68 117.5 127.5
H2 3 4 8 8
H3 6 6 10 10
H4 3.5 7 11 11
H5 7.5 12 18 18
L1 8 10 18 18
N1 38 50.5 63 73
R 9 12.5 18 18
Code 23C0320020XP 25C0320020XP 23CS320020XP 25CS320020XP 23C0500030XP 25C0500030XP 23CS500030XP 25CS500030XP 23C0800030XP 25C0800030XP 23CS800030XP 25CS800030XP 23C0800040XP 25C0800040XP 23CS800040XP 25CS800040XP
Description Compact stopper cylinder, roller 32, stroke 20 UNITOP Compact stopper cylinder, roller 32, stroke 20 ISO 15552 Compact stopper cylinder, roller 32, stroke 20 UNITOP (non-magnetic version) Compact stopper cylinder, roller 32, stroke 20 ISO 15552 (non-magnetic version) Compact stopper cylinder, roller 50, stroke 30 UNITOP Compact stopper cylinder, roller 50, stroke 30 ISO 15552 Compact stopper cylinder, roller 50, stroke 30 UNITOP (non-magnetic version) Compact stopper cylinder, roller 50, stroke 30 ISO 15552 (non-magnetic version) Compact stopper cylinder, roller 80, stroke 30 UNITOP Compact stopper cylinder, roller 80, stroke 30 ISO 15552 Compact stopper cylinder, roller 80, stroke 30 UNITOP (non-magnetic version) Compact stopper cylinder, roller 80, stroke 30 ISO 15552 (non-magnetic version) Compact stopper cylinder, roller 80, stroke 40 UNITOP Compact stopper cylinder, roller 80, stroke 40 ISO 15552 Compact stopper cylinder, roller 80, stroke 40 UNITOP (non-magnetic version) Compact stopper cylinder, roller 80, stroke 40 ISO 15552 (non-magnetic version)
1-90
A 45 52 65 75 95 115
B 35 43 47 47 61 65
C 32 36 45 50 63 75
D 24 28 32 32 41 41
E 7 9 9 9 12 14
H 31.9 36 45 50 63 71
S 4 4 4 6 6 6
Note: Individually packed with 2 screws. s Non UNITOP norm fixin distance
MALE HINGE-MODEL BA
+ = ADD THE STROKE CMPC UNITOP, TWO-FLAT UNITOP Code B W0950126004 s 12 12 W0950126004 s 16 12 W0950206004 20 16 W0950256004 25 16 CMPC ISO, TWO-FLAT ISO Code W0950322004 32 W0950402004 40 W0950502004 50 W0950632004 63 W0950802004 80 W0951002004 100 D 16 16 20 20 M 6 6 8 8 N 58.5 58.5 62.5 62.5 R 6 6 8 8 S 6 6 6 6 Weight [g] 24 24 44 48
B 26 28 32 40 50 60
D 22 25 27 32 36 41
M 10 12 12 16 16 20
R 11 13 13 17 17 21
S 10 10 12 12 16 16
Note: Supplied with 4 screws, 4 washers s Non UNITOP norm fixin distance
1-91
32 50 80
A 50 65 95
B 80 110 153
C 64 90 126
D 32 45 63
E 7 9 12
S 10 12 16
ACTUATORS
FEMALE HINGE-MODEL B
+ = ADD THE STROKE CMPC UNITOP, TWO-FLAT UNITOP Code B W0950322003 32 45 W0950406003 40 52 W0950506003 50 60 W0950636003 63 70 W0950806003 80 90 W0951006003 100 110 CMPC ISO, TWO-FLAT ISO Code W0950322003 32 W0950402003 40 W0950502003 50 W0950632003 63 W0950802003 80 W0951002003 100
ACTUATORS
B1 26 28 32 40 50 60
D 22 25 27 32 36 41
M 10 12 12 16 16 20
M1 14 14 18 23 28
R 11 12.5 12.5 15 15 20
S 10 9 11 11 13 15
B 45 52 60 70 90 110
B1 26 28 32 40 50 60
D 22 25 27 32 36 41
M 10 12 12 16 16 23
R 11 13 13 17 17 21
S 10 10 12 12 16 16
32 40 50 63 80
A 50 60 68 87 107
C 64 82 90 110 135
D 32 36 45 50 63
E 7 9 9 9 12
S 10 10 12 15 15
CMPC ISO, TWO FLAT ISO Code W0950322002 32 W0950402002 40 W0950502002 50 W0950632002 63 W0950802002 80 W0951002002 100 Note: Supplied with 4 screws
A 50 55 65 75 95 115
D 32 36 45 50 63 75
E 7 9 9 9 12 14
S 10 10 12 12 16 16
1-92
Note: Supplied complete with 1 pin, 4 screws s Non UNITOP norm fixin distance
1-93
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
F 30 36 43 43 43 43 50 50 64 77
G1 13 16 19 19 19 19 22 22 27 34
L 40 48 57 57 57 57 66 66 85 102
M 6 8 10 10 10 10 12 12 16 20
COUNTER-HINGE 16 to 25 - MODEL BC
CMPC UNITOP Code W0950120005 W0950120005 W0950200005 W0950200005 12 16 20 25 A 25 25 32 32 B 25 25 30 30 B1 12 12 16 16 C 15 15 20 20 D 5.5 5.5 6.5 6.5 E 2 2 4 4 F 27 27 30 30 M 6 6 8 8 R 7 7 10 10 S 3 3 4 4 Weight [g] 40 40 78 78
1-94
* For use when standard sensors do not detect the magnet, e.g. near metal masses. NB: For technical data see page 1-288
VALVE ASSEMBLY ON CYLINDER With this type of cylinder, the valves (D) can be mounted directly using the retracting sensor slot, without requiring the use of intermediate brackets. This can be done using the special plates (A) which come with both M3 and M4 threads, and screws (B) of the size, type and quantity shown in the table below. The plates are supplied complete with 2 stud pins, one M3 and one M4 (C). After the valve centre distance and the position of the valve have been determined, the plates can be secured to the cylinder. A position memory will be created to facilitate subsequent maintenance on the valve.
Screw (B) for connection to the cylinder (one per plate) M3x16 UNI 5931 (DIN 912) M4x25 UNI 5931 (DIN 912) M4x30 UNI 5931 (DIN 912)
Washer (B) (one per screw) A3.2 UNI 1751 (DIN 127A) A4.3 UNI 1751 (DIN 127A)
1-95
ACTUATORS
SPARE PARTS
COMPACT CYLINDERS, SERIES CMPC
ACTUATORS
Code 009 . . . 7001 009 . . . 7101 0090327101 009 . . . 8101 009 . . . 7201 0090327201 009 . . . 8201 009 . . . 7401 009 . . . 7501 009 . . . 7901 0090327901 009 . . . 8901
Bores 12 to 100 12 to 100 32 40 to 100 12 to 100 32 40 to 100 12 to 100 12 to 100 12 to 100 32 40 to 100
Type Complete set of gaskets polyurethane Front cylinder head kit for UNITOP polyurethane Front cylinder head kit for ISO 32 polyurethane Front cylinder head kit for ISO polyurethane Rear cylinder head kit for UNITOP polyurethane Rear cylinder head kit for ISO 32 polyurethane Rear cylinder head kit for ISO polyurethane Piston kit polyurethane Magnet Front + rear cylinder head + piston kit for UNITOP polyurethane Front + rear cylinder head + piston kit for ISO 32 polyurethane Front + rear cylinder head + piston kit for ISO polyurethane
Parts dfh bgfhi bgfhi bgfhi hij hij hij deklm e bdefghijklm bdefghijklm bdefghijklm
Code 009 . . . 7001F 009 . . . 7101F 0090327101F 009 . . . 8101F 009 . . . 7201 0090327201 009 . . . 8201 009 . . . 7401 009 . . . 7501 009 . . . 7901F 0090327901F 009 . . . 8901F
Bores 32 to 80 40 to 80 32 40 to 80 40 to 80 32 40 to 80 32 to 80 32 to 80 40 to 80 32 40 to 80
Type Set of gaskets Front cylinder head kit for UNITOP Front cylinder head kit for ISO 32 Front cylinder head kit for ISO Rear cylinder head kit for UNITOP Rear cylinder head kit for ISO 32 Rear cylinder head kit for ISO Piston kit Magnet Front + rear cylinder head + piston kit for UNITOP Front + rear cylinder head + piston kit for ISO 32 Front + rear cylinder head + piston kit for ISO
Parts dhl bgfhi bgfhi bgfhi hij hij hij deklim e bdefghijklm bdefghijklm bdefghijklm
1-96
Code 009 . . . 7060 009 . . . 7160 0090327160 009 . . . 8160 009 . . . 7201 009 . . . 7260 0090327201 009 . . . 8260 0090207401 009 . . . 7460 009 . . . 7501 009 . . . 7960 0090327960 009. . . 8960
Bores 20; 32; 50; 80 20; 32; 50; 80 32 50; 80 20; 32 50; 80 32 50; 80 20 32; 50; 80 20; 32; 50; 80 20; 32; 50; 80 32 50; 80
Type Complete set of gaskets Front cylinder head kit for UNITOP Front cylinder head kit for ISO 32 Front cylinder head kit for ISO Rear cylinder head kit for UNITOP 20 - 32 Rear cylinder head kit for UNITOP Rear cylinder head kit for ISO 32 Rear cylinder head kit for ISO Piston kit 20 Piston kit Magnet Front + rear cylinder head + piston kit for UNITOP Front + rear cylinder head + piston kit for ISO 32 Front + rear cylinder head + piston kit for ISO
Parts dfh bgfhi bgfhi bgfhi hij hij hij hij dek deklm e bdefghijklm bdefghijklm bdefghijklm
NOTES
1-97
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
ROUND CYLINDER SERIES RNDC
Clean profil cylinders available in different versions: configuratio with or without magnet single- and double-acting - single or through-rod pneumatic cushioning on request range of gaskets available in NBR, POLYURETHANE and FKM/FPM (for high temperatures)
TECHNICAL DATA
Max operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Bores Design Versions Magnet for sensors Standard strokes bar MPa psi C
NBR
FKM/FPM
LOW TEMPERATURE
10 10 10 1 1 1 145 145 145 10 to +80 10 to +150 (non-magnetic cylinders) 35 to +80 Unlubricated air. Lubrication, if used, must be continuous mm 32; 40; 50 Screwed heads Double-acting, Double-acting through-rod, Double-acting cushioned, Double-acting through-rod cushioned, Single-acting, Single-acting through-rod, no-stick slip All versions come complete with magnet. Supplied without magnet on request mm Single-acting: for bores 32 to 50 strokes from 1 to 250 Double-acting: for bores 32 to 50 strokes from 1 to 500 Maximum recommended strokes. Higher values can create operating problems bar 32 and 40: 0.4 - 50: 0.3 See page 1-7 See page 1-9 For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s to prevent surging, use the version No stick-slip and non-lubricated air.
COMPONENTS a PISTON ROD: C45 steel or stainless steel, thick chromed b PISTON ROD GASKET: polyurethane, NBR or FKM/FPM c GUIDE BUSHING: steel strip with bronze and PTFE insert d BARREL: drawn anodised aluminium alloy e HALF-PISTON: self-lubricating technopolymer with integrated cushioning olives f MAGNET: plastoferrite g PISTON GASKET: polyurethane, NBR or FKM/FPM h HEAD: anodised aluminium alloy i HEAD: anodised aluminium alloy
1-98
Stroke , C # , C # , C # , C # , C #
For all the other values, see previous table, except for T and R which are both replaced by R1
1-99
ACTUATORS
KEY TO CODES
ACTUATORS
112 TYPE SE through-rod DEA DE SE DEM DEMA DEM through-rod DEMA through-rod
32 BORE 32 40 50
0025 STROKE For the maximum suppliable strokes, look at the technical data
A C Z X
C MATERIAL C45 chrome rod, aluminium piston rod C45 chrome rod, technopolymer piston rod Stainless steel piston rod and nut aluminium piston Stainless steel piston rod and nut technopolymer piston
P N V B
Double-acting (non-cushioned, not magnetic) Magnetic double-acting (non-cushioned) Magnetic double-acting (cushioned) Cushioned double-acting (non-magnetic) Single-acting (magnetic)
Only available for non-magnetic versions (S) and with aluminium piston (A or Z) s For speeds lower than 0.2m/s, to prevent surging. Use no-lubricated air only n Only available for versions with aluminium piston (A or Z)
NOTES
1-100
COUNTER-HINGE MODEL BC
+ = ADD STROKE Code W0950320005 W0950400005 W0950500005 32 40 50 A 40 50 54 B 35 40 45 C 24 30 34 D 4 5 6 E 7 9 9 F 8 10 10 G 12 13 14 H 46.1 56.1 69.1 I 20 28 36 L 127 146 158 M 60 72.5 89 R 12 13 14 SW 13 17 19 Weight [g] 152 262 401
1-101
ACTUATORS
32 40 50
B 50 60 64
C 7 10 10
D 4 5 6
E 14 20 20
F 52 60 70
G 7 9 9
H 14 18 20
I 28 30 40
M 66 80 90
N 49 58 70
O 28 33 40
ACTUATORS
32 40 50
M 10 12 16
C 15 17 22
B1 10,5 12 15
B 14 16 21
A 28 32 42
L 57 66 85
F 43 50 64
G 15 17.5 22
CH 17 19 22
SENSOR CIRCLIP
Code W0950000132 W0950000140 W0950000150 Bore 32 40 50 Model Circlip DXF 36 - 32 Circlip DXF 45 - 40 Circlip DXF 52 - 50 36 45 55 A 29.5 34.5 38.5 B 10 10 10
FOR MOUNTING ON THE CYLINDER 50 INSERT THE ALUMINIUM SPACER a YOU FIND IN THE PACKAGE
1-102
Compact cylinders suitable for installation in limited spaces: configuratio with or without magnet single or double-acting - single or through-rod anti-rotation version and with built-in fixing possible choice of NBR, POLYURETHANE or FKM/FPM gaskets special design on request.
TECHNICAL DATA
Max operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Bores Design Standard strokes bar MPa C mm mm
Polyurethane 10 1 10 to +80
NBR
FKM/FPM
Low Temperature
Versions Magnet for sensors Inrush pressure single piston rod through-rod Forces generated at 6 bar thrust/retraction Weight Notes
bar bar
10 10 10 1 1 1 10 to +80 10 to +150 (non-magnetic cylinders) 35 to +80 Unlubricated air. Lubrication, if used, must be continuous 12 ; 16 ; 20 ; 25 ; 32 ; 40 ; 50 ; 63 ; 80 ; 100 With profil Double acting: 12 to 25, stroke 5 to 50 mm 32 to 40, stroke 5 to 70 mm 50 to 63, stroke 5 to 110 mm 80 to 100, stroke 5 to 150 mm Single-acting: 12 to 25, stroke 5 to 25 mm 32 to 63, stroke 5 to 50 mm Anti-rotation: 12 to 63, stroke 5 to 120 mm 80 to 100, stroke 5 to 150 mm Perforated through-rod: 20 to 40, stroke 5 to 100 mm 50 to 63, stroke 5 to 130 mm 80 to 100, stroke 5 to 165 mm Maximum recommended strokes. Higher values can create operating problems Double-acting, Double-acting through-rod, Single-acting retracted piston rod, Single acting extended piston rod, Single-acting through-rod, Perforated through-rod, Anti-rotation, Oscillating male, Oscillating female, no-stick slip* All versions come complete with magnet. Supplied without magnet on request 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 1 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 See page 1-7 See page 1-8 * Using for speeds lower than 0.2 m/s, to prevent surging. For no-stick-slip versions use no-lubricated air only
COMPONENTS
a b c d e f g h i PISTON ROD: C45 steel or stainless steel, thick chromed HEAD: 12 to 25 nichel-plated brass 32 to 100 anodised aluminium PISTON ROD GASKET: polyurethane, NBR or FKM/FPM GUIDE BUSHING: steel strip with bronze and PTFE insert BARREL: drawn anodised aluminium alloy HALF-PISTON: 12 to 63 acetal resin 80 to 100 in aluminium with PTFE guide pad PISTON GASKET: polyurethane, NBR or FKM/FPM MAGNET: 12 to 25 neodymium - 32 to 100 plastoferrite Static O-rings: NBR or FKM/FPM
1-103
ACTUATORS
FIXING METHOD
ACTUATORS
SHORT-STROKE CYLINDERS SERIES SSCY
Fix directly from above using long through-screws or tie rods. Non-magnetic stainless steel must be used (e.g. AISI 304).
54.5 40 66 80 50 62
62.7 54.5 18 73 88 66 80 18 23
1-104
12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
A 23.5 28 32 37 45
B 13 20 22 26 32
C 6 8 10 10 12 12 16 16
C1 5.5 7.5 9 9 11 11 15 15
D 28 33 37 47.5 56
E 26 28 32 39 48
F 11 11 11 18 18
54.5 40 66 80 50 62
62.7 54.5 18 73 88 66 80 18 23
K 6 6 7.5 7.5 10 10 11 15
M 7 10 10 10 15 15 18 18
N 38 37.5 36.5 42.5 48.3 56.3 53.2 61.2 53.2 61.2 57.7 65.7
O 20 25 30 35 35
P M3 M5 M5 M5 M6 M6 M8 M8
Q M5 M5 M5 G1/8 G1/8
R 20 22 28 36
S 8 8 8 15 15 15 15 15
CH 5 7 8 8 10 10 13 13
U 9.5 10 11 14 18 20 25 31
V 16.5 19 21 28 32 35.5 40 48
DIMENSIONS OF 12 ANTI-ROTATION
+ = ADD THE STROKE
12
A B 23.5 13
C 6
C1 5.5
D 28
E 26
F 11
G H 32.5 6.5
H1 J 10.5 M6
L 12
N 38
Z1 16
Z2 11
Q M5
S 8
U 9.5
V AA 16.5 8
BB 3.5
CC 6
DD 3.5
FF M3
GG 4
1-105
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
SHORT-STROKE CYLINDERS SERIES SSCY
16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
B 20 22 26 32 40 50 62 82 103
C 8 10 10 12 12 16 16 20 25
C1 7.5 9 9 11 11 15 15 19 24
F 11 11 18 18 18 18 23 26 26
G 33 32 33 37 39.5 39.5 42 57 64
K 6 7.5 7.5 10 10 11 15 15 18
Z1 20 22 22 26 34 43 55 70 94
Z2 15 18 22 26 34 43 55 70 94
R 20 22 28 36 40 50 62 82 103
S 8 8 15 15 15 15 15 19 19
CH 7 8 8 10 10 13 13 17 22
U 10 11 14 18 20 25 31 41 51.5
V 19 21 28 32 35.5 40 48 60 72
AA 8 8 8 10 10 12 12 14 17
BB 3.5 5 5 6 6 7 9 9 9
CC 6 7.5 7.5 10 10 11 14 14 14
EE 6 7.5 8 10 10 11 15 15 18
FF M3 M4 M4 M5 M5 M6 M6 M8 M8
GG 4 6 6 8 8 10 10 12 12
O 20 25 30 35 35 44 56
1-106
DIMENSIONS OF THROUGH-ROD
+ = ADD THE STROKE ++ = ADD TWICE THE STROKE PERFORATED THROUGH-ROD
* for 12, 16, 20: (N1++) = (G2+) + (X) + (X+) ** column for perforated through-rod only
54.5 40 66 80 50 62
62.7 54.5 18 73 88 66 80 18 23
1-107
ACTUATORS
KEY TO CODES
ACTUATORS
CYL n 208 n 209 n 210 n 211 212 213 214 n 215 217 t 218 221 222 n 223
212 TIPOLOGIA Single-acting retracted rod, non-magnetic Single-acting extended rod, non-magnetic Single-acting, retracted rod Single acting, extended rod Double acting, magnetic Double acting, non-magnetic Double acting, through-rod Single-acting, retracted, anti-rotation Double acting, anti-rotation Double acting, perforated through-rod Oscillating male hinge (up to 63 only) Oscillating female hinge (up to 63 only) Single-acting, through-rod
40 BORE 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
0010 STROKE For the maximum suppliable strokes, look at the technical data
C MATERIAL A C45 chrome rod, aluminium piston rod 12 to 63 mm C C45 chrome rod, technopolymer piston rod (standard 80 to 100 mm) Z Stainless steel piston rod and nut aluminium piston 12 to 63 mm X Stainless steel piston rod and nut technopolymer piston (standard 80 to 100 mm)
P N V B
In the code of cylinder with letter in fourth position 100 becomes A1 n Available up to 63 t Available from 20
Only available for non-magnetic versions (S) and with aluminium piston (A or Z) s For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s, to prevent surging. Use no-lubricated air only
1-108
Code 009 . . . 0010 009 . . . 0011 009 . . . 0015 009 . . . 0021 009 . . . 0023 009 . . . 0005 009 . . . 0006 009 . . . 0031 009 . . . 0033 009 . . . 0001
Bores 12 to 100 12 to 100 12 to 100 12 to 100 12 to 100 12 to 100 12 to 100 12 to 100 12 to 100 12 to 100
Type Complete polyurethane front head kit Complete NBR front head kit Complete NBR rear head kit Complete polyurethane piston kit Complete NBR piston kit Complete set of polyurethane gaskets Complete set of NBR gaskets Complete polyurethane front+rear head kit + piston Complete NBR front+rear head kit + piston Magnet
Parts abcdef abcdef ghij klmno klmno bdehjmo bdehjmo abcdefghijklmno abcdefghijklmno p
1-109
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
CARTRIDGE MICRO-CYLINDER SERIES CRTC
Single-acting micro-cylinders with threaded body for fixin in small space or directly inside the machine body, owing to the external O-ring which ensures perfect seal. ATTENTION: in case of cycles with high frequences its advisable that the piston doesnt reach the end of the stroke during the rod coming out stage.
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Bores Strokes Port Versions Design Seal OR on the body (not included in the supply) bar MPa C 2 to 6 0.2 to 0.6 10 to +80 Lubricated or unlubricated air. Lubrication, if used, must be continuous 6 ; 10 ; 16 5 ; 10 ; 15 M5 Single-acting Mechanically edged 6 10 16 6 10 16 OR 7x1 9.5x1.5 16x1.5 STROKE 5 10 14 16 30 35 76 84
mm mm
Weight
15 19 40 90
COMPONENTS a Nickel-plated brass body b NBR rubber piston rod gasket c AISI 303 steel piston/piston rod (for 6 - 10) Brass piston (for 16) d Steel spring e Zinc-plated steel nut f Brass bushing g AISI 303 steel piston rod (for 16) h Zinc-plated steel nut
1-110
6 10 16
C 5 7 6
CH 9 14 20
CH1 5.5 7 8
E 8 10.5 13
F M3 M4 M5
G 8.5 12 19
M M5 M5 M5
N 2.4 2 4
S 3 4 5
SW 14 19 27
6 10 16
5 5 6 7
15 5 6 7
5 10 11 15
15 24 24 25
5 12 13 17
15 26 26 27
5 16 20 26
15 31 34 36
K 8.5 12 19
KEY TO CODES
Code W1000060005 W1000060010 W1000060015 W1000100005 W1000100010 W1000100015 W1000160005 W1000160010 W1000160015 Description CYL. CRTC-006-0005-S000-00 CYL. CRTC-006-0010-S000-00 CYL. CRTC-006-0015-S000-00 CYL. CRTC-010-0005-S000-00 CYL. CRTC-010-0010-S000-00 CYL. CRTC-010-0015-S000-00 CYL. CRTC-016-0005-S000-00 CYL. CRTC-016-0010-S000-00 CYL. CRTC-016-0015-S000-00
KEY TO CODES
CYL C R T C TYPE Cartridge microcylinder 010 DIAMETER 006 010 016 0010 STROKE 0005 0010 0015 S 0 00 TYPE Single-acting retracted piston rod 0 0 FURTHER DESCRIPTION 0 0 SPECIAL DESIGN
1-111
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
COMPACT GUIDED CYLINDERS SERIES CMPG
The guided compact cylinder series CMPG is a robust and practical solution with a built-in guide unit. The rod guiding bushes are mounted directly in the anodized aluminium alloy lining. Two guiding solutions are available: sintered bronze bushes coupled with ground carbon chromed steel rods, or ball recirculation bushes coupled with tempered, chromed and ground steel rods. There are grooves on one side of the body to house the retractable sensors. In the non-cushioned version, the stop is silenced by NBR front gaskets, and the cushioned version has adjustable pins to graduate braking. Threaded holes and calibrated holes are provided for fixin the dowel pins.
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Bores Strokes bar MPa psi C F mm mm
CUSHIONED
NO-CUSHIONED
Version Weights
1 to 10 0.1 to 1 14.5 to 145 -10 to +80 14 to 176 Unlubricated air. Lubrication, if used, mast be continuos 16; 20; 25; 32; 40; 50; 63 16; 20; 25; 32; 40; 50; 63; 80; 100 16: 20 - 30-40-50 16: 10-20-25*-30-40-50-75-100-150-200 20; 25: 20-30-40-50-75-100-150 20; 25: 20-25*-30-40-50-75-100-150-200 32 to 63: 25-50-75-100-150-175 32 to 100: 25-50-75-100-150-200 Other strokes on request but with the same cylinder dimensions as the standard stroke immediately above With bronze bushings With ball bearings See page 1-9 * only bronze bushings version
COMPONENTS a BARREL: anodized aluminium alloy b PISTON ROD: grinded chrome steel c GUIDE ROD: grinded chrome steel d GUIDE ROD: hardened and tempered chrome steel e REAR BASE: anodized aluminium alloy f FRONT BASE: anodized aluminium alloy g GUIDE BUSHING: self-lubricating bronze h BUFFER GASKET: NBR i PISTON: aluminium alloy j MAGNET: plastoferrite k PISTON GASKET: (PARKER PRADIFA) NBR l GUIDE RING: PTFE m SLIDE BUSHING: sintered bronze n BALL BEARINGS o DUST SCRAPER RING: NBR or FKM/FPM p GREASE NIPPLES: zinc-plated or stainless steel q FLANGE: anodized aluminium alloy
1-112
20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
ASSEMBLY OPTIONS If the compact guided cylinder is mounted as shown in figur A, there need to be two through holes in the frame for the guide columns.
1-113
Bushes Balls Bushes Balls Bushes Balls Bushes Balls Bushes Balls Bushes Balls Bushes Balls Bushes Balls Bushes Balls
ACTUATORS
mm 16
Guide unit
Stroke (mm) 50 75 20 16 34 29 35 58 70 54 48 78 73 60 168 138 60 276 168 138 60 276 256 216 89 393 256 216 89 393 305 256 158 864 471 413 314 1374
STOPPER FUNCTIONS
ACTUATORS
LIFTING FUNCTIONS The graph refers from 25 to 50 mm-stroke cylinders with ball re-circulation guide unit
The graph refers from 75 to 100 mm-stroke cylinders with ball re-circulation guide unit
1-114
BORE 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
0 to 50 45 49 49.5
16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
A 33 36 42 51 51 59 72 92 112
A1 25 29 38 49 49 56 69 88 108
C1 10 10 10 10 10 12 12 16 16
D 9 9 9 9 11 11 11 15.5 19
E 16 18 26 30 30 40 50 60 80
E1 7 10 10 5 10 10 10 15 15
F2 M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M10
KH7 4 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 8
M 22 26 32 38 38 44 44 56 62
N 8 9 8 15 21 27 31.5 37 40
Q 8 10 12 16 16 20 20 25 30
R 13 13 14 16 17 17 20 21 25
T 20 20 25 20 20 25 25 30 35
1-115
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
COMPACT GUIDED CYLINDERS SERIES CMPG
BORE 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
** for strokes 25 and 50 = 20 for strokes 75 = 25 *= BORE 16 20 25 L stroke 75 to 200 105.5 108.5
0 to 50 70 74 74.5
16 20 25 32 40 50 63
A 33 36 42 51 51 59 72
A1 25 29 38 49 49 56 69
C 58 62 62.5 62.5 69 69 74
C1 10 10 10 10 10 12 12
D 9 9 9 9 11 11 11
E 16 18 26 30 30 40 50
E1 32 35 35 30 35 35 35
F1 M5 M5 M6 M8 M8 M10 M10
F2 M6 M6 M8 M8
KH7 4 5 5 6 6 6 6
I 40 46 56 80 90 100 110
M 22 26 32 38 38 44 44
M1 42 52 62 80 90 100 110
N 8 9 8 15 21 27 31.5
P 78 78.5 82.5 89 93 98
Q 8 10 12 16 16 20 20
R 13 13 14 16.5 17 17 20
T 20 20 25 20 20 25 25
1-116
KEY TO CODES
W 1 4 3 TYPE 0 3 2 DIAMETER 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 A1=100 2 3 4 5 2 VERSION bronze bushings ball bearings cushioned with brass bushings cushioned with ball bearings 02 5 STROKE CUSHIONED VERSION 16: 20, 30, 40, 50 20 to 25: 20, 30, 40, 50, 75, 100, 150 32 to 63: 25, 50, 75, 100, 150, 175 NOT CUSHIONED VERSION 16: 10, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200 20 to 25: 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200 32 to 100: 25, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200 Other strokes on request but with the same cylinder dimensions as the standard stroke immediately above.
NOTES
1-117
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
RODLESS CYLINDER SERIES STD
Rodless cylinders come in fiv different bores - 16, 25, 32, 40 and 63 mm and the design incorporates numerous innovations. Calibrated extruded anodized aluminium alloy barrel Sensor slots and accessory slots in the barrel itself Longitudinal seal by means of specially-shaped indeformable stainless steel strips Strokes 100 to 5700 mm with 1mm intervals Adjustable integrated pneumatic cushioning Adjustable limit switches and decelerations can be applied at any time For this type of cylinder (size 32 and upwards), the valves can be fitte directly using the retracting sensors without requiring any intermediate brackets. Refer to the table on page 1-46
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Bores Type of construction Strokes bar MPa psi C F mm mm
NBR
FKM/FPM
1 to 8 0.1 to 0.8 14.5 to 116 10 to +80 14 to 176 50 mm unlubricated filtere air Lubrication, if used, must be continuous. 16, 25, 32, 40, 63 Double-acting rodless cylinder with direct transmission system 16: from 100 to 5000 with 1mm interval 25, 32 e 40: from 100 to 5700 with 1mm interval 63: from 100 to 5500 with 1mm interval V ,1 m/s (NBR) V $1 m/s (FKM/FPM) ,1 m/s (NBR) 2 m/s (FKM/FPM) See page 1-9 For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s to prevent surging, use the version No stick-slip and non-lubricated air.
COMPONENTS a CYLINDER HEAD: aluminium alloy b BARREL: profile anodized aluminium alloy c PISTON GASKET: NBR or FKM/FPM d CENTRAL ELEMENT: aluminium alloy e SCRAPER: Hostaform f O-RING: FKM/FPM g PISTON: Hostaform h CUSHIONING CONE: aluminium alloy i STATIC O-RINGS: NBR or FKM/FPM j SLIDE: aluminium alloy k OUTER STRIP: stainless steel l INNER STRIP: stainless steel m BAND SUPPORT: Hostaform
1-118
16 25 32 40 63
DIAGRAM OF SPEED AND MAXIMUM CUSHIONABLE LOAD For the cylinder to reach the end-of-stroke position without intense or repeated impact which would damage it, it is necessary to annul the kinetic energy of the moving mass and the work generated. The maximum cushionable load depends on the traversing speed and the absorption of the air buffer supplied standard with the various cylinders. The diagram shows the speeds and cushionable mass for the various diameters at a pressure of 6 bar.
Load L (N)
Distance K [mm]
1-119
N.B.: When the cylinder is subjected simultaneously to torque and force, it is advisable to keep to the following equations. Ma = F x ha Mr = L x hv + G x hr Mv = F x hv
ACTUATORS
Bore
Centre Distance Y 9 14 18 22 44
ACTUATORS
B 12 17 23 45
C 15 23 27 30
F 48 80 90 90
H 12 18.5 22 24
K 32 50 55 55
M M4 M5 M6 M6
M1 M3 M5 M6 M6
M2 M5 M6 M8 M8
N 7 12 14 17.5
N1 8 11 12 12
O 6 13 12 12
P 43.5 66 86 97
S 18 23 27 28
U 10 15 18 18
V 18 27 40 54
VS 18 27 36 54
W 27 40 56 69
WS 27 40 52 72
W1 13.5 20 30 36
W2 9 13.5 22 27
Y 4.5 6.5 8 9
Z1 37.5 53 74 85
Z2 24 33 44 49
Z4 28 42 70 70
1-120
DIMENSIONS 63
+ = ADDED STROKE
Basic supply A, B, C, D to feed to left chambers E, F, G, H to feed the right chambers Note: B, C, D, F, G and H are supplied closed with threaded plugs If you modify the position of an inner plug following the instructions provided with the cylinder, you can arrange: all feeds from the left all feeds from the right A, B feed the left chambers E, F feed the right chambers C, D feed the right chambers G, H feed the left chambers
NOTE: For other dimensions see code 270 16 25 32 40 63 A 25 37 70 70 80 B 4.5 5.5 6.5 6.5 M8 C 13 20 38 38 32 D 2 3 5 5 8 E 20 30 90 90 80 F 10 16 75 75 65 G 55 55 37 H 47-50 72-75 91-100 111-120 155-162 L 28 42 70 70 82
1-121
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
16 25 32 40 63
C1 22 44 56 74 65
E 17 29 32.8
G 9 11 14
W7 38 53 74 89 128.5
W8 46 67 89 108 153
WS4 42 50 60 75 103
Y1 7.5 5 4 1.5
Z4 7 8 10 12.5 16
Stroke 10.4 16 22 25 25
Max. cushioned force For stroke [J] For hour [J] 10 14125 26 34000 54 53700 90 70000 160 91000
KEY TO CODES
CYL 27 TYPE 27 Rodless cylinder 0 0 1 2 3 Standard With swing drive Twin cushioned series Double Double-acting cushioned Magnetic + adjustable limit switches and shock absorbers 0 0 Magnetic S Non-magnetic n G No stick slip 2 5 BORE 16 25 32 40 63 0050 STROKE 16: from 100 to 5000 mm 25 to 40: from 100 to 5700 mm 63 from 100 to 5500 mm C N GASKETS N NBR gasket V FKM/FPM gasket
n For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s, to prevent surging. Use no-lubricated air only For speed $ 1/m/s Available up to 32
1-122
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Bores Type of construction Strokes Recommended speeds Max. speed with decelerators Weight Notes bar MPa psi C F
NBR
FKM/FPM
1.5 to 8 0.15 to 0.8 21.8 to 116 10 to +80 14 to 176 50 mm unlubricated filtere air Lubrication, if used, must be continuous mm 25, 32, 40, 63 Double-acting rodless cylinder with direct transmission system mm 25, 32 and 40: from 100 to 5700 with 1mm interval 63: from 100 to 5500 with 1mm interval V ,1 m/s (NBR) V $1 m/s (FKM/FPM) ,1 m/s (NBR) 2 m/s (FKM/FPM) See page 1-9 For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s to prevent surging, use the version No stick-slip and non-lubricated air.
COMPONENTS a CYLINDER HEAD: aluminium alloy b BARREL: profile anodized aluminium alloy c PISTON GASKET: NBR or FKM/FPM d CENTRAL ELEMENT: aluminium alloy e SCRAPER: Hostaform f O-RING: FKM/FPM g PISTON: Hostaform h CUSHIONING CONE: aluminium alloy i STATIC O-RINGS: NBR or FKM/FPM j SLIDE: aluminium alloy k OUTER STRIP: stainless steel l INNER STRIP: stainless steel m BAND SUPPORT: Hostaform n V GUIDE PLATE: Hostaform
1-123
Two opposed V-shaped guide units are obtained directly in the anodized aluminium cylinder liner, on which a cover with two acetalic resin wearresistant pads slides. The cover has a tip-up-type carriage-piston rod coupling. In this way the carriage only transfers loads axially and does not support loads and moments in other directions. The play of the pads can be adjusted by means of side threaded grub screws. Therefore, it is possible to recover the wear of pads, which can be replaced without the need for dismantling the cylinder. This family of rodless cylinders has the same features as the basic versions: such as an integrated adjustable pneumatic cushioning, sensor slots and accessory holding slots. A version is available with adjustable limit switches and hydraulic decelerators. They can be purchased separately and applied at any time to the basic cylinders as well.
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
Bore 25 32 40 63
Centre Distance Y 14 18 22 44
Mr max [Nm] 5 10 26 80
N.B.: The loads can be applied for speeds below 0.2 m/s. For higher speeds, it is advisable not to exceed 1 m/s N.B.: When the cylinder is subjected simultaneously to torque and force, it is advisable to keep to the following equations Ma = F x ha Mr = L x hv + G x hr Mv = F x hv
DIAGRAM OF SPEED AND MAXIMUM CUSHIONABLE LOAD For the cylinder to reach the end-of-stroke position without intense or repeated impact which would damage it, it is necessary to annul the kinetic energy of the moving mass and the work generated. The maximum cushionable load depends on the traversing speed and the absorption of the air buffer supplied standard with the various cylinders. The diagram shows the speeds and cushionable mass for the various diameters at a pressure of 6 bar.
Load L (N)
Distance K [mm]
1-124
DIMENSIONS 25 to 40
+ = ADDED STROKE
Only for 25
25 32 40
AG 25 25
AO 2 2.6 9.4
B 17 23 45
C 23 27 30
E 90 110 110
F 45 40 40
H 18.5 22 24
J 8.5 10.5 15
K 45 55 55
M M5 M5 M6
M1 M5 M6 M6
M2 80 90 90
N 12 15 17.5
N1 8 12 12
P 67.5 88 98.5
Q 21 17.5 17.5
R 46 66 80
S 26 45 45
T 10 10.5 17.5
V 27 40 54
VS 27 36 54
W 40 56 69
WS 40 52 72
W1 20 30 36
W2 13.5 22 27
Y 6.5 8 9
Z3 6.5 8 11.8
1-125
ACTUATORS
DIMENSIONS 63
ACTUATORS
RODLESS CYLINDER WITH GUIDE V
+ = ADDED STROKE
Basic supply A, B, C, D to feed to left chambers E, F, G, H to feed the right chambers Note: B, C, D, F, G and H are supplied closed with threaded plugs If you modify the position of an inner plug following the instructions provided with the cylinder, you can arrange: all feeds from the right all feeds from the left A, B feed the left chambers E, F feed the right chambers C, D feed the right chambers G, H feed the left chambers
DIMENSIONS VERSION WITH ADJUSTABLE LIMIT SWITCH AND SHOCK ABSORBERS 25 32; 40 63
B Max C1 C2 D F 25 84 35 9 M14x1.5 80 32 110 45 11 M20x1.5 100 40 120 60 14 M25x1.5 100 63 122 65 M36x1.5 120 For graphs to help choose shock absorbers see page 1-137
W7 53 74 89 128.5
W8 67 89 108 153
WS4 50 60 75 103
Z4 8 10 12.5 16
Stroke 16 22 25 25
Max. cushioned force For stroke [J] For hour [J] 26 34000 54 53700 90 70000 160 91000
KEY TO CODES
CYL 27 TYPE 27 Rodless cylinder 7 7 Double-acting cushioned Magnetic with guide V 8 Double-acting cushioned Magnetic with guide V + adjustable limit switches and decelerator 0 0 Magnetic S Non-magnetic G No stick slip 2 5 BORE 25 32 40 63 0050 STROKE 25 to 40: from 100 to 5700 mm 63 from 100 to 5500 mm C N GASKETS N NBR gasket V FKM/FPM gasket
For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s, to prevent surging. Use no-lubricated air only For speed $ 1/m/s
1-126
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Bores Type of construction Strokes bar MPa Psi C F mm mm
NBR
FKM/FPM
Threaded ports Assembly Recommended speed Max. speed with decelerators Weight Notes
0.5 to 8 0.05 to 0.8 7 to 116 -10 to +80 14 to 176 50 mm unlubricated filtere air lubrication, if used, must be continuous 16, 25, 32, 40, 63 Doubl-acting rodless cylinder with direct transmission system 16: from 100 to 1350 with 1 interval 25: from 100 to 2300 with 1 interval 32: from 100 to 2300 with 1 interval 40: from 100 to 2250 with 1 interval 63 standard: from 100 to 2100 with 1 interval 63 heavy: from 100 to 2650 with 1 interval M5, G1/8, G1/4, G3/8 As required ,1 m/s $1 m/s ,1 m/s 2 m/s See page 1-7 For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s to prevent surging, use the version No stick-slip and non-lubricated air.
COMPONENTS For version 275 a CYLINDER: see construction details on page 1-118 b GUIDE: hardened steel c SHOE: steel with hardened ball circulation d SLIDE SUPPORT: anodised aluminium For version 276 Besides the details specifie above: e END-OF-STROKE STUD PIN: zinc-plated steel, complete with 2 zinc-plated nuts for fixin f DECELERATOR: burnished steel, complete with 2 zinc-plated or burnished nuts for fixin g DECELERATOR SUPPORT: anodised aluminium h BRACKET: hardened-and-tempered and zinc-plated steel
1-127
The range of rodless cylinders with ball circulation guides is available with fiv different bores 16, 25, 32, 40 and 63. The bore 63 can be supplied in two versions: the standard one for intermediate loads and the heavy one for considerably weighty loads. Besides the general features specifie for standard rodless cylinders, the other main features are: Very high load capacity, acting in all directions without discharging onto the cylinder slide. Hardened steel guide connected fi mly to the cylinder barrel. Ball circulation shoes constructed using special technology that make them very silent when the guide slides, with very long maintenance intervals. For example, they only need lubricating every 2000 km or once a year, using type 2 grease, preferably containing lithium soap. Extra sturdy slide support with various holes for fixin the loads. Holes for centring pins are also provided. 100 to 2650 stroke at intervals of 1 mm. Integrated pneumatic adjustable cushioning. Adjustable limit switches and decelerations can be applied at any time. For this type of cylinder (size 32 and upwards), the valves can be fitte directly using the retracting sensors without requiring any intermediate brackets. Refer to the table on page 1-46
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
Version
K [mm] 35 50.5 59 68 84 91
Y [mm] 29 44 53.5 58 79 79
N.B.: when the cylinder is subjected simultaneously to torque and force, it is advisable to keep to the following equations Ma = F x (hr + Y) Mr = G x (hr + z) + Lx (hv + X) Mv = F x (K + hv)
DIAGRAM OF SPEED AND MAXIMUM CUSHIONABLE LOAD For the cylinder to reach the end-of-stroke position without intense or repeated impact which would damage it, it is necessary to annul the kinetic energy of the moving mass and the work generated. The maximum cushionable load depends on the traversing speed and the absorption of the air buffer supplied standard with the various cylinders. The diagram shows the speeds and cushionable mass for the various diameters at a pressure of 6 bar.
Load L (N)
Distance K [mm]
1-128
DIMENSIONS 16
+ = ADD THE STROKE
DIMENSIONS 25
+ = ADD THE STROKE
DIMENSIONS 32; 40
+ = ADD THE STROKE
32 40
A 250 300
B 23 45
C 27 30
H 22 24
J 10.5 15
N 14 17.5
P 86 97
V 40 54
VS 36 54
W 56 69
WS 52 72
WS1 85 104
W1 30 36
W2 22 27
W3 95 98
W4 70 73
W5 99 102
W6 78.5 88
Y 8 9
Z1 74 85
Z3 8 11.8
1-129
ACTUATORS
DIMENSIONS 63
ACTUATORS
RODLESS CYLINDER WITH BALL RECIRCULATING GUIDE
HEAVY
Basic supply A, B, C, D to feed to left chambers E, F, G, H to feed the right chambers Note: B, C, D, F, G and H are supplied closed with threaded plugs. If you modify the position of an inner plug following the instructions provided with the cylinder, you can arrange: all feeds from the right all feeds from the left A, B feed the left chambers E, F feed the right chambers C, D feed the right chambers G, H feed the left chambers
STANDARD
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAMS
16 25 32 40 63
A min 8 10 4 3
Horizontal layout Interm. support code (1) Leg code (2) W0950164004 W0950167001 W0950254004 W0950257001 W0950324004 W0950328035 W0950404004 W0950407001 W0950637032 W0950637001
B min 12 10 11 5
Vertical layout Interm. support code (1) Leg code (2) W0950164004 W0950167001 W0950254004 W0950257001 W0950324004 W0950327001 W0950404004 W0950407001 W0950637036 W0950637001
1-130
16 25 32 40 63 63
C1 22 44 56 74 65 65
E 17 29 32.8
G 9 11 14
W7 38 53 74 89 128.5 128.5
WS2 52 71 82.5 92
Y1 7.5 5 4 1.5
Z4 7 8 10 12.5 16 16
Stroke 10.4 16 22 25 25 25
Max. cushioned force Per stroke [J] Per hour [J] 10 14125 26 34000 54 53700 90 70000 160 91000 160 91000
Max. impact force [N] 1000 2800 3750 5500 11120 11120
Max. thrust force [N] 220 530 890 1550 2220 2220
KEY TO CODES
CYL 27 TYPE 27 Rodless cylinder 5 5 6 Double-acting cushioned magnetic with ball circulation guides Double-acting cushioned magnetic with ball circulation guides + adjustable limit switch and shock absorbers 0 S n G A n B C 0 STD Magnetic STD Non-magnetic STD No stick slip HEAVY Magnetic HEAVY No stick slip HEAVY Non-magnetic 2 5 BORE 16 25 32 40 63 0050 STROKE 16: 100 to 1350 mm 25 - 32: 100 to 2300 mm 40: 100 to 2250 mm 63 std: 100 to 2100 mm 63 heavy: 100 to 2650 mm C N GASKETS N NBR gasket V FKM/FPM gasket
n For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s, to prevent surging. Use no-lubricated air only For speed $ 1/m/s
1-131
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
Ma max [Nm] 8 30 60
Mv max [Nm] 1 6 10
N.B.: When the cylinder is subjected simultaneously to torque and force, it is advisable to keep to the following equations. Ma = F x ha Mr = L x hv + G x hr Mv = F x hv
For technical data see page 1-118 For the weights see page 1-9
B 12 17 23
C 15 23 27
D 76 120 150
E 64 100 110
F 48 80 90
G M5 1/8 1/4
H 12 18.5 22.5
K 32 50 55
M M5 M6 M6
N 10 15 12
M1 M3 M5 M6
N1 7 12 14
O 16 20 20
P 53.5 74 95
R 48 66 86.5
S 42 59 77.5
T 3 3.5 4.5
U 34 50 70
VW 42 63 86
VS 18 27 40
WW 51 72 100
WS 27 41 56
Y 4.5 7 8
Z 37.5 53.5 74
DIAGRAM OF SPEED AND MAXIMUM CUSHIONABLE LOAD For the cylinder to reach the end-of-stroke position without intense or repeated impact which would damage it, it is necessary to annul the kinetic energy of the moving mass and the work generated. The maximum cushionable load depends on the traversing speed and the absorption of the air buffer supplied standard with the various cylinders. The diagram shows the speeds and cushionable mass for the various diameters at a pressure of 6 bar.
1-132
ACCESSORIES FOR RODLESS STD, GUIDE V, WITH BALL RECIRCULATING GUIDE CYLINDERS
FOOT 16; 25
+ = ADDED STROKE Code W0950167001 W0950257001 16 25 AB 3.6 5.5 AH 1.5 2 AO 14 22 AT 1.6 2.5 AU 4 6 TR 18 27 UH 26 40 H 150 232 Weight [g] 10 32
FOOT 32; 40
+ = ADDED STROKE Code W0950327001 W0950407001 32 40 AB 6.6 9 AH 4 2 AO 25 25 AT 20 20 AU 8 11.5 AV 20 30 TR 36 54 UH 51 71 H 284 327 Weight [g] 88 112
FOOT 63
+ = ADDED STROKE Code W0950637001 63 AB 11 AT 7 AO 64 AU 15 TR 78 UH 103 H 460 Weight [g] 360
1-133
ACCESSORIES FOR RODLESS STD, GUIDE V, WITH BALL RECIRCULATING GUIDE CYLINDERS
ACTUATORS
INTERMEDIATE SUPPORT 63 FOR VERSION STD, GUIDE V AND VERTICAL POSITION BALL RECIRCULATING
ACTUATORS
Code W0950637032
63
AB 8.5
AH 7.5
AO 55
AT 7.5
TR 78
UH 103
ACCESSORIES FOR RODLESS STD, GUIDE V, WITH BALL RECIRCULATING GUIDE CYLINDERS
NOTES
1-134
FOOT 16; 25
FOOT 32
Code W0950328036 Descrizione Foot DOUBLE 32 Weight [g] 156
VERTICAL FOOT 32
Code W0950328035 Description Vertical foot 32 Weight [g] 92
INTERMEDIATE FOOT 16 to 32
Code W0950168037 W0950258037 W0950328037 2x16 2x25 2x32 AB 3.5 5.5 6.5 AH 3 4 5 AO 12 20 55 AT 6 6 8 AV 6 10.5 40 TR 60.5 84.5 111.5 UH 64 96 123 Weight [g] 16 34 96
Note: Supplied complete with 8 screws, 8 fixin plates (plates for 32 only)
1-135
ACTUATORS
AH 1.5 2
AO 14 22
AT 1.6 2.5
AU 4 6
TR 42 63
UH 51 72
H 150 232
Weight [g] 18 54
ACTUATORS
16 to 40
63
16 25 32 40 63
Note: 16 to 40: Supplied complete with 1 adaptor, 1 support, 1 pin, 1 bushing 63: Supplied complete with 1 plate, 1 support, 1 pin, 2 bushings, 4 screws
ACCESSORIES FOR RODLESS STD, GUIDE V, WITH BALL RECIRCULATING GUIDE AND DOUBLE CYLINDERS
DRIVE PIN
Code W0950167034 W0950257034 W0950327034 W0950327034 W0950637034 16 25 32 40 63 A 2.9 5 8 8 10 B 28 42 70 70 82 C 5 8 12 12 14 Weight [g] 6 16 52 52 100
For use on the rodless cylinder guide V 25 or when standard sensors do not detect the magnet, e.g. near metal masses. For technical data see page 1-288.
1-136
0950164003 0950164001
A B
ADJUSTABLE LIMIT SWITCH AND SHOCK ABSORBERS KIT FOR RODLESS CYLINDER WITH GUIDE V 25 to 40 63
Code 0950254004 0950324004 0950404004 0950634004 Description Rodless cylinder limit switch and shock absorbers 25 Rodless cylinder limit switch and shock absorbers 32 Rodless cylinder limit switch and shock absorbers 40 Rodless cylinder limit switch and shock absorbers 63 Weight [g] 260 460 730 1620
Note: Supplied complete with 1 shock absorber support, 1 standard shock absorber, 1 shock absorber nut, 1 limit switch grub screw, 1 grub screw nut ( 2 for 63) , 1 bracket, 1 bracket screw, 4 locking grub screws (for 25), 4 locking plates and 4 screws (for 32 and 40)
SHOCK ABSORBERS
Code 0950004003 0950004004 0950004005 0950004006 0950004007 Description Shock absorbers PR015 MF1 + nut M12x1 Shock absorbers PR025 MC2 + nut M14x1.5 Shock absorbers PR050 MC2 + nut M20x1.5 Shock absorbers PR0100 MF2 + nut M25x1.5 Shock absorbers PR0125 MF3 + nut M36x1.5 16 25 32 40 63
40
63
The dotted areas indicate that the SHOCK ABSORBERS is supplied standard. Other options can be selected depending on the speed [m/sec] and the maximum work force [J/stroke] to dissipate at each stroke. Refer to the diagrams above to select the correct option.
1-137
ACCESSORIES FOR RODLESS STD, GUIDE V, WITH BALL RECIRCULATING GUIDE AND DOUBLE CYLINDERS
ACTUATORS
SPARE PARTS FOR STD RODLESS CYLINDERS, GUIDE V, BALL RECIRCULATING GUIDE, DOUBLE
LAST RELEASE CYLINDER
ACTUATORS
SPARE PART FOR STD RODLESS CYLINDERS, GUIDE V, WITH BALL RECIRCULATING GUIDE AND DOUBLE
a Bands support Kit b Piston kit c d e f g j NBR gaskets Kit (FKM/FPM for g) c d e f g j FKM/FPM gaskets Kit h i Bands Kit (inner/outer) k V guide plate kit BANDS SUPPORT KIT POS 1 (Y)
16 25 32 40 63 Code White 0090165080 0090255080 0090325080 0090405080 *0090635080 Code Black 0090165081 0090255081 0090325081 0090405081 *0090635081 Code Orange 0090165082 0090255082 0090325082 0090405082 *0090635082 Code Light grey 0090165083 0090255083 0090325083 0090405083 *0090635083 Code Dark grey 0090165084 0090255084 0090325084 0090405084 *0090635084
* For 63, the kit includes a strip support and a shim in the colour ordered Therefore, two kits must be ordered for each cylinder
NOTES If the ends of the carriage appear as below indicated, please contact our commercial department for the spare parts INTERMEDIATE RELEASE OLD RELEASE
1-138
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Bores Type of construction Strokes Recommended speeds Max. speed with decelerators Weight Notes bar MPa psi C F mm
NBR 1 to 8 0.1 to 0.8 14.5 to 116 -10 to +80 14 to +176 50 mm unlubricated filtere air Lubrication, if used, must be continuous 25, 32, 40, 50 Double-acting rodless cylinder with direct transmission system from 100 to 5700 mm with 1mm interval , 2 ,2 See page 1-9 For speeds lower than 0.2 m / s to prevent surging, use the version No stick-slip and non-lubricated air
m/s m/s
COMPONENTS a CYLINDER HEAD: anodized aluminium alloy b BARREL: profile anodized aluminium alloy c PISTON GASKET: polyurethane d V-SHAPED GUIDE SHOE: Hostaform e DUST SCRAPER: Hostaform f PISTON: Hostaform g CUSHIONING CONE: anodized aluminium alloy h STATIC O-RINGS: NBR i SLIDE: anodized aluminium alloy j OUTER STRIP: stainless steel k INTERNAL STRAP: polyurethane + steel strands l DIRECTION CHANGE: Hostaform m BUFFER: NBR
1-139
Series PU rodless cylinders have an internal strip for longitudinal tightness made of polyurethane (PU) with a harmonic steel wire core. This solution gives excellent air tightness values. It is particularly suitable for high-speed and highly cyclical applications, even with long strokes. The external strip, which merely provides protection against of foreign bodies entry, is made of harmonic steel. The anodised aluminium cylinder liner has a T-slot on either side for housing the retracting sensors. Cylinder control solenoid valves can also be housed in these slots and secured by means of plates and screws (see General Catalogue page 1-46). There are plastic anti-wear guide shoes on either side of the carriage to increase the load capacity. They engage V-slots in the cylinder liner. All the cylinders incorporate adjustable pneumatic cushioning. One version has hydraulic decelerators + adjustable limit switches. These can also be added at a later stage by purchasing the relevant kit. The balanced drive version avoids having to transmit transverse torques and forces to the carriage whenever the load is supported by guides outside the cylinder.
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
Ma max [Nm] 22 40 70 90
Mr max [Nm] 5 10 26 32
Mv max [Nm] 10 20 35 45
N.B.: When the cylinder is subjected simultaneously to torque and force, it is advisable to keep to the following equations. Ma = F x ha Mr = L x hv + G x hr Mv = F x hv
DIAGRAM OF SPEED AND MAXIMUM CUSHIONABLE LOAD For the cylinder to reach the end-of-stroke position without intense or repeated impact which would damage it, it is necessary to annul the kinetic energy of the moving mass and the work generated. The maximum cushionable load depends on the traversing speed and the absorption of the air buffer supplied standard with the various cylinders. The diagram shows the speeds and cushionable mass for the various diameters at a pressure of 6 bar.
Piston speed [m/sec]
Load L (N)
Distance K [mm]
1-140
DIMENSIONS
1 and 6 feed the left-hand chamber from the left side 4 feeds the left-hand chamber from the right side 2, 3 and 5 feed the right-hand chamber from the right side NOTE: 3, 4, 5 and 6 are closed with threaded caps
25 32 40 50 25 32 40 50
C 20 20 23 23
D D1 max 131 171 214.5 168 264.3 198 W6 4 W7 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
D2 10 10 Z1 57 67 83.5 106
F 50 30 40 50
H 15.7 15.7 18 18
J K 11 30 11 50 12.5 70 12.5 80
M M5 M5 M6 M8
M1 M4 M5 M5 M6
M3 H10 M4 8 M6 8 M6 10 M5 12 M6
N 13 13.5 15 16
N2 2.1 2.1 2 2
O 4 4 5.5 6.5
P 63 73 92.5 115
R 40 48 60 74
S 19 19 21 24
S1 33 42
V 32.5 40 49 72
W 42 52 63 86
W5 21.2 27 31.5 43
1-141
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
RODLESS CYLINDER SERIES PU
25 32 40 50
A 37 37 52 52
C 20 20 26.8 26.8
D 3 3 5 5
E 30 30 90 90
F 16 16 77 77
F1 37 37
L 42 42 49 49
25 32 40 50
B Max 50 75 88 82
E 21.5 26.7 36 49
G 12 14 16 20
WS4 42 52 63 86
Z5 6 11.2 13 9
Stroke 16 22 25 25
Max. cushioned force For stroke [J] For hour [J] 26 34000 54 53700 90 70000 90 70000
KEY TO CODES
CYL 27 TYPE 27 Rodless cylinder 0 0 1 3 Double acting cushioned magnetic Double acting with swing carriage Double acting + adjustable limit switch and shock absorbers 0 3 Magnetic n 4 No stick slip 5 Non-magnetic 2 5 BORE 25 32 40 50 0100 STROKE from 100 to 5700 mm C C P GASKETS P Polyurethane gaskets
n For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s, to prevent surging. Use no-lubricated air only.
1-142
INTERMEDIATE FOOT
Code W0950257038 W0950327038 W0950407038 W0950507038 25 32 40 50 AB 5.5 6.6 9 9 AH 2 3 3 10 AO 28 33 38 43 AT 3.5 4 4.5 12 TR 60 73 90 106 UH 70 85 105 122 Weight [g] 16 30 42 121
Nota: 2 brackets and 4 grub screws per pack ( 25-32-40); 2 brackets, 4 grub screws and 2 plates for pack ( 50)
SLIM SENSOR
Code Description W0952025390 HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2.5 m W0952029394 HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 300 mm M8 W0952022180 REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2.5 m W0952028184 REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 300 mm M8 W0952125556 HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2 m ATEX W0952025500* HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 2.5 m W0952029504* HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 300 mm M8 W0952022500* REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 2.5 m W0952128184* REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 300 mm M8 * For use when standard sensors do not detect the magnet, e.g. near metal masses. For technical data see page 1-288
Note: supplied complete with 1 decelerator bracket, 1 standard decelerator, 1 decelerator nut, 1 limit switch grub screw, 1 limit switch grub screw nut, 1 limit switch block, 2 block screws and 2 decelerator bracket screws (nr 4 decelerator bracket screw for 40 and 50)
1-143
ACTUATORS
SHOCK ABSORBERS
ACTUATORS
25 32 40-50
Description Shock absorbers PRO25 MC2 + nut M14x1.5 Shock absorbers PRO50 MC2 + nut M20x1.5 Shock absorbers PRO100 MF2 + nut M25x1.5
The dotted areas indicate that the SHOCK ABSORBERS is supplied standard. Other options can be selected depending on the speed [m/sec] and the maximum work force [J/stroke] to dissipate at each stroke. Refer to the diagrams above to select the correct option.
25 32 40 50
1-144
NOTES
1-145
ACTUATORS
NOTES
1-146
ACTUATORS
NOTES
1-147
ACTUATORS
NOTES
1-148
ACTUATORS
N.B.: We always suggest to use flow microregulators. During the setup of the actuator, start with CLOSE flow microregulators, and open gradually till the achievment of the required speed.
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Bores Strokes Versions Design Position sensing Fixing Theoretic force at 6 bar Magnetic coupling force (static condition) Max speed Weight Notes bar MPa psi C F mm mm
16
20
25
N N m/s
2 to 7 0.2 to 0.7 29 to 101 -10 to 60 14 to 140 Unlubricated 50 mm filtere air. Lubrication, if used, must be continuous 16; 20; 25 from 10 to 1000 with 1 intervals Magnetic uncushioned/cushioned Swinging magnet uncushioned/cushioned Double-acting rodless cylinder, with magnetic coupling transmission system Magnet for limit switch sensor Hex nuts (supplied standard) - Legs - Flanges 118 185 288 200 300 500 0.4 0.4 0.4 See page 1-9 Lubricate the slide every 2000 km or once a year, through the lubricators
COMPONENTS 20 a SLIDE: anodized aluminium alloy b WIPER RING: polyurethane c TIE ROD: stainless steel, thick-chromed d BARREL: AISI 304 stainless steel e HEAD: anodized aluminium alloy f CUSHIONING GASKET: NBR g NEEDLE: OT 58 with needle-out movement safety system, even when fully open h HEAD NUT: OT 58 nickel-plated i HALF-PISTON: aluminium alloy j PISTON GASKET: polyurethane k BUFFER: NBR l INT/EXT MAGNETS: neodymium m INT/EXT GUIDES: thermoplastic resin with lubricating additive n GREASE NIPPLE: steel o Static O-rings: NBR
1-149
The magnetic-slide rodless cylinder operates pneumatically and is equipped with a piston and a slide with magnets. The slide runs freely along the liner, following the piston movements, thanks to the magnetic coupling force between the two. If an axial force exceeding the magnetic coupling force is applied to the slide, it disengages. It is therefore important to operate within the pressure, force and speed ranges shown in the catalogue. The load is fixe onto the slide using four threaded holes. The cylinder is secured at the ends by means of nuts, flange and brackets. This solution is recommended when there is limited space for assembly, there must be no air leaks or impurities must be prevented from entering. Available with three bores 16-20-25, in the basic or swinging versions, with adjustable pneumatic cushioning or non-adjustable cushioning. Designed for use with magnetic sensors.
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
DIMENSIONS
+ = ADD STROKE MAGNETIC SENSOR SLOT DIMENSIONS
a Grease nipple b External cursor, 360 adjustment c Sensor magnet d Position for magnetic sensors (N.B. customer must provide supports)
16 20 25
A 35 42 50
C M5 G1/8 G1/8
I 26 32 36
L3 12 16 16
L4 10 15.5 17.1
L5 28 25 28
L6 62.5 67.5 75
L7 22 17 19
L8 6 8 9
CH 24 32 32
H 8 7 7
X 14 17.5 21.5
Y 9 9 9
1-150
KEY TO CODES
CYL 27 TYPE 27 Rodless cylinder A VERSION A Magnetic sliding DEM B Magnetic sliding DEMA C Magnetic sliding swinging DEM D Magnetic sliding swinging DEMA 0 0 Magnetic 1 6 BORE 16 20 25 0050 STROKE For the maximum suppliable strokes, look at the technical data X MATERIAL X Stainless steel tie rod P GASKETS P Polyurethane
NOTES
1-151
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
+ = ADD STROKE
16 20 25
D 16 22 22
A 42 54 54
B 20 25 25
C 14 17 17
H 0.3 27 30 30
R 13 20 20
I Js 32 40 40
S 4 5 5
ACCESSORIES FOR RODLESS CYLINDER WITH MAGNETIC SLIDING SERIES MAGNETIC SLIDE
FLANGIA MOD. C
+ = ADD STROKE Code W0950120002 W0950200002 W0950200002 16 20 25 D 16 22 22 FB H13 5.5 6.5 6.5 TF Js14 40 50 50 UF 52 66 66 UR 30 40 40 L 189 195 216 S 4 5 5 Weight [g] 26 52 52
The swinging version kit can be used to avoid bending moments and lateral loads on the slide. It can also be used to compensate for misalignments with respect to the load guide. Max alignment error 1mm.
* For use when standard sensors do not detect the magnet, e.g. near metal masses. For technical data see page 1-288. Note: Individually packed.
1-152
ISO 6432 stainless steel micro-cylinders are available in various versions with a wide range of accessories with or without magnet execution double-acting - single or through-rod gaskets: Polyurethane or FKM/FPM (for high temperatures) fixin accessories
TECHNICAL DATA
Max operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Bores Design Standard strokes Versions Magnet for sensors Notes
POLYURETHANE
FKM/FPM
bar 10 MPa 1 C 10 to +80 10 to +150 (non-magnetic cylinders) Unlubricated air. Lubrication, if used, must be continuous mm 16; 20; 25 Chamfered heads mm max 500 Double-acting, Double-acting through-rod All versions come complete with magnet. Supplied without magnet on request. Maximum recommended strokes. Higher values can create operating problems
COMPONENTS a PISTON ROD: AISI 316 steel b HEAD: AISI 304 steel c PISTON ROD GASKET: polyurethane or FKM/FPM d GUIDE BUSHING: sintered bronze e BARREL: AISI 304 steel f PISTON: brass g PISTON GASKET: polyurethane or FKM/FPM h MAGNET: plastoferrite i Static O-rings: NBR or FKM/FPM
1-153
ACTUATORS
DIMENSIONS OF DOUBLE-ACTING
ACTUATORS
STAINLESS STEEL ISO 6432 MINI-CYLINDER
+ = ADD STROKE
16 20 25
AM 16 20 22
CD H9 6 8 8
CH 5 7 9
D 19 27 30
D1 6 8 10
EE M5 G 1/8 G 1/8
EW d13 12 16 16
G 5 8 8
KK M6 M8 M10x1.25
L 9 12 12
L2 11 16 14
L3 18 20 22
L5 55 67 68
MR 16 18 21
NB 18 25.5 28.5
WF 22 24 28
XC 82 95 104
16 20 25
AM 16 20 22
CH 5 7 9
D 19 27 30
D1 6 8 10
EE M5 G 1/8 G 1/8
G 5 8 8
KK M6 M8 M10x1.25
L3 18 20 22
L5 55 67 68
NB 18 25.5 28.5
WF 1,2 22 24 28
KEY TO CODES
W 1 8 Stainless steel cylinder 0 1 0 TYPE DEM DEM through-rod 0 S V 0 VERSION Standard (magnetic) Non-magnetic FKM/FPM gasket 1 6 DIAMETER 16 20 25 0 0 2 0 STROKE 0 to 500 mm
DEM: Magnetic double-acting (non-cushioned) Maximum recommended strokes. Higher values can create operating problems
1-154
1-155
ACTUATORS
16 20 25
AU 14 17 17
AO 6 8 8
NH 20 25 25
XS 1.4 22 36 40
R 13 20 20
S 4 5 5
TR 32 40 40
US 42 54 54
Weight [g] 42 90 90
ACTUATORS
16 20 25
CH 10 13 17
F M6 M8 M10x1.25
H 4 5 6
Weight [g] 1 3 7
* For use when standard sensors do not detect the magnet, e.g. near metal masses. For technical data see page 1-288 Note: Individually packed
SENSOR CIRCLIP
Code W0950001103 Bore 8 to 63 Description Sensor circlip
Note: Individually packed MATERIAL Circlip: stainless steel Sensor holder: plastic
1-156
Stainless steel clean profil cylinders available in different versions: with or without magnet execution double-acting - single or through-rod gaskets: Polyurethane or FKM/FPM (for high temperatures)
TECHNICAL DATA
Max operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Bores Design Versions Magnet for sensors Standard strokes Notes bar MPa psi C mm
POLYURETHANE 10 1 145
FKM/FPM
mm
10 to +80 10 to +150 (non-magnetic cylinders) Unlubricated air. Lubrication, if used, must be continuous 32; 40; 50; 63 Chamfered heads Double-acting, Double-acting through-rod All versions come complete with magnet. Supplied without magnet on request. max 500 Maximum recommended strokes. Higher values can create operating problems
COMPONENTS a PISTON ROD: AISI 316 steel b PISTON ROD GASKET: polyurethane or FKM/FPM c GUIDE BUSHING: sintered bronze d BARREL: AISI 304 steel e PISTON: aluminium f MAGNET: plastoferrite g PISTON GASKET: polyurethane or FKM/FPM h i HEAD:AISI 304 steel j BUFFER: polyurethane k GUIDE RING: PTFE
1-157
ACTUATORS
DIMENSIONS OF DOUBLE-ACTING
ACTUATORS
STAINLESS STEEL ROUND CYLINDERS RNDC
+ = ADD STROKE
32 40 50 63
A 36.5 44 55 67.5
CH1 10 13 17 17
F 20 24 32 32
G 30 38 45 45
N 14 16 18 18
P 38 46 57 70
R 78 89 96 98
S 12 16 20 20
T 47 57 62 63
V 30 35 38 38
W 38 45 50 50
CHIAVE DI CODIFICA
W 1 8 Stainless steel cylinder 0 1 0 TYPE DEM DEM through-rod 0 S V 0 VERSION Standard (magnetic) Non-magnetic FKM/FPM gasket 3 2 DIAMETER 32 40 50 63 0 0 3 2 STROKE 32 to 63 stroke 0 to 500 mm
DEM: Magnetic double-acting (non-cushioned) Maximum recommended strokes. Higher values can create operating problems
1-158
1-159
ACTUATORS
32 40 50 63
B 48 60 64 64
C 7 10 10 10
D 4 5 6 6
E 14 20 20 20
F 52 60 70 76
G 7 9 9 9
H 14 18 20 20
I 28 30 40 50
M 66 80 90 96
N 49 58 70 80
O 28 33 40 45
ACTUATORS
32 40 50 63
CH 17 19 24 24
H 6 7 8 8
Weight [g] 6 12 20 20
* For use when standard sensors do not detect the magnet, e.g. near metal masses. For technical data see page 1-288 Note: Individually packed
SENSOR CIRCLIP
Code W0950001103 Bore 8 to 63 Description Sensor circlip
Note: Individually packed MATERIAL Circlip: stainless steel Sensor holder: plastic
1-160
Stainless steel cylinders made to ISO 15552 available in various versions and with a wide range of accessories: with or without magnet execution double-acting single- or through-rod gaskets: Polyurethane or FKM/FPM (for high temperatures) fixin accessories, guide units and mechanical piston rod lock
TECHNICAL DATA
Max operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Bores Design Standard strokes Versions Magnet for sensors Notes bar MPa psi C mm mm
POLYURETHANE 10 1 145
FKM/FPM
10 to +80 10 to +150 Unlubricated air. Lubrication, if used, must be continuous 32; 40; 50; 63; 80; 100 Heads with tie rods max 1000 Double-acting cushioned, Double-acting through-rod cushioned All versions come complete with magnet. Supplied without magnet on request Maximum recommended strokes. Higher values can create operating problems
COMPONENTS a PISTON ROD: AISI 316 steel b HEAD: AISI 304 steel c PISTON ROD GASKET: polyurethane or FKM/FPM d GUIDE BUSHING: sintered bronze e BARREL: AISI 304 steel f ENBLOC GASKET: NBR or FKM/FPM g MAGNET: plastoferrite h Static O-rings: NBR or FKM/FPM i CUSHIONING GASKET: polyurethane or FKM/FPM j CUSHIONING NEEDLE: AISI 304 steel k TIE ROD: AISI 316 steel l NEEDLE-RETAINING RING: technopolymer
1-161
ACTUATORS
DIMENSIONS OF DOUBLE-ACTING
ACTUATORS
STAINLESS STEEL ISO 15552 CYLINDERS
+ = ADD STROKE
32 40 50 63 80 100
A 14 14 14 16 16 18
A1 9 9 9 9 9 9
B 30 35 40 45 45 55
C 26 30 37 37 46 51
C1 18 22 25.5 25 35 38
CH 10 13 16 16 21 21
CH1 6 6 8 8 10 10
D1 12 16 20 20 25 25
E1 4 4 4 4 4 4
F 22 24 32 32 40 40
G1 M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M10
H 50 55 65 75 95 110
L1 67 77 78 89 96 102
KEY TO CODES
W 1 8 Stainless steel cylinder 4 5 4 TYPE DEMA DEMA through-rod 0 S V 0 VERSION Standard (magnetic) Non-magnetic FKM/FPM gasket 3 2 DIAMETER 32 40 50 63 80 A1=100 0 0 3 2 STROKE 0 to 1000 mm
DEMA: Magnetic double-acting (cushioned) Maximum recommended strokes. Higher values can create operating problems For this version the cylinder will be not magnetic
1-162
1-163
ACTUATORS
32 40 50 63 80 100
N1 50 63 75 90 110 132
N2 12 16 16 20 20 25
N3 12 16 16 20 20 25
N4 22 28 32 35 40 45
ACTUATORS
32 40 50 63 80 100
D 26 28 32 40 50 60
E 22 25 27 32 36 41
F 10 12 12 16 16 20
G 10 12 12 16 16 20
H 9 9 11 11 14 14
1-164
* For use when standard sensors do not detect the magnet, e.g. near metal masses. For technical data see page 1-288 Note: Individually packed
SENSOR BRACKET
Code W0950001100 Bore 32 to 100 Description Sensor bracket
Note: Individually packed MATERIAL Bracket: zinc-plated aluminium Sensor holder: zinc-plated aluminium Fixing screw: zinc-plated aluminium
1-165
ACTUATORS
32 40 50 63 80 100
H 6 7 8 8 9 9
CH 17 19 24 24 30 30
Weight [g] 6 12 20 20 32 32
NOTES
1-166
ACTUATORS
GRIPPERS SUMMARY
PAGE 1-168
PAGE 1-172
PAGE 1-174
PAGE 1-176
PAGE 1-179
PAGE 1-181
PAGE 1-183
PAGE 1-185
1-167
GRIPPERS SUMMARY
ACTUATORS
NOMENCLATURE
ACTUATORS
a b c d e
f g h i
Pneumatic gripper Jaws Clamping finge Sensor slot F = clamping force of one jaw only If a gripper has three jaws, with F = 25 N, so the total clamping force is 25 x 3 = 75 N Load L = distance between the barycentre of the load and the reference surface C = stroke of a single jaw Fa = maximum axial force applied to the grippers
FIG. 1.1
TYPES Parallel gripper: the jaws move in a straight line. There may be two, three or even four jaws.
Hinged gripper: the jaws are hinged and move along the arc of a circle. It is generally cheaper than a parallel gripper but there are some limitations (see fig. 1.5) If the part has varying dimensions, the contact area changes (see fig. 1.6 If the part is cylindrical with varying dimensions, the position of the axis of the clamped part varies (see fig. 1.7 Gripper with retracting jaws: the jaws have an opening angle of about 90. The clamping fingers can retract fully from the work top, and so, in ce tain cases, it is possible to avoid one linear retraction motion (see fig. 1.5)
Toggle gripper: a hinged gripper with a toggle-action mechanism to achieve high clamping forces. Clamping is irreversible even when there is no pressure, so the part cannot be released accidentally. The opening angle is 90 so it acts as retracting gripper. The clamping force is high within a limited angle only.
Number of jaws: two-jaw grippers are used for prism-shaped parts or cylindrical ones with a single diameter. Three-jaw grippers can be used for cylindrical parts with different diameters.
1-168
CLAMPING FINGERS The clamping fingers must be as light and sho t as possible to keep inertia to a minimum. The longer the clamping fingers, the less force is available (see fig. 1.2 Wider fingers are only heavie , they do not increase friction (see fig. 1.3) FIG. 1.2 FIG. 1.3
NO
EXAMPLE OF CLAMPING FINGERS FIG. 1.4
OK
FIG. 1.7
1-169
ACTUATORS
CALCULATIONS
ACTUATORS
GENERAL TECHNICAL DATA GRIPPERS
First of all, determine the necessary clamping force. Then decide which type of gripper can ensure this force with required pressure and clamping distance. To help designers calculate the clamping force, we propose two levels of calculation.
APPROXIMATION METHOD Clamping force of each jaw [N] $ 200 x weight of part [kg] / number of jaws.
Data M n F Mass of part Number of jaws Clamping force of each jaw Unit of measurement kg N Formula Example 1.2 3 $ 200 x 1.2/3 = 80
$ 200 x M/n
1-170
Fx Fy Fz
N N N N N N
Clamping force
NOTES
1-171
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
GRIPPER WITH 2 PARALLEL JAWS SERIES P1
Dual-acting parallel gripper for internal and external clamping. Anodized aluminium alloy body and tempered steel jaws. Bottom or side fixing. All sizes come with magnets and sensor slots.
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure bar MPa psi C
P1-20
P1-32
Temperature range Fluid Bores Clamping force at 6.3 bar 20 mm from the top surface during opening and closing Single jaw stroke Weight
mm N mm Kg
2 to 8 0.2 to 0.8 29 to 116 5 to 70 20 m filtere , lubricated or unlubricated air; lubrification if used, it must be continuou 20 32 70 170 5 0.50 5 0.70
1-172
F (N)
140
L [mm]
F (N)
280 240 200 6.3 bar 160 120 4 bar 8 bar
L [mm]
ACCESSORIES
RETRACTABLE SENSOR WITH INSERTION FROM ABOVE
Code W0952025390 W0952029394 W0952022180 W0952028184 W0952125556 W0952025500* W0952029504* W0952022500* W0952128184* Description HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2.5 m HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 300 mm M8 REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2.5 m REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 300 mm M8 HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2 m ATEX HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 2.5 m HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 300 mm M8 REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 2.5 m REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 300 mm M8
* For use when standard sensors do not detect the magnet, e.g. near metal masses. For technical data see page 1-288
1-173
120
ACTUATORS
Code W1550200001
ACTUATORS
GRIPPERS WITH 2 PARALLEL ROLLER-RECIRCULATION JAWS SERIES P2
Double-acting system with clamping in both directions. All the grippers come with magnet and sensor slots.
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure bar MPa psi C cycles/s
P2 -16
P2-20
P2- 25
Operating temperature Maximum operating frequency Fluid Size Bore Single jaw stroke Clamping force at 6.3 bar 20 mm from the top surface during opening and closing Weight
mm mm N Kg
2 to 8 0.2 to 0.8 29 to 116 -10 to +80 2 20 m filtered, lubricated or unlubricated air; lubrification if used, it must be continuou 16 20 25 16 20 25 4 5 7 45 100 135 0.12 0.24 0.45
1-174
F (N)
100 8 bar 80 60 40 20 0 6.3 bar 4 bar 2 bar
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
L [mm]
F (N)
160 140 8 bar
L [mm]
F (N)
280 240 200 160 120 80 40 0 0 6.3 bar 4 bar 2 bar 8 bar
10
20 30
40
50 60 70
80
90 100 110
L [mm]
ACCESSORIES
SENSOR
Code W0950044180 W0950045390* Description Sensor REED 2 wires 24 VDC 1 m Sensor HALL 3 wires 24 VDC 2 m
1-175
ACTUATORS
Code W1570160200
ACTUATORS
GRIPPERS WITH 2 PARALLEL LONG-STROKE JAWS SERIES P4
These are grippers with 2 parallel long-stroke jaws. The mechanical design makes them suitable for clamping bulky parts. All grippers, except for the smallest ones, can mount a retracting magnetic proximity sensor.
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure bar MPa psi C cycles/s mm mm N kg
P4-10
P4-12
P4-16
P4-25
P4-30
Operating temperature Maximum operating frequency Fluid Bore Single jaw stroke Clamping force at 6.3 bar 20 mm from the top surface during opening and closing Weight
3 to 7 0.3 to 0.7 43 to 101 -10 to +80 1 20 m filtered, lubricated or unlubricated air; lubrification if used, it must be continuo 2 x 10 2 x 12 2 x 16 2 x 30 2 x 30 5 10 15 30 60 30 45 75 280 280 0.18 0.3 0.5 2.95 3.7
1-176
F (N)
50 40 30 20 10 0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
L [mm]
F (N)
60 50 40 30 20 10 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 3 bar 8 bar 6.3 bar 4 bar
L [mm]
F (N)
140 120 100 80 60 40 20 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 8 bar 6.3 bar 4 bar 3 bar
L [mm]
1-177
8 bar
ACTUATORS
Code W1580100200
ACTUATORS
Code W1580250200
F (N)
8 bar 6.3 bar
4 bar 3 bar
10
20 30
40
50 60 70
L [mm]
80
F (N)
8 bar 6.3 bar
4 bar 3 bar
10
20 30
40
50 60 70
L [mm]
80
ACCESSORIES
SENSOR FOR P4 10
Code W0950044180 W0950045390* Description Sensor REED 2 wires 24 VDC 1 m Sensor HALL 3 wires 24 VDC 2 m
1-178
Hinged grippers with 30 opening angle. Bores 16, 20, 32 and 50 mm. All grippers are magnetic with slots in the body with retracting sensors.
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure bar MPa psi C N kg
P7-16
P7-20
P7-32
P7-50
Fluid Temperature range Clamping force at 6.3 bar 20 mm from the centre of rotation of the jaws, during opening and closing Weight
2 to 10 2 to 10 2 to 10 2 to 10 0.2 to 1 0.2 to 1 0.2 to 1 0.2 to 1 29 to 145 29 to 145 29 to 145 29 to 145 20 m filtered, lubricated or unlubricated air; lubrification if used, it must be continuou -10 to +80 27 50 120 380 0.12 0.19 0.5 1.6
F (N)
50 40 30 20 10 0 8 bar 6.3 bar 4 bar 2 bar
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
L [mm]
1-179
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
Code W1590200200
F (N)
60 50 40 30 8 bar 6.3 bar 4 bar
20 10 0 0
2 bar
10
20
30
40
L [mm]
50
60
70
80
90
10
20 30
40
50
60 70
80
90 100 110
L [mm]
4 bar
2 bar
10
20 30
40
50 60 70
L [mm]
80
ACCESSORIES
RETRACTABLE SENSOR WITH INSERTION FROM ABOVE
Code Description W0952025390 HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2.5 m W0952029394 HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 300 mm M8 W0952022180 REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2.5 m W0952028184 REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 300 mm M8 W0952125556 HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2 m ATEX W0952025500* HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 2.5 m W0952029504* HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 300 mm M8 W0952022500* REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 2.5 m W0952128184* REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 300 mm M8 * For use when standard sensors do not detect the magnet, e.g. near metal masses. * For technical data see page 1-288
1-180
Single-acting hinged grippers, normally open, made entirely of technopolymer. Three sizes with clamping force 25-80 N at 6 bar. This solution makes the entire system lighter. This gripper is corrosion-resistant and antimagnetic. It comes complete with spring-loaded bracket for pre-loading the piece (force 1.5-6 N) and sensor holders.
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure bar MPa bar C
P8-32
P8-40
P8-50
Operating temperature Fluid Life Jaw opening angle Clamping force per jaw at 6 bar Applicable weight (recommended) Air consumption per cycle Opening time Closing time Weight of grippers Moment of inertia Repeatability
4 to 7 0.4 to 0.7 58 to 101 -10 to +60 20 m filtered, lubricated or unlubricated air; lubrification if used, it must be continuo Over 2 million cycles 8 22.5 48 80 0.2 0.4 0.8 0.5 1 1.8 0.04 0.05 0.05 0.06 0.08 0.08 36 45 60 0.04 0.12 0.15 0.1 0.1 0.1
TABLE OF MOMENTS
Gripper P8 - 32 P8 - 40 P8 - 50 FA (N) 3 5 8 Mx (Ncm) 9 23 49 My (Ncm) 10 20 30 Mz (Ncm) 10 20 40 P (N) 22.5 47.5 80
1-181
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
Code W0710010002
ACCESSORIES
INDUCTION SENSOR
Code W0950037391 Description Induction sensor 4 mm PNP-NO-2 m
1-182
Toggle-type pivoted grippers, with adjustable opening angle. High clamping forces. Body made of hard anodized aluminium, jaws and moving parts made of tempered steel. Bottom or side fixing All sizes come with magnets and sensor slots.
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure bar MPa psi C
P9-32
P9-40
Temperature range Fluid Bores Jaw opening angle Clamping force at 6.3 bar 40 mm from the jaw pivot during opening and closing Weight
2 to 8 0.2 to 0.8 29 to 116 -10 to +80 Filtered, lubricated or unlubricated air; lubrification if used, it must be continuous 32 Adjustable 180 160 0.85 40 260 1.5
mm N Kg
1-183
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
Code W1530320180
F (N)
280
20 30
40
50 60 70
80
90 100 110
L [mm]
F (N)
360 320 280 240 200 160 120 80 40 0 0 10 2 bar 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 8 bar 6.3 bar
4 bar
L [mm]
ACCESSORIES
RETRACTABLE SENSOR WITH INSERTION FROM ABOVE
Code W0952025390 W0952029394 W0952022180 W0952028184 W0952125556 W0952025500* W0952029504* W0952022500* W0952128184* Description HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2.5 m HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 300 mm M8 REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2.5 m REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 300 mm M8 HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2 m ATEX HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 2.5 m HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 300 mm M8 REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 2.5 m REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 300 mm M8
* For use when standard sensors do not detect the magnet, e.g. near metal masses. * For technical data see page 1-288
1-184
Double-acting grippers with three self-centring jaws, internal and external clamping. The body contains slots for mounting retracting magnetic sensors.
TECHNICAL DATA
Min./max. operating pressure bar MPa psi C
P11-16
P11-20
P11-25
P11-60
Temperature range Fluid Bore mm Single jaw stroke mm Clamping force at 6.3 bar 22 mm from the top surface, during opening and closing N Weight kg Maximum operating frequency cycles/s
2 to 7 0.2 to 0.7 29 to 101 -10 to +80 20 m filtered, lubricated or unlubricated air; lubrification if used, it must be continuou 16 20 25 60 3 4 5 12.5 38 62 110 900 0.12 0.21 0.3 2.7 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.2
F (N)
60 50 40 30 20 10 0 0 10 20 30 40 3 bar 50 60 8 bar 6.3 bar 4 bar 70 80 90
L [mm]
1-185
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
Code W1570200300
F (N)
140 120 100 80
70
L [mm]
F (N)
280 240 200 160 120 80 40 0 2 bar 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 8 bar 6.3 bar 4 bar 80 90 100 110
L [mm]
F (N)
1200 1050 900 750 600 450 300 150 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 4 bar 2 bar 6.3 bar 8 bar
L [mm]
ACCESSORIES
SENSOR FOR P11 16-60
Code W0950044180 W0950045390* Description Sensor REED 2 wires 24 VDC 1 m Sensor HALL 3 wires 24 VDC 2 m
1-186
PAGE 1-188
PAGE 1-189
PAGE 1-192
PAGE 1-195
PAGE 1-200
1-187
ACTUATORS
DEVICES
CALCULATIONS The following needs to be calculated: Absorbed kinetic energy Axial forces on the shaft or rotating flang Radial force on the shaft or rotating flang Overturning moment Then compare each of the 4 sizes with the admissible ones shown in the catalogue for each rotary actuator. Remember that the application of optional hydraulic decelerator, where envisaged, doubles the kinetic energy that can be absorbed by the actuator.
ACTUATORS
GENERAL TECHNICAL DATA ROTARY ACTUATORS
The use of hydraulic decelerators means it is possible to increase absorbed power. Some models in the catalogue have built-in decelerators. For those without, the user can mount decelerators outside the actuator. With horizontal axis rotation, if the masses are distributed asymmetrically it may be difficult to keep a constant rotation speed using flow regulators on . In this case it is advisable to use a decelerator.
SIZING
HOW TO CALCULATE KINETIC ENERGY
Denomination Unit of measurement Formula Example
a
t Jta E Fr Fa M
Angle of rotation Rotation time Moment of inertia of rotating masses N.B.: added those of the individual masses Kinetic energy Radial force (Remember to take into account centrifugal forces) Axial force Overturning moment
rad s Kg m2 Nm N N Nm
p = 90 = _____ rad. 2 2
_ +
_ +
50 10
= M + Fr . a + Fa . b
= 50 x 0.1 + 10 x 0 = 5
M d J
M R J
Mass Distance between barycenter and rotation axis Moment of inertia of the mass
M L J
Kg m Kg m2 L = M ____ 12
2
1-188
Rack-type rotary cylinders in various configurations Configuration with standard magne Version with male pinion or female hole Mechanical stroke adjustment Special configurations on reques The central body has ISO bore holes for wall fixing using ISO pin and/or flange fitting N.B.: We always suggest to use flow microregulators. During the setup of the actuator, start with CLOSE flow microregulators, and open gradually till the achievment of the required speed.
TECHNICAL DATA
Gaskets Operating pressure bar MPa psi C
32
40
50
63
80
100
Temperature range Fluid Bores Rotation angle Type of construction Configuratio Axial load Max. moment (6 bar - 0.6 Mpa)
mm
N Nm
2500 4.5
NBR 10 1 145 10 to + 80 Filtered lubricated or unlubricated air. Lubrication, if used, must be continuous. 32 ; 40 ; 50 ; 63 ; 80 ; 100 90; 180; 270; 360 Extruded profil Magnetic standard cushioned 2800 4500 5600 8500 12.5 16 32 70
12200 120
N.B. The product is supplied with negative end-of-stroke piston (in the proximity of head A). The first cycle involves movement of the piston (towards head B) with consequent anti-clockwise rotation of the pinion ACTUAL ROTATION ANGLE Cylinders without regulation of the rotation angle: the manufactural tolerance is + 4/0 compared to the nominal value Cylinders with regulation of the rotation angle: the possible regulation ranges from + 2/- 20.
COMPONENTS a BARREL: profiled anodised aluminium allo b HEAD: die cast aluminium c CUSHIONING NEEDLE: OT 58 with needle out movement safety system even when fully open d BUFFER + Static O-rings: NBR or FKM/FPM e PISTON: aluminium f PISTON GASKET: NBR g MAGNET: plastoferrite h RACK: AISI 304 i PIGNON MALE/FEMALE: nitrided alloy steel j BALL BEARING k CENTRAL BODY: anodised aluminium l RACK GUIDE BUSH: self-lubricating sintered bronze m REGULATION SCREW: AISI 303
1-189
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
WITHOUT ADJUSTMENT
WITH ADJUSTMENT
WITHOUT ADJUSTMENT
WITH ADJUSTMENT
Note: with the key slot in the position specified, the piston is in contact with head A L0 1 fot ROTATION ANGLE 90 180 270 360 218.7 261.1 303,5 345.9 241.4 288.6 335,6 382.8 265.9 322.4 379,0 435.5 295.1 358.0 420,8 483.6 358.3 443.1 528,0 612.8 399.8 500.4 600,9 701.4
32 40 50 63 80 100
A 10 10 10 10 12 12
B 30 35 40 45 45 55
CM g7 14 16 19 24 28 38
CF g7 10 12 14 16 25 30
CH1 22 22 27 27 36 36
EF D10 3 4 5 5 8 8
EM H9 5 5 6 8 8 10
F 30 30 32 38 48 60
G 30 30 45 52 70 80
H 14 14 16 17 20 25
I 50 60 65 73 100 120
32 40 50 63 80 100
J2 2 -
K 16 20 25 25 33 38
M 47 52.5 63 75 95 108
O 47 54.5 64 75 95 110
P 6 6 6 6 10 10
PL 10 12 14 16 18 20
Q 4 4 6 6 7 7
R 30 35 40 45 50 60
RT M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M10
S 9 7 10 11 12.5 15
TM 4 5 6 8 10 14
V 68 74 85 95 125 150
V1 44.5 45 51 56 76 90.5
V2 19 22 25 27.5 39 45.5
VA 4 4 4 4 4 4
Y 20 25 25 30 35 45
ZM 15 17 20 25 35 45
ZF 15 17 20 25 35 45
1-190
KEY TO CODES
W165 TYPE cylinder with male pinion cylinder with female pinion 050 BORES 032 040 050 063 080 100 1 VERSION cylinder without adjustment of rotation angle cylinder with adjustment of rotation angle 090 ANGLE OF ROTATION 090 180 270 360
W165 W166
1 2
Code W0952025390 W0952029394 W0952022180 W0952028184 W0952125556 W0952025500* W0952029504* W0952022500* W0952128184*
Description HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2.5 m HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 300 mm M8 REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2.5 m REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 300 mm M8 HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2 m ATEX HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 2.5 m HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 300 mm M8 REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 2.5 m REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 300 mm M8
Code Description W0950000201 REED sensor DSM2-C525 HS W0950000222 E.HALL PNP sensor DSM3-N225 W0950000232 E. HALL NPN sensor DSM3-M225 For technical data see pag. 1-286
* For use when standard sensors do not detect the magnet, e.g. near metal masses. For technical data see pag. 1-288
50 to 63
Code W0950001001
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM a ISO 15552 cylinder with barrel Serie STD or Serie 3 b Sensor bracket mod. DST ( 32 to 100) c Adaptor d Retractable sensor with insertion from above
Code W0950000712
80 to 100
Code W0950000713
1-191
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
ROTARY ACTUATORS SERIES R2
Actuator with double rack and play take-up. Four sizes 12, 16, 20 and 25. Two angles of rotation 90 and 180. Stroke adjustment system for all sizes. Pneumatic cushioning for all sizes except the smallest. There are slots in the body to house a magnetic proximity sensor. Air supply, stroke adjustment and cushioning adjustment are all on the same side. N.B.: We always suggest to use flow microregulators. During the setup of the actuator, start with CLOSE flow microregulators, and open gradually till the achievment of the required speed.
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure bar MPa psi C degrees
R2-12
R2-16
R2-20
R2-25
Temperature range Angle adjustment Fluid Versions Ports Sizes Theoretical torque (DP= pressure in bar) Max. axial load Max. radial load Weight with 90 rotation Weight with 180 rotation Rotation time without load: 90 angle 180 angle
mm Nm N N Kg Kg s s
1.5 to 7 0.15 to 0.7 22 to 101 -10 to +80 35 (about +10 -25) 20 m filtered, lubricated or unlubricated air; lubrification if used, it must be continuo 90/180 rotation Both at the front 12 16 20 25 0.065 x P 0.14 x P 0.25 x P 0.48 x P 8 14 40 80 8 14 40 80 0.18 0.26 0.63 0.8 0.21 0.31 0.72 1 0.2 0.3 0.2 0.3 0.2 0.3 0.2 0.3
COMPONENTS a b c d e f g h i j k l m n ROTARY SHAFT / PINION: hardened and tempered steel BALL BEARING FLANGE: anodised aluminium PISTON / RACK: hardened and tempered steel PISTON GASKET: NBR GUIDE SHOE: PTFE MAGNET: neodymium CUSHIONING GASKET: NBR CUSHIONING PIN: zinc-plated steel HEAD: anodised aluminium PNEUMATIC CONNECTION / STROKE ADJUSTMENT: steel BARREL: anodised aluminium BASE: anodised aluminium SEAL: NBR
1-192
1-193
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
ACCESSORIES
MAGNETIC SENSOR 4
Code W0950044180 W0950045390* Description Sensor REED 2 wires 24 VDC 1 m Sensor HALL 3 wires 24 VDC 2 m
NOTES
1-194
Actuator with double rack and play take-up. Angle of rotation adjustable from 0 to 180. The R3 rotary actuator can come with a mechanical stop or hydraulic end-of-stroke cushioning. There is a version with flange and one with shaft (for 16-20-25-30) There are slots in the body for retracting magnetic proximity sensors, two on each side. There is hole in the flange for air pipes or wires N.B.: We always suggest to use flow microregulators. During the setup of the actuator, start with CLOSE flow microregulators, and open gradually till the achievment of the required speed.
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure bar MPa psi C degrees
R3-16
R3-20
R3-22
R3-25
R3-30
R3-40
Temperature range Angle adjustment Fluid Versions Sizes Bores Theoretical torque at 6 bar Max. axial load Max. radial load Weight Rotation time without load
mm Nm N N Kg s
3 to 7 0.3 to 0.7 43.5 to 101 -10 to +80 0 to 180 20 m filtered, lubricated or unlubricated air; lubrification if used, it must be continuo With mechanical stop / hydraulic decelerator 16 20 22 25 30 40 2 x 16 2 x 20 2 x 22 2 x 25 2 x 30 2 x 40 0.9 1.8 2.7 4.6 9.3 22 74 135 195 300 340 360 78 137 360 450 490 560 0.53 0.99 1.29 2.08 3.9 6.7 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.3
Admissible kinetic energy WITH MECANICAL STOP (with flange W1630__2180 and with shaft W1630__5180 WITH HYDRAULIC DECELERATOR (with flange W1630__2180 and with shaft W1630__5180
Joule 0.007 0.025 0.049 0.082 0.29 0.090 1.10 0.150 1.60
COMPONENTS a b c d e f g h i j ROTARY FLANGE: anodised aluminium PINION: hardened and tempered steel BALL BEARING PISTON / RACK: hardened and tempered steel CUSHIONING GASKET: NBR GUIDE SHOE: PTFE MAGNET: neodymium HEAD: anodised aluminium BARREL: anodised aluminium SEAL: NBR
VERSIONS: A Stroke adjustment B Stroke adjustment with inside hydraulic shock absorbers (available from 25)
1-195
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
Description Rotary actuator with flange R3-1 Rotary actuator with shaft R3-16
1-196
1-197
ACTUATORS
Code W1630222180
ACTUATORS
Description Rotary actuator with flange R3-3 Rotary actuator with flange + shock absorbers R3-3 Rotary actuator with shaft R3-30 Rotary actuator with shaft + shock absorbers R3-30
1-198
ACCESSORIES
RETRACTABLE SENSOR WITH INSERTION FROM ABOVE
Code W0952025390 W0952029394 W0952022180 W0952028184 W0952125556 W0952025500* W0952029504* W0952022500* W0952128184* Description HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2.5 m HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 300 mm M8 REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2.5 m REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 300 mm M8 HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2 m ATEX HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 2.5 m HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 300 mm M8 REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 2.5 m REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 300 mm M8
* For use when standard sensors do not detect the magnet, e.g. near metal masses. For technical data see page 1-288
SPARE PARTS
SHOCK ABSORBERS
Code 0950004011 0950004008 0950004005 25 30 40 Description Shock absorbers SPM25 MC3 short M14x1.5 Shock absorbers PM25 MC3 M14x1.5 Shock absorbers PR050 MC2 + nut M20x1.5
NOTES
1-199
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
ROTARY ACTUATORS SERIES R3 WITH EXTERNAL SHOCK ABSORBERS
Dual-rack actuator with automatic adjustment for wear. Hydraulic shock absorbers are arranged externally and operate at a distance from the axis of rotation which is considerably higher than for internal ones. This means that the absorbable kinetic energy is 4 to 8 times higher. It is reduced in length as there are no adjusting screws. A 90 and a 180 versions are available. Grooves are provided in the body to fix retractable magnetic proximity sensors, two on each side. A hole has been drilled in the flange for the passage of air pipes or power cables. N.B.: We always suggest to use flow microregulators. During the setup of the actuator, start with CLOSE flow microregulators, and open gradually till the achievment of the required speed.
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure bar MPa psi C degrees mm mm Nm N N Nm J s
R3-16
R3-20
R3-22
R3-25
R3-30
R3-40
Temperature range Angle adjustment Fluid Sizes Bore Theoretical torque at 6 bar Max. axial load Max. radial load Max overturning moment Admissible kinetic energy Rotation time without load
3 to 7 0.3 to 0.7 43.5 to 101 -10 to +80 90 o 180 3 20 m filtered, lubricated or unlubricated air; lubrification if used, it must be continuo 16 20 22 25 30 40 2 x 16 2 x 20 2 x 22 2 x 25 2 x 30 2 x 40 0.9 1.8 2.7 4.6 9.3 22 74 135 195 300 340 360 78 137 360 450 490 560 2.4 4 5.3 9.7 12 18 0.16 0.55 0.85 1.40 1.85 3.35 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.3
COMPONENTS a b c d e f g h i j k ROTARY FLANGE: anodised aluminium PINION: hardened and tempered steel BALL BEARING PISTON / RACK: hardened and tempered steel CUSHIONING GASKET: NBR GUIDE SHOE: PTFE MAGNET: neodymium HEAD: anodised aluminium BARREL: anodised aluminium STROKE REGULATOR WITH HYDRAULIC SHOCK ABSORBERS Block for 90 version
1-200
ROTATION ANGLE
1-201
ACTUATORS
90
180
ACTUATORS
Description Rotary actuator with flange + shock absorbers R3-20-90 Rotary actuator with flange + shock absorbers R3-20-180
1-202
W1630254180
1-203
ACTUATORS
Code W1630254090
Description Rotary actuator with flange + shock absorbers R3-25-90 Rotary actuator with flange + shock absorbers R3-25-180
ACTUATORS
Description Rotary actuator with flange + shock absorbers R3-40-90 Rotary actuator with flange + shock absorbers R3-40-180
ACCESSORIES
RETRACTABLE SENSOR WITH INSERTION FROM ABOVE
Code W0952025390 W0952029394 W0952022180 W0952028184 W0952125556 W0952025500* W0952029504* W0952022500* W0952128184* Description HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2.5 m HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 300 mm M8 REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2.5 m REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 300 mm M8 HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2 m ATEX HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 2.5 m HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 300 mm M8 REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 2.5 m REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 300 mm M8
* For use when standard sensors do not detect the magnet, e.g. near metal masses. For technical data see page 1-288
SPARE PARTS
SHOCK ABSORBERS
Code 0950004009 0950004010 0950004011 0950004005 16 Description Shock absorbers PMX 10 MF3 M10x1 22 Shock absorbers PM 15 MF3 M12x1 25 30 Shock absorbers SPM 25 MC-C M14x1.5 40 Shock absorbers PR50 MC2 + nut M20x1.5
1-204
SUMMARY SLIDES
PAGE 1-206
PAGE 1-207
PAGE 1-217
PAGE 1-223
PAGE 1-19
PAGE 1-42
PAGE 1-105
PAGE 1-76
PAGE 1-65
PAGE 1-49
PAGE 1-112
PAGE 1-118
ACTUATORS
TYPES
ACTUATORS
The range of guide units and slides is very extensive. Guides are grouped into families.
Guide units to couple with standard cylinders. These are separate units to which an ISO 6432 or ISO 15552 cylinder is attached. Twin pneumatic cylinder. The barrel has two calibrated holes for housing two pistons and rods side by side. There are versions with a single piston rod, through piston rod and different power supplies depending on whether you wish to fix the barrel or the flange to the ends of the piston rod.
Pneumatic single piston cylinders with supports at the end of the piston rod. The common factor in all the various configurations is that, as well the calibrated hole for the piston in the cylinder body or front head, there are other slots housing bushes or guide bearings for additional piston rods.
Rodless cylinders. In these cylinders the piston rod is integral with a carriage on the outside of the barrel, so there is no piston rod. We offer versions in which the barrel is open, with a C-shaped section, and piston and carriage linked mechanically.
Guides with pneumatic actuator. The main part of this actuators is the guiding section which determines the shape, applications, loads, maximum strokes and cost. The pneumatic part is housed in one of the bodies of the unit or it comes as a complete cylinder housed inside the guide.
LOAD CONDITIONS
Admitted loads for each guide unit are shown in the catalogue. If the load is not aligned with the moving plate, it is possible to determine the equivalent load or stroke with a good approximation.
1-206
There are two sliding systems available: on bushes on ball recirculating bearings The frame is made up of two paired cylinders with a common anodized aluminium body containing slots for retracting sensors. There are 5 bores available: 2 x 12, 2 x 16, 2 x 20, 2 x 25 and 2 x 30.
TECHNICAL DATA
Pressure range bar MPa psi C mm/s
S10-12
S10-16
S10-20
S10-25
S10-30
Temperature range Fluid Piston speed Versions Sizes Bores Piston rod diameter Strokes
mm mm mm mm mm mm
3 to 7 0.3 to 0.7 43.5 to 101 -10 to +80 10 mm dried or lubricated filtered ai . Lubrication, if used, must be continuous. 30 to 100 System with sliding bushes/System with ball bushes available with stop screw or hydraulic decelerator 12 16 20 25 30 2 x 12 2 x 16 2 x 20 2 x 25 2 x 30 6 8 10 12 16 15 15 25 25 25 25 25 50 50 50 50 50 75 75 75 75 100 100 100 125 125 0.12 + (0.002 x C) 0.24 + (0.0025 x C) 0.51 + (0.005 x C) 0.76 + (0.006 x C) 1.3 + (0.009 x C) 0.21 + (0.002 x C) 0.48 + (0.0025 x C) 0.77 + (0.005 x C) 0.18 + (0.006 x C) 1.92 + (0.009 x C) (Multiply the value shown by the pressure in bar) 2.26 x DP 4 x DP 6.28 x DP 9.8 x DP 14.1 x DP 1.69 x DP 3 x DP 4.11 x DP 7.5 x DP 10.1 x DP (The values shown refer to the min. and max. strokes) 3 to 1.5 6 to 3 10 to 3.5 12 to 5.6 20 to 7 6 to 4 11 to 6 20 to 7 26 to 8 36 to 11
Weight (C = stroke mm) Sliding version Ball bearing version Theoretical thrust Thrust force Pull force Max. loads Sliding version Ball bearing version
Kg Kg da N da N N N
COMPONENTS a b c d d e f g h i j FLANGE: anodized aluminium REAR BASE: anodized aluminium BUFFER: rubber ADJUSTABLE STRIKER PLATE. Zinc-plated steel bis. HYDRAULIC DECELERATOR FRONT BASE: brass PISTON: brass MAGNET: Plastoferrite CYLINDER BODY: anodized aluminium STATIC O-RING: NBR BALL RE-CIRCULATION BUSH
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
VIEW FROM K
+ = ADD THE STROKE ++ = ADD TWICE THE STROKE Code W1440122... W1440162... W1440202... W1440252... W1440302... 12 16 20 25 30 A 18 22 26 32 36 B 46 56 66 78 98 C 10 10 10 10 10 C1 50 62 68 74 87 C2 2 2 2 2 2 C3 60 74 82 90 105 D 4 5 6 7 8 E 20 26 29 32.5 37.5 E1 20 20 29 31.5 39.5 F 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 G 9 11 13 16 18 H 10 12 14 17 19 L 8 10 12 14 16 M 4.3 4.3 5.5 6.5 8.5 N 8 8 9 10.5 14 P 4 4 5 6 8 Q M3 M4 M4 M5 M6 Q1H7 4 4 4 4 6 R 5 6 7 7 8 R1 3 3 3 3 5 S 8 8 10 12 12 T 9 10 11 11 13
12 16 20 25 30
U 28 33 40 42 51
V 38 46 56 66 86
V1 54 64 82
W 3 3 3 5 5
X 20 26 30 39 52
Y 10 12 14 17 19
Z 1 1 1 1 1
AB M5 M6 M8 M10 M12
AG M5 M5 M5 M5 G 1/8
...Enter the stroke in mm (e.g. 12 stroke 50 = W1440122050) Strokes for bore 12 mm 15; 25; 50; Strokes for bore 16 mm 15; 25; 50; 75; Strokes for bore 20 mm 25; 50; 75; 100; Strokes for bore 25 mm 25; 50; 75; 100; 125; Strokes for bore 30 mm 25; 50; 75; 100; 125;
1-208
VIEW FROM K
+ = ADD THE STROKE ++ = ADD TWICE THE STROKE Code W1440123... W1440163... W1440203... W1440253... W1440303... 12 16 20 25 30 A 18 22 26 32 36 B 46 56 66 78 98 C 10 10 10 10 10 C1 69 90 100 108 124 C2 2 2 2 2 2 C3 79 98 111 120 142 D 4 5 6 7 8 E 29.5 42 46.5 51.5 56 E1 29.5 38 43.5 46.5 58 F 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 G 9 11 13 16 18 H 10 12 14 17 19 L 8 10 12 14 16 M 4.3 4.3 5.5 6.5 8.5 N 8 8 9 10.5 14 P 4 4 5 6 8 Q M3 M4 M4 M5 M6 Q1H7 4 4 4 4 6 R 5 6 7 7 8 R1 3 3 3 3 5 S 8 8 10 12 12 T 9 10 11 11 13
12 16 20 25 30
U 47 57 69 72 88
V 38 46 56 66 86
V1 54 64 82
W 3 3 3 5 5
X 20 26 30 39 52
Y 10 12 14 17 19
Z 1 1 1 1 1
AB M5 M6 M8 M10 M12
AG M5 M5 M5 M5 G 1/8
...Enter the stroke in mm (e.g. 12 stroke 50 = W1440123050) Strokes for bore 12 mm 15; 25; 50; Strokes for bore 16 mm 15; 25; 50; 75; Strokes for bore 20 mm 25; 50; 75; 100; Strokes for bore 25 mm 25; 50; 75; 100; 125; Strokes for bore 30 mm 25; 50; 75; 100; 125;
1-209
ACTUATORS
ACCESSORIES
MAGNETIC SENSOR 4, FOR SLIDE S10 12
ACTUATORS
* For use when standard sensors do not detect the magnet, e.g. near metal masses. For technical data see page 1-288
NOTES
1-210
TECHNICAL DATA
Fluid Pressure range bar MPa psi C mm/s mm mm mm
S11-12
S11-16
S11-20
S11-25
S11-30
Temperature range Piston speed Versions Bores Piston rod diameter Strokes
20 mm filtered ai 1.5 to 7 0.15 to 0.7 43.5 to 101 -10 to +80 30 to 200 With sliding bushes / With ball bearing bushes / With stop screw / With hydraulic shock absorbers 12 16 20 25 30 6 8 10 12 16 25 25 25 25 25 50 60 50 50 50 75 75 75 75 75 100 100 100 100 125 125 125 150 150 X = 0.14 Y = 0.002 X = 0.25 Y = 0.002 16.9 x P Fr: 7 to 3 Fp: 4 to 1.5 Fr: 13 to 5 Fp: 6 to 3 X = 0.25 X = 0.5 X = 0.7 Y = 0.0035 Y = 0.045 Y = 0.007 X = 0.37 X = 0.78 X = 1.04 Y = 0.0035 Y = 0.045 Y = 0.007 30 x P 47 x P 75 x P (The values shown refer to the min. and max. strokes) Fr: 20 to 4 Fr: 35 to 4.5 Fr: 50 to 5.4 Fp: 4 to 1.5 Fp: 12 to 3 Fp: 15 to 3.5 Fr: 35 to 6.5 Fr: 58 to 7 Fr: 80 to 8 Fp: 11 to 3 Fp: 18 to 5 Fp: 23 to 6 X = 1.24 Y = 0.01 X = 1.98 Y = 0.01 101 x P Fr: 80 to 12 Fp: 20 to 4.5 Fr: 130 to 18 Fp: 50 to 8
Weight = X + (Y C) where C = stroke Sliding version Ball bearing version Theoretical thrust (P = relative pressure in bar) Max. loads Loads with sliding version Loads with ball bearing version
kg
N N N
COMPONENTS a b c d e f g h i j FLANGE: anodized aluminium WASHER: steel BUFFER: rubber ADJUSTABEL STRIKER PLATE: Zinc-plated steel BASE: brass PISTON: brass MAGNET: plastoferrite CYLINDER BODY: anodized aluminium STATIC O-RINGS: NBR BUSH: ball bearing
There are two sliding systems available: on bushes on ball bearings The frame is made up of two paired through-rod cylinders with a common anodized aluminium body containing slots for retracting sensors. There are 5 bores available: 2 x 12; 2 x 16; 2 x 20; 2 x 25 and 2 x 30. The piston rods are united by means of a plate on which mechanical stops or hydraulic shock absorbers can be mounted.
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
VIEW FROM K
+ = ADD THE STROKE ++ = ADD TWICE THE STROKE Code W1450122... W1450162... W1450202... W1450252... W1450302... 12 16 20 25 30 A 18 22 26 32 36 B 46 56 66 78 98 C 5 10 10 10 10 C1 45 50 55 60 70 C2 2 2 2 2 2 C3 65 74 83 92 106 C4 57 64 71 78 90 D 4 5 6 7 8 E 20 20 22.5 25 30 F 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 G 9 11 13 16 18 H 10 12 14 17 19 L 8 10 12 14 16 M 2 2 2 2 2 N 4.3 4.3 5.5 6.5 8.5 P 8 8 9 10.5 14 Q 4 4 5 6 8 R M3 M4 M4 M5 M6 R1H7 4 4 4 4 6 S 5 6 7 7 8 S1 3 3 3 3 5 T 3.3 4.3 4.3 5.2 5.2
12 16 20 25 30
U 6 8 8 9 9
V 3 4 4 5 5
W 14 15 16 19 21
X M4 M5 M5 M6 M6
Y 6 8 10 12 12
Z 38 46 56 66 86
Z1 54 64 82
AB 3 3 3 5 5
AC 20 26 30 39 52
AD 1 1 1 1 1
AE 10 12 14 17 19
AF 4 5 5 6 6
AG M5 M5 M5 M5 G 1/8
AL 7 8.5 9 10 12
...Enter the stroke in mm (e.g. 12 stroke 50 = W1450122050) Strokes for bore 12 mm 25; 50; 75 Strokes for bore 16 mm 25; 50; 75; 100 Strokes for bore 20 mm 25; 50; 75; 100; 125 Strokes for bore 25 mm 25; 50; 75; 100; 125; 150 Strokes for bore 30 mm 25; 50; 75; 100; 125; 150
1-212
VIEW FROM K
+ = ADD THE STROKE ++ = ADD TWICE THE STROKE Code W1450123... W1450163... W1450203... W1450253... W1450303... 12 16 20 25 30 A 18 22 26 32 36 B 46 56 66 78 98 C 5 10 10 10 10 C1 71 85 99 105 128 C2 2 2 2 2 2 C3 91 109 127 137 164 C4 83 99 115 123 148 D 4 5 6 7 8 E 33 37.5 44.5 47.5 59 F 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 G 9 11 13 16 18 H 10 12 14 17 19 L 8 10 12 14 16 M 2 2 2 2 2 N 4.3 4.3 5.5 6.5 8.5 P 8 8 9 10.5 14 Q 4 4 5 6 8 R M3 M4 M4 M5 M6 R1H7 4 4 4 4 6 S 5 6 7 7 8 S1 3 3 3 3 5 T 3.3 4.3 4.3 5.2 5.2
12 16 20 25 30
U 6 8 8 9 9
V 3 4 4 5 5
W 28 33 40 42 50
X M4 M5 M5 M6 M6
Y 6 8 10 6 12
Z 38 46 56 66 86
Z1 54 64 82
AB 3 3 3 5 5
AC 20 26 30 39 52
AD 1 1 1 1 1
AE 10 12 14 17 19
AF 4 5 5 6 6
AG M5 M5 M5 M5 G 1/8
AH M5 M6 M8 M10 M12
AL 7 8.5 9 10 12
...Enter the stroke in mm (e.g. 12 stroke 50 = W1450123050) Strokes for bore 12 mm 25; 50; 75 Strokes for bore 16 mm 25; 50; 75; 100 Strokes for bore 20 mm 25; 50; 75; 100; 125 Strokes for bore 25 mm 25; 50; 75; 100; 125; 150 Strokes for bore 30 mm 25; 50; 75; 100; 125; 150
1-213
ACTUATORS
DIMENSIONS OF TWIN-CYLINDER GUIDE UNITS WITH SHOCK ABSORBERS SERIES S11, ON BUSHES 12 to 30
ACTUATORS
VIEW FROM K
+ = ADD THE STROKE ++ = ADD TWICE THE STROKE Code W1450124... W1450164... W1450204... W1450254... W1450304... 12 16 20 25 30 A 18 22 26 32 36 B 46 56 66 78 98 C 5 10 10 10 10 C1 45 50 55 60 70 C2 2 2 2 2 2 C3 65 74 83 92 106 C4 57 64 71 78 90 D 4 5 6 7 8 E 20 20 22.5 25 30 F 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 G 9 11 13 16 18 H 10 12 14 17 19 L 8 10 12 14 16 M 2 2 2 2 2 N 4.3 4.3 5.5 6.5 8.5 P 8 8 9 10.5 14 Q 4 4 5 6 8 R M3 M4 M4 M5 M6 R1H7 4 4 4 4 6 S 5 6 7 7 8 S1 3 3 3 3 5 T 3.3 4.3 4.3 5.2 5.2
12 16 20 25 30
U 6 8 8 9 9
V 3 4 4 5 5
W 14 15 16 19 21
X M4 M5 M5 M6 M6
Y 6 8 10 12 12
Z 38 46 56 66 86
Z1 54 69 82
AB 3 3 3 5 5
AC 20 26 30 39 52
AD 1 1 1 1 1
AE 10 12 14 17 19
AF 4 5 5 6 6
AG M5 M5 M5 M5 G 1/8
AH 30 35 35 36 60
AL 7 8.5 9 10 12
...Enter the stroke in mm (e.g. 12 stroke 50 = W1450124050) Strokes for bore 12 mm 25; 50; 75 Strokes for bore 16 mm 25; 50; 75; 100 Strokes for bore 20 mm 25; 50; 75; 100; 125 Strokes for bore 25 mm 25; 50; 75; 100; 125; 150 Strokes for bore 30 mm 25; 50; 75; 100; 125; 150
1-214
DIMENSIONS OF TWIN-CYLINDER GUIDE UNITS, BALL BEARING VERSION WITH SHOCK ABSORBERS SERIES S11 12 to 30
VIEW FROM K
+ = ADD THE STROKE ++ = ADD TWICE THE STROKE Code W1450125... W1450165... W1450205... W1450255... W1450305... 12 16 20 25 30 A 18 22 26 32 36 B 46 56 66 78 98 C 5 10 10 10 10 C1 71 85 99 105 128 C2 2 2 2 2 2 C3 91 109 127 137 164 C4 83 99 115 123 148 D 4 5 6 7 8 E 33 37.5 44.5 47.5 59 F 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 G 9 11 13 16 18 H 10 12 14 17 19 L 8 10 12 14 16 M 2 2 2 2 2 N 4.3 4.3 5.5 6.5 8.5 P 8 8 9 10.5 14 Q 4 4 5 6 8 R M3 M4 M4 M5 M6 R1H7 4 4 4 4 6 S 5 6 7 7 8 S1 3 3 3 3 5 T 3.3 4.3 4.3 5.2 5.2
12 16 20 25 30
U 6 8 8 9 9
V 3 4 4 5 5
W 28 33 40 42 50
X M4 M5 M5 M6 M6
Y 6 8 10 6 12
Z 38 46 56 66 86
Z1 54 64 82
AB 3 3 3 5 5
AC 20 26 30 39 52
AD 1 1 1 1 1
AE 10 12 14 17 19
AF 4 5 5 6 6
AG M5 M5 M5 M5 G 1/8
AH 30 35 35 36 60
AL 7 8.5 9 10 12
...Enter the stroke in mm (e.g. 12 stroke 50 = W1450125050) Strokes for bore 12 mm 25; 50; 75 Strokes for bore 16 mm 25; 50; 75; 100 Strokes for bore 20 mm 25; 50; 75; 100; 125 Strokes for bore 25 mm 25; 50; 75; 100; 125; 150 Strokes for bore 30 mm 25; 50; 75; 100; 125; 150
1-215
ACTUATORS
ACCESSORIES
MAGNETIC SENSOR 4, FOR SLIDE S11 12
ACTUATORS
* For use when standard sensors do not detect the magnet, e.g. near metal masses. For technical data see page 1-288
SPARE PARTS
SHOCK ABSORBERS
Code 0950004001 0950004002 0950004003 0950004004 12 16 - 20 25 30 Description Shock absorbers PMX 10 MF3 + nut M10x1 Shock absorbers PM 15 MF3 + nut M12x1 Shock absorbers SPM 25 MC-C + nut M14x1 Shock absorbers PR50 MC2 + nut M20x1.5
NOTES
1-216
TECHNICAL DATA
Fluid Pressure range bar MPa psi C mm/s mm mm mm
S12-16
S12-20
S12-25
S12-30
Temperature range Piston speed Versions Bores Piston rod diameter Strokes
20 mm filtered ai 1.5 to 7 0.15 to 0.7 21.5 to 101 -10 to +80 30 to 200 With sliding bushes / With ball bearing bushes / With stop screw / With hydraulic shock absorbersi 16 20 25 30 8 10 12 16 25 25 25 25 60 50 50 50 75 75 75 75 100 100 100 100 125 125 125 150 150 X = 0.5 X = 0.7 X = 1.24 Y = 0.045 Y 0.007 Y = 0.01 X = 0.78 X = 1.04 X = 1.98 Y = 0.045 Y = 0.007 Y = 0.01 47 x P 75 x P 101 x P (The values shown refer to the min. and max. strokes) Fr: 20 to 4 Fr: 35 to 4.5 Fr: 50 to 5.4 Fr: 80 to 12 Fp: 4 to 1.5 Fp: 12 to 3 Fp: 15 to 3.5 Fp: 20 to 4.5 Fr: 35 to 6.5 Fr: 58 to 7 Fr: 80 to 8 Fr: 130 to 18 Fp: 11 to 3 Fp: 18 to 5 Fp: 23 to 6 Fp: 50 to 8 X = 0.25 Y = 0.0035 X = 0.37 Y = 0.0035 30 x P
Weight = X + (Y C) where C = stroke Sliding version Ball bearing version Theoretical thrust (P = relative pressure in bar) Max. loads Loads with sliding version Loads with ball bearing version
kg
N N N
COMPONENTS a b c d e f g h i j k FLANGE: anodized aluminium WASHER: steel BUFFER: rubber ADJUSTABLE STRIKER PLATE: Zinc-plated steel BASE: brass PISTON: brass MAGNET: Plastoferrite CYLINDER BODY: anodized aluminium STATIC O-RINGS: NBR BUSH: ball bearing SCREW: pneumatically powered
Two sliding systems are available: on bushes on ball bearings The structure is made up of two paired through-rod cylinders with a common anodized aluminium body with grooves for mounting the retractable sensor. Five bores available: 2 x 16; 2 x 20; 2 x 25; 2 x 30. The rods are joined together by means of a plate on which the mechanical limit switches or hydraulic shock absorbers can be mounted. The compressed air ports are at the end of the piston rods.
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
VIEW FROM K
+ = ADD THE STROKE ++ = ADD TWICE THE STROKE Code W1460162... W1460202... W1460252... W1460302... 16 20 25 30 A 22 26 32 36 B 56 66 78 98 C 10 10 10 10 C1 50 55 60 70 C2 2 2 2 2 C3 74 83 92 106 C4 64 71 78 90 D 5 6 7 8 E 20 22.5 25 30 F 1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 G 11 13 16 18 H 12 14 17 19 L 10 12 14 16 M 2 2 2 2 N 4.3 5.5 6.5 8.5 P 8 9 10.5 14 Q 4 5 6 8 R M4 M4 M5 M6 R1H7 4 4 4 6 S 6 7 7 8 S1 3 3 3 5 T 4.3 4.3 5.2 5.2
16 20 25 30
U 8 8 9 9
V 4 4 5 5
W 15 16 19 21
X M5 M5 M6 M6
Y 8 10 12 12
Z 46 56 66 86
Z1 54 64 82
AB 3 3 5 5
AC 26 30 39 52
AD 1 1 1 1
AE 12 14 17 19
AF 5 5 6 6
AG M5 M5 M5 G 1/8
AH M6 M8 M10 M12
AL 8.5 9 10 12
...Enter the stroke in mm (e.g. 16 stroke 50 = W1450162050) Strokes for bore 16 mm 25; 50; 75; 100 Strokes for bore 20 mm 25; 50; 75; 100; 125 Strokes for bore 25 mm 25; 50; 75; 100; 125; 150 Strokes for bore 30 mm 25; 50; 75; 100; 125; 150
1-218
VIEW FROM K
+ = ADD THE STROKE ++ = ADD TWICE THE STROKE Code W1460163... W1460203... W1460253... W1460303... 16 20 25 30 A 22 26 32 36 B 56 66 78 98 C 10 10 10 10 C1 85 99 105 128 C2 2 2 2 2 C3 109 127 137 164 C4 99 115 123 148 D 5 6 7 8 E 37.5 44.5 47.5 59 F 1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 G 11 13 16 18 H 12 14 17 19 L 10 12 14 16 M 2 2 2 2 N 4.3 5.5 6.5 8.5 P 8 9 10.5 14 Q 4 5 6 8 R M4 M4 M5 M6 R1H7 4 4 4 6 S 6 7 7 8 S1 3 3 3 5 T 4.3 4.3 5.2 5.2
16 20 25 30
U 8 8 9 9
V 4 4 5 5
W 33 40 42 50
X M5 M5 M6 M6
Y 8 10 6 12
Z 46 56 66 86
Z1 54 64 82
AB 3 3 5 5
AC 26 30 39 52
AD 1 1 1 1
AE 12 14 17 19
AF 5 5 6 6
AG M5 M5 M5 G 1/8
AH M6 M8 M10 M12
AL 8.5 9 10 12
...Enter the stroke in mm (e.g. 16 stroke 50 = W1450163050) Strokes for bore 16 mm 25; 50; 75; 100 Strokes for bore 20 mm 25; 50; 75; 100; 125 Strokes for bore 25 mm 25; 50; 75; 100; 125; 150 Strokes for bore 30 mm 25; 50; 75; 100; 125; 150
1-219
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
VIEW FROM K
+ = ADD THE STROKE ++ = ADD TWICE THE STROKE Code W1460164... W1460204... W1460254... W1460304... 16 20 25 30 A 22 26 32 36 B 56 66 78 98 C 10 10 10 10 C1 50 55 60 70 C2 2 2 2 2 C3 74 83 92 106 C4 64 71 78 90 D 5 6 7 8 E 20 22.5 25 30 F 1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 G 11 13 16 18 H 12 14 17 19 L 10 12 14 16 M 2 2 2 2 N 4.3 5.5 6.5 8.5 P 8 9 10.5 14 Q 4 5 6 8 R M4 M4 M5 M6 R1H7 4 4 4 6 S 6 7 7 8 S1 3 3 3 5 T 4.3 4.3 5.2 5.2
16 20 25 30
U 8 8 9 9
V 4 4 5 5
W 15 16 19 21
X M5 M5 M6 M6
Y 8 10 12 12
Z 46 56 66 86
Z1 54 64 82
AB 3 3 5 5
AC 26 30 39 52
AD 1 1 1 1
AE 12 14 17 19
AF 5 5 6 6
AG M5 M5 M5 G 1/8
AH 35 35 36 60
AL 8.5 9 10 12
...Enter the stroke in mm (e.g. 16 stroke 50 = W1450164050) Strokes for bore 16 mm 25; 50; 75; 100 Strokes for bore 20 mm 25; 50; 75; 100; 125 Strokes for bore 25 mm 25; 50; 75; 100; 125; 150 Strokes for bore 30 mm 25; 50; 75; 100; 125; 150
1-220
VIEW FROM K
+ = ADD THE STROKE ++ = ADD TWICE THE STROKE Code W1460165... W1460205... W1460255... W1460305... 16 20 25 30 A 22 26 32 36 B 56 66 78 98 C 10 10 10 10 C1 85 99 105 128 C2 2 2 2 2 C3 109 127 137 164 C4 99 115 123 148 D 5 6 7 8 E 37.5 44.5 47.5 59 F 1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 G 11 13 16 18 H 12 14 17 19 L 10 12 14 16 M 2 2 2 2 N 4.3 5.5 6.5 8.5 P 8 9 10.5 14 Q 4 5 6 8 R M4 M4 M5 M6 R1H7 4 4 4 6 S 6 7 7 8 S1 3 3 3 5 T 4.3 4.3 5.2 5.2
16 20 25 30
U 8 8 9 9
V 4 4 5 5
W 33 40 42 50
X M5 M5 M6 M6
Y 8 10 6 12
Z 46 56 66 86
Z1 54 64 82
AB 3 3 5 5
AC 26 30 39 52
AD 1 1 1 1
AE 12 14 17 19
AF 5 5 6 6
AG M5 M5 M5 G 1/8
AH 35 35 36 60
AL 8.5 9 10 12
...Enter the stroke in mm (e.g. 16 stroke 50 = W1450165050) Strokes for bore 16 mm 25; 50; 75; 100 Strokes for bore 20 mm 25; 50; 75; 100; 125 Strokes for bore 25 mm 25; 50; 75; 100; 125; 150 Strokes for bore 30 mm 25; 50; 75; 100; 125; 150
1-221
ACTUATORS
ACCESSORIES
RETRACTABLE SENSOR WITH INSERTION FROM ABOVE, FOR SLIDE S11 16 to 30
Code W0952025390 W0952029394 W0952022180 W0952028184 W0952125556 W0952025500* W0952029504* W0952022500* W0952128184* Description HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2.5 m HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 300 mm M8 REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2.5 m REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 300 mm M8 HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2 m ATEX HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 2.5 m HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 300 mm M8 REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 2.5 m REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 300 mm M8
ACTUATORS
* For use when standard sensors do not detect the magnet, e.g. near metal masses. For technical data see page 1-288
SPARES
SHOCK ABSORBERS
Code 0950004002 0950004003 0950004004 16 - 20 25 30 Description Shock absorbers PM10 MF2 + nut M10x1 Shock absorbers PR015 MF1 + nut M12x1 Shock absorbers PR025 MC2 + nut M14x1.5
NOTES
1-222
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure bar MPa psi C mm/s
10
16
20
Operating temperature Fluid Minimum and maximum speed Pneumatic fitting Type of guide Versions Strokes
mm
Theoretical thrust force, at 6 bar Theoretical pull force, at 6 bar Admitted loads Admitted kinetic energy Stroke tolerance Assembly position Weight
N N Joule mm kg
2 to 8 0.2 to 0.8 29 to 116 -10 to +80 Lubricated and unlubricated compressed air at 20 mm, must be uninterrupted when lubricated 30 to 500 M5 Ball recirculation Magnetic dual-acting with rubber buffer 10 10 10 10 25 25 25 25 ----50 50 17 47 120 188 13 40 104 158 See diagrams page 1-224 0.012 0.025 0.050 0.100 0 / +1.0 Any (horizontal and vertical) See table page 1-224
COMPONENTS a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o NUT: stainless steel SNAP RING: galvanised steel FRONT BASE: bronze BODY: anodized aluminium GUIDE: tempered stainless steel PISTON: aluminium BALL RECIRCULATION PAD: stainless steel BUFFER: NBR REAR BASE: anodized aluminium PLATE: anodized aluminium PISTON ROD GASKET: type EM, NBR O-RING: NBR PISTON ROD: stainless steel PISTON GASKET: type PZ, NBR MAGNET: neodymium ( 6 and 10) plastoferrite ( 16 and 20)
1-223
Series S13 precision slides feature a dual-acting pneumatic cylinder that has the sole purpose of pushing and pulling the load, a ground steel guide that is integral with the body, and a ball recirculation pad that is fixed onto the moving table and is designed to withstand all the loads and movements applied. This ensures accurate movement with virtually no play, and the piston rods do not suffer wear as there are no lateral loads. All the slides are equipped with sensor magnets. The body can be secured on many sides. The load side can be fixed onto the table from the top or the front. The compressed air supply can be connected on three sides. The retractable sensors can be fitted on the right or on the left. All these possibilities make the application extremely flexible. The width is extremely reduced to allow installation in small spaces and the combination of several reduced-pitch slides.
ACTUATORS
WEIGHTS
MASS/VELOCITY DIAGRAM M (kg) L (mm) = Mass applied = Distance between the axis of the piston rod and the barycentre of the mass v (mm/s) = Velocity of the slide vert = Limit with vertical movement
ACTUATORS
8 50 68 ---
S13-6
S13-10
S13-16
S13-20
1-224
FIXING OPTIONS FIXING THE BODY A Lateral, via the through holes B Lateral, on the hole threads C Rear, on the threaded holes D Vertical, on the threaded holes FIXING THE MOVING TABLE E Front, on the threaded holes F Top, on the threaded holes N.B. Since the table is supported by a ball guide/pad, avoid applying excessive torques or forces. When securing the screws, hold the table, not the body, so that the torque discharges through the ball pad. C D
COMPRESSED-AIR SUPPLY The compressed air supply can be from the back, from the left or from the right. The slide comes with holes on the left and right that are plugged with screws and O-ring seals. If you wish to use the holes, remove the screws and O-rings and fix them in the holes in the back, applying a drop of adhesive to the screw thread.
1-225
ACTUATORS
DIMENSIONS
ACTUATORS
6 10 16
20 + = ADD THE STROKE Code W1471063...* W1471103...* W1471163...* W1471203...* 6 10 16 20 LT 31 35 42 52.5 B 19 23 27 34 C 18 20 25 32 D 10 12.5 12.5 15 E 39 47 53.5 64.5 F 38 46 52.5 63.5 G 5.5 7.5 10 11 I 2.9 4 3.75 4.5 J 7.5 9 10 10.5 K 15 18 26 34 MA M3 M4 M4 M5 pf 5 6 7 9 A 2 2 3 3 ps 4.5 4.5 7.5 7.5
Stroke 10 25 10 25 10 25 50 10 25 50 L 9 11 16 20
N 10 30 10 30 10 30 25 10 30 25 P 8 11 14 14
H 42 62 49 69 58 78 98 64 84 104 Q 9 11 16 20 R 15 19 24 31
NF 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 3 S 10 12 12 15
M 14.5 15.5 19 23
6 10 16 20
T 5 5 10 10
U 9 13 17 20
V 16 20 25 32
W 10.5 13 17 20
X 18 20 25 32
Y 19 23 27 34
ML M4 M5 M5 M6
DL 4 5 5 6
* Enter the stroke in mm (e.g. 6 stroke 10=W1471063010) Standard strokes: Bore 6 -> 10; 25 mm Bore 10 -> 10; 25 mm Bore 16 -> 10; 25; 50 mm Bore 20 -> 10; 25; 50 mm
1-226
ACCESSORIES
MAGNETIC SENSOR 4, FOR SLIDE S13
NOTES
1-227
ACTUATORS
NOTES
1-228
ACTUATORS
SUMMARY HYDRAULIC-PNEUMATIC
PAGE 1-230
PAGE 1-238
1-229
SUMMARY HYDRAULIC-PNEUMATIC
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
BRK HYDRAULIC BRAKE
This is a closed-loop hydraulic brake without its own power source. It is normally associated with an ISO 15552 pneumatic cylinder. It consists of an oil-filled cylinde , one or more regulation valves and a tank compensating for oil leaks. It is available in two versions: with regulation in piston rod extension, in retraction or both SKIP valve (slow/fast) or STOP valve or both, with NC or NO control After a certain operating time, the brake compensation tank needs to be topped up. Refer to the minimum mark on the dipstick. With the piston rod fully extended, the dipstick must project at least 15 mm from the tank cap. Use only COMLUBE DEXRON ATF hydraulic oil. During the first few work cycles, excess oil is ejected through a hole in the tank.
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating temperature Fluid Adjustable load Speed Standard strokes Versions Cylinder coupling Connectable cylinders C
NBR From 10 to +70 Lubricated or unlubricated filtered ai . Lubrication, if used, must be continuous 7000 10 to 6000 50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500 special strokes up to 1000 on request. Regulation in piston rod extension and/or retraction. SKIP valves. STOP valves. Tank in-line or on the side. Flange kit ISO 15552 cylinders with bore 40 to 100
N mm/min mm
mm
COMPONENTS a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q
1-230
PISTON ROD: thick chromed steel HEADS: anodised aluminium alloy PISTON ROD GASKET: NBR rubber PISTON ROD GUIDE BUSHING: steel strip with bronze and PTFE insert JACKET: drawn anodised aluminium alloy PISTON: aluminium alloy PISTON GASKET: NBR rubber OIL SEAL GASKET: polyurethane Static O-rings: NBR rubber SEALING DISK: plastic SPRINGS: zinc-plated steel SECURING/ASSEMBLY SCREW: self-threading screw (Tap Tite) OIL LEVEL STICK: zinc-plated steel OIL RECOVERY TANK VALVE for OIL FILLING FLOW REGULATION NEEDLE MINIMUM LEVEL
STOP
SKIP
Air inlet
Air inlet
In normally-open (NO) valves, flow moves freely from A to D. When po t C is supplied, this operates the SKIP valve and the fluid is forced through the bottleneck generated by the adjusting pin. When port B is supplied, this operates the STOP valve and interrupts the flow of fluid In normally-closed NC valves, flow is no mally inhibited. When port B is supplied, the fluid flows through but it is forced through the bottlenec generated by the adjusting pin. When port C is supplied, flow moves freely from A to D.
Code W170001____
____ = Enter the stroke Weight for stroke 0 mm = 1340 g Weight each mm = 4.2 g
Code W170001____L
Description Hydraulic brake with regulation in piston rod extension, in-line tank
____ = Enter the stroke Weight for stroke 0 mm = 1300 g Weight each mm = 4.2 g
1-231
ACTUATORS
NO
Air inlet
Air inlet
NC
ACTUATORS
Symbol
Stroke 150 51150 B 109 129 U max 23 39 55 71 87 95
Code W170011____
____ = Enter the stroke Weight for stroke 0 mm = 1340 g Weight each mm = 4.2 g
BRK HYDRAULIC BRAKE HYDRAULIC BRAKE WITH REGULATION IN PISTON ROD EXTENSION/RETRACTION
Symbol
Stroke 150 51150 B 98 118 U max 23 39 55 71 87 95
Code Description W170021____ Hydraulic brake with regulation in piston rod extension/retraction
____ = Enter the stroke Weight for stroke 0 mm = 1710 g Weight each mm = 4.2 g
HYDRAULIC BRAKE WITH REGULATION IN EXTENSION + SKIP VALVE HYDRAULIC BRAKE WITH REGULATION IN EXTENSION + STOP VALVE
Stroke 150 51150 B 109 129 U max 23 39 55 71 87 95
Symbol
Code W170101____
W170201____
W170102____
W170202____
____ = Enter the stroke Weight for stroke 0 mm = 1555 g Weight each mm = 4.2 g
1-232
HYDRAULIC BRAKE WITH REGULATION IN EXTENSION + SKIP VALVE, IN-LINE TANK HYDRAULIC BRAKE WITH REGULATION IN EXTENSION + STOP VALVE, IN-LINE TANK
Stroke 150 51150 B 92 112 U max 23 39 55 71 87 95
W170201____L Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension + NO STOP valve, in-line tank W170102____L Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension + NC SKIP valve, in-line tank W170202____L Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension + NC STOP valve, in-line tank
____ = Enter the stroke Weight for stroke 0 mm = 1510 g Weight each mm = 4.2 g
HYDRAULIC BRAKE WITH REGULATION IN RETRACTION + SKIP VALVE HYDRAULIC BRAKE WITH REGULATION IN RETRACTION + STOP VALVE
Stroke 150 51150 B 109 129 U max 23 39 55 71 87 95
Symbol
Code Description W170111____ Hydraulic brake with regulation in retraction + NO SKIP valve
____ = Enter the stroke Weight for stroke 0 mm = 1555 g Weight each mm = 4.2 g
Code Description W170301____ Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension + NO SKIP/STOP valves
____ = Enter the stroke Weight for stroke 0 mm = 1730 g Weight each mm = 4.2 g
1-233
ACTUATORS
Symbol
Code Description W170101____L Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension + NO SKIP valve, in-line tank
ACTUATORS
Symbol
Stroke 150 51150 B 92 112 U max 23 39 55 71 87 95
Code Description W170301____L Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension + NO SKIP/STOP valves, in-line tank
W170302____L Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension + NC SKIP/STOP valves, in-line tank
____ = Enter the stroke Weight for stroke 0 mm = 1690 g Weight each mm = 4.2 g
Code Description W170311____ Hydraulic brake with regulation in retraction + NO SKIP/STOP valves
____ = Enter the stroke Weight for stroke 0 mm = 1730 g Weight each mm = 4.2 g
Code Description W170023____ Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension/retraction + extension NO STOP valve
____ = Enter the stroke Note: minimum stroke 100 mm Weight for stroke 0 mm = 1990 g Weight each mm = 4.2 g
1-234
100150 118 151250 143 251350 163 351450 193 451500 218
____ = Enter the stroke Note: minimum stroke 100 mm Weight for stroke 0 mm = 2080 g Weight each mm = 4.2 g
Code Description W170221____ Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension/retraction + dual NO STOP valve
____ = Enter the stroke Note: minimum stroke 150 mm Weight for stroke 0 mm = 2260 g Weight each mm = 4.2 g
Code Description W170121____ Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension/retraction + dual NO SKIP valve
____= Enter the stroke Weight for stroke 0 mm = 1850 g Weight each mm = 4.2 g
1-235
ACTUATORS
Symbol
Code Description W170025____ Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension/retraction + retraction NO STOP valve
HYDRAULIC BRAKE WITH REGULATION IN EXTENSION/RETRACTION + DUAL SKIP VALVE + PISTON ROD EXTENSION STOP VALVE
ACTUATORS
Symbol
Stroke B U max 39 55 71 87 95 100150 118 151250 143 251350 163 351450 193 451500 218
Code Description W170123____ Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension/retraction + dual SKIP valve + piston rod extension NO STOP valve W170124____ Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension/retraction + dual SKIP valve + piston rod extension NC STOP valve
____ = Enter the stroke Note: minimum stroke 100 mm Weight for stroke 0 mm = 2110 g Weight each mm = 4.2 g
HYDRAULIC BRAKE WITH REGULATION IN EXTENSION/RETRACTION + DUAL SKIP VALVE + PISTON ROD RETRACTION STOP VALVE
Symbol
Stroke B U max 39 55 71 87 95 100150 118 151250 143 251350 163 351450 193 451500 218
Code Description W170125____ Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension/retraction + dual SKIP valve + piston rod retraction NO STOP valve W170126____ Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension/retraction + dual SKIP valve + piston rod retraction NC STOP valve
____ = Enter the stroke Note: minimum stroke 100 mm Weight for stroke 0 mm = 2210 g Weight each mm = 4.2 g
HYDRAULIC BRAKE WITH REGULATION IN EXTENSION/RETRACTION + DUAL SKIP VALVE + DUAL STOP VALVE
Symbol
Stroke 150 B 118 U max 39 55 71 87 95
Code Description W170321____ Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension/retraction + dual SKIP valve + dual NO STOP valve W170322____ Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension/retraction + dual SKIP valve + dual NC STOP valve
____ = Enter the stroke Note: minimum stroke 150 mm Weight for stroke 0 mm = 2415 g Weight each mm = 4.2 g
1-236
KEY TO CODES
W 1 7 0 W170 BRK hydraulic brake 0 1 2 3 0 Regulation Regulation + SKIP Regulation + STOP Regulation + SKIP + STOP 1 0 Extension 1 Retraction 2 Extension and retraction 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 No valve or NO NC + NO STOP in extension + NC STOP in extension + NO STOP in retraction + NC STOP in retraction 0300 STROKE Enter the desired stroke in four digits (e.g. 0500 for stroke 500) L L In-line tank, if present
Only for versions with piston rod regulation in extension In combination with regulation in extension/retraction or regulation + SKIP in extension/retraction
ACCESSORIES
FLANGE FOR MOUNTING WITH ISO 15552 CYLINDER
40 50 63 80 100
A 55 65 75 95 112
B 55 55 55 55
C D 38 38 46.5 38 56.5 38 72 38 89 38
G H 55 35 61 40 66 45 76 45 84.5 55
H1 32 32 32 32 32
L 7 7 7 7 7
M 7 9 9 11 11
N 12 12 15 15 15
1-237
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
INTEGRATED HYDRAULIC BRAKE
The integrated hydraulic brake is comprised of a pneumatic cylinder that acts as an actuator and an oleo-dynamic circuit that acts as a brake. The dimensions of the pneumatic cylinder (bore 63) comply with ISO 15552. The hydraulic circuit is comprised of a brake fluid tank and one or two flo regulation pins. It can mount one or more (slow-fast) SKIP or STOP valves that are normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC), for the piston rod extension and retraction. The basic feature of this device is that the driving force and the braking force are coaxial, so they do not generate undesired bending moments on the piston rod and the external structures connected to it. Due to its conception, this brake is particularly compact and has reduced dimensions compared to BRK external hydraulic brakes. After a certain operating time, the brake fluid tank must be topped up with oil. This needs doing when the oil level reaches the minimum mark on the rod. With the piston rod right out, the minimum level mark must not project less than 8-10 mm from the cap. Always use Comlube DEXRON ATF hydraulic oil or another compatible product. During the first operating cycles, excess oil is expelled through a hole in the tank. TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure bar MPa psi bar MPa psi C F NBR-POLYURETHANE 1 to 8 0.1 to 0.8 14.5 to 116 3 to 8 0.3 to 0.8 43.5 to 116 -10 to +70 14 to 156 Lubricated or unlubricated filtered ai . DEXRON ATF (Comlube) the list of compatible oils is available on the web site www.metalwork.it mm 63 N 1.725 N 1.150
Operating temperature range Pneumatic circuit flui Hydraulic circuit flui Bore Thrust force generated at 6 bar Pull force generated at 6 bar Maximum load which can be applied from outside while the rod is lock N Version without valves and with closed pins: Thrust Load on the rod Traction Load on the rod Version with STOP NC valves not operated: Thrust Load on the rod Traction Load on the rod Version with STOP NO valves operated at 6 bar: Thrust Load on the rod Traction Load on the rod Version with STOP NO valves operated at 8 bar: Thrust Load on the rod Traction Load on the rod Speeds at 6 bar and 20C: with regulation pin with pin and NO STOP valve with pin and NC STOP valve with pin and NO SKIP valve with pin and NC SKIP valve with pin and NO STOP+SKIP valves with pin and NC STOP+SKIP valves without pin nor regulation (fast retraction) Standard strokes
6.000 5.000 6.000 5.000 6.000 5.000 6.000 5.000 mm/min 30 to 7.000 30 to 4.500 30 to 4.500 30 to 5.000 30 to 5.000 30 to 4.000 30 to 4.000 30.000 (Speeds measured on the brake with 500 mm stroke and using 10 mm pipes) mm 50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500 Other special strokes up to 500 available on request, but the dimensions of the brake are the same of the immediately higher stroke ones, and the front damping has no action. Piston-out, piston-in and dual regulation The following combinations of valves can be mounted on each regulated section: STOP NO, STOP NC, SKIP NO, SKIP NC, DOPPIO STOP NO, DOPPIO STOP NC, DOPPIO SKIP NO, DOPPIO SKIP NC, STOP NO+STOP NC, SKIP NO+SKIP NC, STOP NO+SKIP NO, STOP NC+SKIP NC, STOP NO+SKIP NC, STOP NC+SKIP NO All versions are provided with a magnet
Valve combinations
Sensor magnet
1-238
COMPONENTS OIL
a b c d e f g h i
GUIDE HOLD: galvanised steel O-RING: NBR PISTON ROD: thickly chromed steel PISTON ROD GASKET: polyurethane GUIDE BUSHING: steel strip with bronze and PTFE insert INSIDE PISTON: brass GUIDE RING: PTFE HEAD: anodized aluminium CUSHIONING GASKET: NBR
j JACKET: anodised and calibrated aluminium section k INTERNAL PIPE: brass l INTERMEDIATE PIPE: steel m PISTON: aluminium n PISTON ROD GASKET: polyurethane o MAGNET: plastoferrite p PISTON GASKET: NBR q PISTON ROD GASKET: polyurethane r SECURING/ASSEMBLY SCREW: self-tapping
s t 21 u 22 u
23 u u 24 25 u 26 u 27 u 28 u
BUSH: nickel-plated brass CHECK VALVE OIL FILLING VALVE REGULATION UNIT: anodised aluminium REGULATION PIN OIL RECOVERY TANK OIL LEVEL ROD: galvanised steel NC VALVE NO VALVE CUSHIONING PIN
1-239
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
NO
FROM CYLINDER TO TANK
NC
FROM CYLINDER TO TANK
STOP
Air inlet
In normally-open (NO) valves, flow moves freely from A to D. When po t C is supplied, this operates the SKIP valve and the fluid is forced through the bottleneck generated by the adjusting pin. When port B is supplied, this operates the STOP valve and interrupts the flow of fluid In normally-closed NC valves, flow is no mally inhibited. When port B is supplied, the fluid flows through but it is forced through the bottlenec generated by the adjusting pin. When port C is supplied, flow moves freely from A to D. OVERALL DIMENSIONS OF THE VARIOUS VERSIONS
Stroke 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 B 106 131 131 131 171 171 216 216 301 301 U max 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 A 50 50 82 D 40 40 72
KEY TO CODES
W 1 7 3 INTEGRATED BRAKE W173 Integrated brake 2 REGULATION 0 Out 1 In 2 Dual 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 PISTON ROD EXTENSION CONTROL VALVES Without valves NO Stop NC Stop NO Skip NC Skip NO Stop NO Skip NO Stop NC Skip NC Stop NO Skip NC Stop NC Skip 1 PISTON ROD RETRACTION CONTROL VALVES 0 Without valves 1 NO Stop 2 NC Stop 3 NO Skip 4 NC Skip 5 NO Stop NO Skip 6 NO Stop NC Skip 7 NC Stop NO Skip 8 NC Stop NC Skip 0 BORE 0 D63 0 5 0 0 STROKE Specify the desired stroke in 4 digits (e.g. 0500 for stroke 500)
N.B. With at least one extension control valve and one retraction control valve, type W1732_ _ _ is required.
1-240
ACCESSORIES
FOOT - MODEL A
+ = ADD THE STROKE Code W0950632001 63 AB AH 9 50 AO 47 AT 6 AU 32 TR 50 UH 75 H1 H2 Weight [g] 190 185 266
Note: Individually packed with 2 screws. N.B.: M8x40 UNI 5931 screws are required for fixing the rear head (see kit 0950636092)
Note: Supplied with 4 screws, 4 washers, 2 snap rings and 1 pin. N.B.: M8x40 UNI 5931 screws are required for fixing the rear head (see kit 0950636092)
Note: Supplied with 4 screws, 4 washers. N.B.: M8x40 UNI 5931 screws are required for fixing the rear head (see kit 0950636092)
Note: Supplied with 4 screws, 4 washers. N.B.: M8x40 UNI 5931 screws are required for fixing the rear head (see kit 0950636092)
1-241
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
Code W0950632008
63
A 40
B 33
C 11
D 16
E 40
F 50
G 63
H 75
I 63
L 32
M 12
Note: Supplied with 4 screws. N.B.: M8x40 UNI 5931 screws are required for fixing the rear head (see kit 0950636092)
1-242
1-243
ACTUATORS
Code 0950502010
63
F M16x1.5
H 8
CH 24
Weight [g] 20
ACTUATORS
Code 0950636092
Code 0950632090
63
A 81.5
B 40
C 42
D 110
ISO 1 E 77
D 1124
ISO 1 E 83
1-244
SENSOR BRACKETS
Code W0950000712 Description Bracket D.50-63 DST 81
SLIM SENSOR
Code Description W0952025390 HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2.5 m W0952029394 HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 300 mm M8 W0952022180 REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2.5 m W0952028184 REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 300 mm M8 W0952125556 HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2 m ATEX W0952025500* HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 2.5 m W0952029504* HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 300 mm M8 W0952022500* REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 2.5 m W0952128184* REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 300 mm M8 * For use when standard sensors do not detect the magnet, e.g. near metal masses. For technical data see page 1-288
NOTES
1-245
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
TECHNICAL DATA TECHNICAL DATA TECHNICAL DATA TECHNICAL DATA TECHNICAL DATA TECHNICAL DATA TECHNICAL DATA TECHNICAL DATA TECHNICAL DATA TECHNICAL DATA
1-246
PAG. 1-248
P ELECTRIC MOTORS
PAG. 1-261
PAG. 1-272
PAG. 1-279
1-247
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
An electric cylinder with a connection interface in accordance with ISO 15552. The piston rod extension is controlled by a system with a hardened screw and recirculating ball screw. The piston has a guide strip calibrated to reduce to a minimum play with the barrel and hence vibration during ball screw rotation. The cylinder can be equipped with a built-in non-rotating system featuring two opposing slides that run in separate longitudinal slots in the barrel. The piston comes with magnets and the barrel has longitudinal slots for housing sensors. The piston rod has increased outside diameter and thickness to make it extra rigid and more resistant to radial and peak loads. A system for greasing the screws is included. Numerous standard accessories for pneumatic cylinders, including intermediate hinge, can be used for mounting the cylinder. The motor can be selected from an optimised range, which encompasses both STEPPING and BRUSHLESS motors. There is a version for in-line assembly, where the drive shaft is jointed directly onto the screw. There is also a geared motor version, where transmission is provided by pulleys and a cog belt with a transmission ratio of 1:1. Suitable motor drives are provided. Special adaptor flanges and joints can be provided if the customer wishes to use a particular make of motor. TECHNICAL DATA
Piston rod thread Environmental temperature range for STEPPING motors BRUSHLESS motors Electrical protection rating with STEPPING motors BRUSHLESS motors Maximum relative humidity of the air for IP55 STEPPING motor IP65 BRUSHLESS motor Minimum stroke for version with non-rotating Minimum stroke for version without non-rotating Maximum stroke Overall radial oscillation of the piston rod (without load) for 100 mm of stroke Versions Uncontrolled impact at the end of stroke Sensor magnet Maximum angle of twist of the piston rod for non-rotating version Work position C C 32 M10x1.25 50
in-line version
geared version
63
mm mm mm
M16x1.5 M16x1.5 from -10 to +50 from 0 to +40 IP40 or IP55 (see key to codes on page 1-257) IP40 or IP65 (see key to codes on page 1-257) 90% at 40C; 57% at 50C (no condensate) 90% (no condensate) Twice the screw pitch (to guarantee ball lubrication) 80 1500 0.4 With or without piston rod non-rotating NOT ALLOWED (it provides an extra-stroke minimum 5 mm) YES 130 1 045 Any
MECHANICAL FEATURES
Worm screw pitch (p) Worm screw diameter Static axial load (Fo) Dynamic axial load (F) Maximum number of revs Maximum speed (Vmax) mm mm N N 1/min mm/s 4 12
32 12 12 5 16
50
63
10 16 5 10 20 16 16 20 20 20 3200 4000 6500 5200 5600 10500 6670 4330 10010 12800 4880 Calculate mean axial load and the calculate life (see graphs on pages 1-251 and 1-252) 4000 3000 2500 267 800 250 500 800 208 417 833
WEIGHTS
Worm screw pitch (p) Weight at stroke 0 Additional weight per mm of stroke Moving mass at stroke 0 (non-rotating version) Additional moving mass per mm of stroke mm g g g g 4 896 3.98 270
50 10 2043 6.62 629 1.84 16 2086 6.55 703 5 2942 6.25 956
1-248
63
CALCULATION OF MEAN AXIAL LOAD Fm AND VERIFICATION Peak axial load in a work cycle must not exceed the static axial load Fo. The peak value is usually achieved during upward acceleration in vertical installation. Exceeding this value leads to greater wear and hence shorter life of the recirculating ball screw. Mean axial load Fm Fm = 3
SF
VX Vm x
q 100
Fo Fm
Fm = 3
Fx13 x
VX1 Vm
q1 100
+ Fx23 x
+ Fx33 x
Fx = Axial load at stage x Fm = Mean axial load during extension Fo = Static axial load q = Time segment Vx = Speed in the phase x Vm = Average speed The mean axial load must not exceed the dynamic axial load: Fm F The graphs on pages 1-251 and 1-252 show screw life as a function of Fm BARREL CROSS SECTION
q1
q2 q [100%]
q3
ACTUATORS
COMPONENTS
ACTUATORS
a b c d e f g h i j k l m n
FRONT CYLINDER HEAD: anodised aluminium BARREL: extruded and anodised aluminium alloy PISTON ROD: ground chrome steel WORM SCREW: hardened steel BALL SCREW: steel REAR CYLINDER HEAD: anodised aluminium WIPER RING: polyurethane PISTON ROD GASKET: NBR (IP55/ IP65 version only) GUIDE BUSHING: steel strip with bronze and PTFE insert BUFFER: technopolymer MAGNET: plastoferrite GUIDE STRIP: self-lubricated calibrated technopolymer PISTON: alumunium BEARING: oblique with two ball rings
CRITICAL VELOCITY PEAK LOADS The two variables (stroke and motor revs) must meet the conditions in the graph below, otherwise resonance could be generated and affect the system.
Motor revs [1/min]
With vertical installations, the following load conditions applied to the piston rod must be met.
Stroke [mm]
Stroke [mm]
Radial loads can be applied to the piston rod. They must not exceed the values in the table above, otherwise the guides on the piston rod and piston will be subjected to excessive wear.
1-250
The graph shows the direct correspondence between the number of turns (1/min) and the translation speed of the stem (mm/s). In any case all the other conditions and limitations of each specific cylinder will have to be complied.
DRIVE TORQUE AS A FUNCTION OF THE AXIAL LOAD APPLIED TO THE PISTON ROD
32
Motor torque [Nm]
3 2.5 2 1.5 1 0.5 0 0 400 800 1200 1600 2000 2400
50
Motor torque [Nm]
4.5 4 3.5 3 2.5 2 1.5 1 0.5 0 0 400 800 1200 1600 2000 2400 2800 3200 3600
63
Motor torque [Nm]
5.5 5 4.5 4 3.5 2.5 2 1.5 1 0.5 0 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 3
50
Mean axial load [N]
2800 2400 2000 1600 1200 800 400 0 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000
1-251
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
63
Mean axial load [N]
4500 4000 3500 3000
2500 2000 1500 1000 500 0 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000
Life characteristics can vary considerably from those indicated in the graphs due to different operating conditions (radial loads, temperature, lubrication status, etc.). LUBRICATION DIAGRAMS LUBRICATION OF VERSION WITH NON-ROTATING PISTON ROD Retract the piston rod towards the rear head. The piston rod/piston/ ball screw/system must rest against the buffer of the rear head Unscrew the cap on the lubricator port (see note 1 to the drawing on page 1-253) Screw the lubricating pin (see accessory on page 1-259) into the thread. Make sure you enter the corresponding hole in the piston below Pump grease (code 9910506) in 4-5 times using a suitable lubricator Unscrew the lubricating pin and make the piston rod perform four complete strokes. The piston rod should end up in the initial (retracted) position Repeat the last two operations The operation of re-greasing will have to be repeated every 200 km, approximately.
LUBRICATION OF VERSION WITHOUT NON-ROTATING PISTON ROD Extend the piston rod completely. The piston rod/piston/ball screw/ system must rest against the buffer of the front head Unscrew the cap on the lubricator port (see note 1 to the drawing on page 1-253) Screw the lubricating pin (see accessory on page 1-259) into the thread. Make sure you enter the corresponding hole in the piston below. Pump grease (code 9910506) in 4-5 times using a suitable lubricator Unscrew the lubricating pin and make the piston rod perform four complete strokes. The piston rod should end up in the initial (extended) position Repeat the last two operations The operation of re-greasing will have to be repeated every 200 km, approximately.
1-252
DIMENSIONS
DIMENSIONS OF SINGLE CYLINDERS
32 50 63
B (d11) 30 40 45
B1 7 7 9
B2 19.5 28 34.5
C1 16 25 25
CH1 17 21 24
CH2 17 24 26
CH3 6 8 8
D (f7) 20 25 30
D1 (h7) 8 10 12
D2 32 50 63
D4 (h7) 3 3 3
E 46 64.5 75.5
F 22 32 32
G 26 30 32
G1 26 30 32
H 9 9 9
32 50 63
L2 23 24 34
L3 27 28.4 39.5
MM 19 24 29
RT M6 M8 M8
VA 3 5.5 5.5
WH 26 37 37
1-253
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
Size
32
STEPPING
50 63
BRUSHLESS STEPPING
Code for cylinder complete with motor 371032_ _ _ _ _ _2200 371032_ _ _ _ _ _2220 371032_ _ _ _ _ _1110 371032_ _ _ _ _ _1120 371032_ _ _ _ _ _1121 371050_ _ _ _ _ _2330 371063_ _ _ _ _ _1450
Code for motor mounted on the cylinder 37M2200000 37M2220000 37M1110000 37M1120000 37M1120001 37M2330000 37M1450000
Motor torque [Nm] 0.64 1.27 0.8 1.2 1.2 2.39 6.7
B 60 60 56 56 56 80 85.5
L1 62 62 45 45 45 77.4 63.5
L3 15 15 12 12 12 35 16
Size 50
Code for cylinder complete with motor 371050_ _ _ _ _ _1430 371050_ _ _ _ _ _1440
B 83 83
B1 86 86
L1 61.4 61.4
L2 62 92.2
L3 25 25
Size 50 63
Code for cylinder complete with motor 371050_ _ _ _ _ _2220 371063_ _ _ _ _ _2330
Coupling flange 60 80
B 74.5 94
B1 60 80
L1 61.4 78.5
L2 95.5 107.3
L3 25 25
1-254
Size
Motor type
STEPPING 32 63 STEPPING
Code for cylinder Code for motor Motor complete with motor mounted on torque the cylinder [Nm] 371032_ _ _ _ _ _1110 37M1110000 0.8 371032_ _ _ _ _ _1120 37M1120000 1.2 371032_ _ _ _ _ _1121 37M1120001 1.2 371063_ _ _ _ _ _1450 37M1450000 6.7
B2
B3
B4
B5
BG
L1
L2
L3
L4
TG
RT
VA
62 62 62 92
15 46 15 46 15 46 17 75.5
49 49 49 70
M6 M6 M6 M8
4 4 4 4
Size
Motor type
50
STEPPING
Code for cylinder Code for motor Motor complete with motor mounted on the torque cylinder [Nm] 371050_ _ _ _ _ _1430 37M1430000 2.4 371050_ _ _ _ _ _1440 37M1440000 4.2
B B1 (d11)
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6 BG
L1
L2
L3
TG
RT
VA
80 83
86 86
4 4
Code for cylinder Code for motor Motor complete with motor mounted on the torque cylinder [Nm] 32 BRUSHLESS 371032_ _ _ _ _ _2200 37M2200000 0.64 371032_ _ _ _ _ _2220 37M2220000 1.27
Coupling flange 60 60
B B1 (d11)
B2
B3
B4
B5
BG
L1
L2
L3
L4
TG
RT
VA
30 128.5 62 30 128.5 62
31 31
67.5 67.5
60 60
15 15
46 46
49 49
69.5 95.5
50 50
51 51
32.5 M6 32.5 M6
4 4
1-255
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
Size
50 63
Code for cylinder Code for motor Motor complete with motor mounted on the torque cylinder [Nm] BRUSHLESS 371050_ _ _ _ _ _2220 37M2220000 1.27 BRUSHLESS 371063_ _ _ _ _ _2330 37M2330000 2.39
Motor type
Coupling flange 60 80
B (d11)
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
BG
L1
L2
L3
TG
RT
VA
40 159.5 79 45 179.5 92
39.5 80 46 87.5
60 80
17 17
64.5 75.5
59 95.5 61 70 107.3 72
46.5 56.5
M8 M8
4 4
Size
50
Code for cylinder Code for motor Motor complete with motor mounted on the torque cylinder [Nm] BRUSHLESS 371050_ _ _ _ _ _2330 37M2330000 2.39
Motor type
Coupling flange 80
B B1 (d11)
B2
B3
B4
B5
BG
L1
L2
L3
L4
TG
RT
VA
40 159.5 79 39.5 80
80
17 64.5 59 107.3 61
64 46.5 M8
NOTES
1-256
5 6 7 8
0 STD
version available for all STEPPING and BRUSHLESS motors, all sizes. version IP55 available for STEPPING motors, for only the sizes 50 and 63 all the motors. For 32 only for motor code 37M1120001; version IP65 available for BRUSHLESS motors, all sizes.
1-257
ACTUATORS
FOOT - MODEL A
ACTUATORS
32 50 63
AB 7 9 9
AH 32 45 50
AO 11 15 15
AT 4 4 6
AU 24 32 32
TR 32 45 50
E 45 45 75
32 50 63
UB 45 60 70
CB 26 32 40
FL 22 27 32
CD 10 12 16
MR 10 12 16
L 12 15 20
32 50 63
EW 26 32 40
FL 22 27 32
MR 11 13 17
CD 10 12 16
L 12 15 20
32 50 63
DL 22 27 32
MS 16 19 24
L 12 15 20
CX 10 12 16
EX 14 16 21
32 50 63
X (min) 63 83 88
X (max) GEARED * * *
TM 50 75 90
TL 12 16 20
TD e 9 12 16 20
TK 22 28 36
UW 65 95 105
1-258
GREASING NEEDLE
GREASE
Code 9910506 Description Grease pipe RHEOLUBE 363 AX1 Weight [g] 400
32 50 63
32 50 63
32 50 63
1-259
ACTUATORS
32 50 63
X 12 19.3 23.6
GUIDE UNIT
ACTUATORS
Bore 32 50 63
Note: The guide units must only be used with anti-rotation cylinders.
32 50 63
Note: The guide units must only be used with anti-rotation cylinders. For technical data and dimensions see page 1-42
* For use when standard sensors do not detect the magnet, e.g. near metal masses. For technical data see page 1-288
1-260
ELECTRIC MOTORS
MOTOR SPECIFICATIONS Motor code Motor type Seal torque (with motor stopped) Coupling flang Base step angle Bipolar current Resistance Inductance Bipolar retaining torque Rotor inertia Theoretical acceleration Back E.M.F. Mass Degree of protection 24VDC drive code
Nm
37M1110000 STEPPING 0.8 NEMA 23 1.80.09 4 0.41 1.6 1.1 21 50000 20 0.65 IP40 37D1221000
STEPPING motor code 37M1120000 + drive code 37D1221000 (24VDC); STEPPING motor code 37M1120000 + drive code 37D1332000 (from 48 to 75VDC)
Motor torque [Nm]
1.40 1.20 1.00 0.80 0.60 0.40 0.20 0 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000
MOTOR SPECIFICATIONS Motor code Motor type Seal torque (with motor stopped) Coupling flang Base step angle Bipolar current Resistance Inductance Bipolar retaining torque Rotor inertia Theoretical acceleration Back E.M.F. Mass Degree of protection 24VDC drive code from 48 to 75VDC drive code
Nm
37M1120000 STEPPING 1.2 NEMA 23 1.80.09 4 0.48 2.2 1.65 36 45800 31 1 IP40 37D1221000 37D1332000
1-261
ELECTRIC MOTORS
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
0.60 0.40 0.20 0 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 5500 6000
MOTOR SPECIFICATIONS Motor code Motor type Seal torque (with motor stopped) Coupling flang Base step angle Bipolar current Resistance Inductance Bipolar retaining torque Rotor inertia Theoretical acceleration Back E.M.F. Mass Degree of protection from 24 to 75VDC drive code
Nm
ELECTRIC MOTORS
37M1120001 STEPPING 1.2 NEMA 23 1.80.09 5.6 0.3 0.85 1.65 36 45800 23 1 IP43 37D1332000
2.00
1.50
1.00
0.50
MOTOR SPECIFICATIONS Motor code Motor type Seal torque (with motor stopped) Coupling flang Base step angle Bipolar current Resistance Inductance Bipolar retaining torque Rotor inertia Theoretical acceleration Back E.M.F. Mass Degree of protection from 48 to 75VDC drive code
Nm
37M1430000 STEPPING 2.4 NEMA 34 1.80.09 6 0.3 1.65 3 145 20600 50 1.5 IP43 37D1332000
STEPPING motor code 37M1440000 + drive code 37D1332000 (from 48 to 75VDC); STEPPING motor code 37M1440000 + drive code 37D1442000 (140VDC)
Motor torque [Nm]
4.50 4.00 3.50 3.00 2.50 2.00 1.50 1.00 0.50 0 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000
MOTOR SPECIFICATIONS Motor code Motor type Seal torque (with motor stopped) Coupling flang Base step angle Bipolar current Resistance Inductance Bipolar retaining torque Rotor inertia Theoretical acceleration Back E.M.F. Mass Degree of protection from 48 to 75VDC drive code 140VDC drive code
Nm
37M1440000 STEPPING 4.2 NEMA 34 1.80.09 6 0.35 2.7 5.6 290 19300 93 2.5 IP43 37D1332000 37D1442000
1-262
STEPPING motor code 37M1450000 + drive code 37D1332000 (from 48 to 75VDC); STEPPING motor code 37M1450000 + drive code 37D1442000 (140VDC)
Motor torque [Nm]
6.50 6.00 5.00 4.00 3.00 2.00 1.00 0 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000
MOTOR SPECIFICATIONS Motor code Motor type Seal torque (with motor stopped) Coupling flang Base step angle Bipolar current Resistance Inductance Bipolar retaining torque Rotor inertia Theoretical acceleration Back E.M.F. Mass Certification Tension disolement Degree of protection from 24 to 75VDC drive code 140VDC drive code
Nm
OVERLOAD CURVES FOR ELECTRIC BRUSHLESS MOTORS The torque used can exceed the nominal torque within the time limits shown in the diagram. Never exceed the maximum torque.
Time (s)
10000
1000
Tempo (s)
100
10
1 0
0.5
1.5
2.5
3.5 4
4.5
TORQUE CURVES / TECHNICAL FEATURES OF ELECTRIC BRUSHLESS MOTORS The following diagrams show the torque delivered by the motor with changing speed (rpm). Each diagram shows two separate curves: NOMINAL TORQUE curve: the nominal torque delivered by the motor with a duty cycle of 100% MAXIMUM TORQUE curve: the torque delivered by the motor with a duty cycle of less than 100%
BRUSHLESS motor code 37M2200000 + drive code 37D2200000 (200W)
Motor torque [Nm]
2.50
2.00
1.50
1.00
0.50
MOTOR SPECIFICATIONS Motor code Motor type Nominal torque Coupling flange (square Nominal power Nominal speed Maximum speed Stall torque Maximum torque Inertia Encoder Mass Degree of protection Drive code Motor-drive connecting cable code 3 metres series R (fixed Motor-drive encoder cable code 3 metres series R (fixed Motor-drive connecting cable code 5 metres series R (fixed Motor-drive encoder cable code 5 metres series R (fixed
37M2200000 BRUSHLESS 0.64 60 200 3000 6000 0.686 2.2 21.9 131072 (17 bit) 0.84 IP65 37D2200000 37C2130000 37C2230000 37C2150000 37C2250000
1-263
ELECTRIC MOTORS
37M1450000 STEPPING 6.7 NEMA 34 1.80.09 6 0.46 3.8 9.2 450 20500 161 4 UL, CSA, CE, RoHS 250VAC (350VDC) IP43 - F 37D1332000 37D1442000
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
ELECTRIC MOTORS
2.50 2.00 1.50 1.00 0.50 0 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000
MOTOR SPECIFICATIONS Motor code Motor type Nominal torque Coupling flange (square Nominal power Nominal speed Maximum speed Stall torque Maximum torque Inertia Encoder Mass Degree of protection Drive code Motor-drive connecting cable code 3 metres series R (fixed Motor-drive encoder cable code 3 metres series R (fixed Motor-drive connecting cable code 5 metres series R (fixed Motor-drive encoder cable code 5 metres series R (fixed
37M2220000 BRUSHLESS 1.27 60 400 3000 6000 1.37 4.8 41.2 131072 (17 bit) 1.3 IP65 37D2400000 37C2130000 37C2230000 37C2150000 37C2150000
MOTOR SPECIFICATIONS Motor code Motor type Nominal torque Coupling flange (square Nominal power Nominal speed Maximum speed Stall torque Maximum torque Inertia Encoder Mass Degree of protection Drive code Motor-drive connecting cable code 3 metres series R (fixed Motor-drive encoder cable code 3 metres series R (fixed Motor-drive connecting cable code 5 metres series R (fixed Motor-drive encoder cable code 5 metres series R (fixed
37M2330000 BRUSHLESS 2.39 80 750 3000 6000 2.55 7.1 182 131072 (17 bit) 1.3 IP65 37D2400000 37C2130000 37C2230000 37C2150000 37C2250000
NOTES
1-264
AXIAL LOAD CURVES AS A FUNCTION OF SPEED (CYLINDER COMPELTE WITH MOTOR AND DRIVE)
N.B.: The load values already take into account the efficiency of the system. 32 with pitch 4 screw, STEPPING motors
Axial load [N]
1600 1400 1200 1000 800 600 400 200 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300
37M1110000 + 37D1221000 (24VDC) 37M1120000 + 37D1221000 (24VDC) 37M1120000 + 37D1332000 (48VDC) 37M1120000 + 37D1332000 (75VDC) 37M1120001 + 37D1332000 (24VDC) 37M1120001 + 37D1332000 (48VDC) 37M1120001 + 37D1332000 (75VDC)
Speed [mm/s]
37M1110000 + 37D1221000 (24VDC) 37M1120000 + 37D1221000 (24VDC) 37M1120000 + 37D1332000 (48VDC) 37M1120000 + 37D1332000 (75VDC) 37M1120001 + 37D1332000 (24VDC) 37M1120001 + 37D1332000 (48VDC) 37M1120001 + 37D1332000 (75VDC)
Speed [mm/s]
37M1430000 + 37D1332000 (48VDC) 37M1430000 + 37D1332000 (75VDC) 37M1440000 + 37D1332000 (48VDC) 37M1440000 + 37D1332000 (75VDC) 37M1440000 + 37D1442000 (140VDC)
Speed [mm/s]
1-265
ELECTRIC MOTORS
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
37M1430000 + 37D1332000 (48VDC) 37M1430000 + 37D1332000 (75VDC) 37M1440000 + 37D1332000 (48VDC) 37M1440000 + 37D1332000 (75VDC) 37M1440000 + 37D1442000 (140VDC)
2000
ELECTRIC MOTORS
1500
1000
500
Speed [mm/s]
37M1430000 + 37D1332000 (48VDC) 37M1430000 + 37D1332000 (75VDC) 37M1440000 + 37D1332000 (48VDC) 37M1440000 + 37D1332000 (75VDC) 37M1440000 + 37D1442000 (140VDC)
Speed [mm/s]
Speed [mm/s]
1-266
1500 1000 500 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450
Speed [mm/s]
Speed [mm/s]
nominal torque 37M2200000 + 37D2200000 (200W) nominal torque 37M2220000 + 37D2400000 (400W) max torque 37M2200000 + 37D2200000 (200W) max torque 37M2220000 + 37D2400000 (400W)
Speed [mm/s]
1-267
ELECTRIC MOTORS
2000
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
ELECTRIC MOTORS
1200 1000 800 600 400 200 0 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900
nominal torque 37M2200000 + 37D2200000 (200W) nominal torque 37M2220000 + 37D2400000 (400W) max torque 37M2200000 + 37D2200000 (200W) max torque 37M2220000 + 37D2400000 (400W)
Speed [mm/s]
nominal torque 37M2220000 + 37D2400000 (400W) nominal torque 37M2330000 + 37D2400000 (750W) max torque 37M2220000 + 37D2400000 (400W) max torque 37M2330000 + 37D2400000 (750W)
Speed [mm/s]
nominal torque 37M2220000 + 37D2400000 (400W) nominal torque 37M2330000 + 37D2400000 (750W) max torque 37M2220000 + 37D2400000 (400W) max torque 37M2330000 + 37D2400000 (750W)
Speed [mm/s]
1-268
2000
nominal torque 37M2220000 + 37D2400000 (400W) nominal torque 37M2330000 + 37D2400000 (750W) max torque 37M2220000 + 37D2400000 (400W) max torque 37M2330000 + 37D2400000 (750W)
1500
1000
500
Speed [mm/s]
nominal torque 37M2330000 + 37D2400000 (750W) max torque 37M2330000 + 37D2400000 (750W)
Speed [mm/s]
nominal torque 37M2330000 + 37D2400000 (750W) max torque 37M2330000 + 37D2400000 (750W)
Speed [mm/s]
1-269
ELECTRIC MOTORS
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
1600
nominal torque 37M2330000 + 37D2400000 (750W) max torque 37M2330000 + 37D2400000 (750W)
1200
ELECTRIC MOTORS
800
400
Speed [mm/s]
2
BLUE YELLOW RED
3 B
H 7 7 10
L3 L4 RT W 0.25 0.25 +0.5/0 0.5 5 1.5 4.5 56 5 1.5 4.5 56 5 1.5 4.5 56
W3 max 26 26 39
W4 0.5 39 39 39
WIRING DIAGRAM
A 1 ORANGE
2
BLUE YELLOW RED
3 B
H 10 10
L1 62 92.2
L2 0.5 30 30
L3 L4 RT W 0.50 0.25 +0.5/0 0.5 4.8 1.5 5.4 82.5 4.8 1.5 5.4 82.5
W3 37 37
1-270
WIRING DIAGRAM
A 1 ORANGE
2
BLUE YELLOW RED
H max 12
L min 305
L1 1 127
L2 0.5 30
L5 50
RT +0.2 5.6
W3 max 27
1 = screened encoder cable length 280 mm 2 = motor cable length 280 mm Motor type BRUSHLESS Motor code 37M2200000 37M2220000 37M2330000 Motor torque [Nm] 0.64 1.27 2.39 Coupling flange 60 60 80 d 0/-0.011 14 14 16 D h7 50 50 70 L 44.6 44.6 54.4 L1 1 69.5 95.5 107.3 L2 1 30 30 40 L3 6 6 8 L4 3 3 3 L5 55 55 55 L6 58 58 58 RT 5.5 5.5 6.6 W 60 60 80 W1 49.5 49.5 63.6
1-271
ELECTRIC MOTORS
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
DRIVES FOR STEPPING MOTORS
The 37D1221000 is a ministep bipolar chopper drive made by RTA Srl. It comes with a STEP & DIRECTION interface for piloting medium-low power two-stage STEPPING motors with four, six or eight terminals. It has a supply voltage range of 45V DC. It comprises an open frame board and comes with separate logic and power screw connectors. It can control STEPPING motors with a nominal current up to 4.4A, the perfect choice for medium-low power applications using small motors.
mm
VDC A pulse/rev
Power connectors Connettori Potenza (AM1 e AM2 o C1) (AM1 and AM2 or C1)
Stepping motor
Shield Schermo Phase B Fase B Fase B Phase -BFase APhase APhase A Fase A GROUND GROUND
-V DC nom -V DC nom +V DC nom +V DC nom
FIL
PE
PE
Trasf
8 6 5 4 3 2 1
1-272
6A 75V DC DRIVE FOR STEPPING MOTORS, CODE 37D1332000 This is a ministep bipolar chopper drive made by RTA Srl. It comes with a STEP & DIRECTION interface for piloting medium-low power two-stage STEPPING motors with four, six or eight terminals. It has a supply voltage range up to 75V DC, compact dimensions and considerable operating flexibilit . It consists of a board housed in a metal box and comes with separate logic and power pull-out screw connectors. It can control STEPPING motors with a nominal current up to 6A, the perfect choice for medium power applications using small and medium-size motors.
mm
VDC A pulse/rev
Stepping motor
C1
PE
C2
10 9 8 7 6 5 Fault Out Step In Dir. In C. O In -
4 3 2 1
PE PE
1-273
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
DRIVES FOR STEPPING MOTORS
This is a ministep bipolar chopper drive made by RTA Srl. It comes with a STEP & DIRECTION interface for piloting medium-high power two-stage STEPPING motors with four, six or eight terminals. It has a supply voltage range up to 140VDC, compact dimensions and considerable operating flexibilit . It consists of a board housed in a metal box. It does not require external ventilation and comes with separate logic and power pull-out screw connectors. It can control STEPPING motors with a nominal current up to 6A, the perfect choice for medium power applications requiring a DC supply.
mm
VDC A pulse/rev
PE
Schermo Shield
1 2 3 4 B BAA - V DC in +V DC
in
5 6 7 8
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
NC Fault
PE PE
MESSA A TERRA Drive chassis earth CHASSIS AZIONAMENTO
1-274
15A DRIVE FOR BRUSHLESS MOTORS, CODE 37D2200000 This drive made by SANYO DENKI is suitable for piloting BRUSHLESS motors. It features compact dimensions and considerable operating flexibilit . It consists of a board housed in a metal box. It comes with pull-out screw connectors for power and plug connectors for logic. It can control BRUSHLESS motors with a nominal current up to 15A.
mm
Code for 3-metre motor-drive connecting cable series R (fixed position Code for 3-metre motor-drive encoder cable series R (fixed position Code for 5-metre motor-drive connecting cable series R (fixed position Code for 5-metre motor-drive encoder cable series R (fixed position Suitable for motors code
1-275
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
DRIVES FOR BRUSHLESS MOTORS
This drive made by RTA Srl is suitable for piloting BRUSHLESS motors. It features compact dimensions and considerable operating flexibilit . It consists of a board housed in a metal box. It comes with pull-out screw connectors for power and plug connectors for logic. It can control BRUSHLESS motors with a nominal current up to 30A. All the system parameters can be configured and controlled usin (optional) R-Set up software.
mm
Code for 3-metre motor-drive connecting cable series R (fixed position Code for 3-metre motor-drive encoder cable series R (fixed position Code for 5-metre motor-drive connecting cable series R (fixed position Code for 5-metre motor-drive encoder cable series R (fixed position Suitable for motors code
1-276
WIRING DIAGRAM FOR BRUSHLESS MOTOR DRIVES a 5-DIGIT DISPLAY and PROGRAMMING KEYPAD: to display and modify parameters and monitor system operation in real time. b PC CONNECTOR: settings and monitoring by PC via RS232 (supplied with configuration software kit c POWER CONNECTOR: 230VAC, single-phase and three-phase (user configurable). Included in the supply. Separate supply section for logic/signal and power electronics. Integrated circuits protecting against overloads and input extra-voltages. d SIGNAL CONNECTOR: pulse-train command (clock + direction; forward + backward pulse; 90 phase difference) or with analogue signal (proportional to speed or torque) 8 inputs and 8 outputs, user configurable. Included in the supply. e CONNECTOR: for external braking resistance (optional) f ENCODER CONNECTOR: compatible with any type of Sanyo Denki encorder g MOTOR POWER CONNECTOR h EARTH CONNECTION Log on to www.metalwork.it to view the instruction manual.
a a
d e g f
f ENCODER CABLE
Code 37C2230000 37C2250000 Description Drive-encoder connecting cable 3 m series R Drive-encoder connecting cable 5 m series R
Under certain operating conditions, such as sudden deceleration with high inertial load, it may be necessary to dissipate externally the reverse energy generated by the motor. The drive indicates this requirement via a specific ala m. Excess energy is dissipated externally via a braking resistance.
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
DRIVES FOR MOTORS
1-278
R-Setup communication software is used for parameter setting and complete control of all functions of the system. Access to parameter configuration can take place at three levels: basic level, standard level, advanced level. The software includes a detailed description of each parameter. In addition to parameter setting R-Setup software can accurately analyse operation of the system via the following functions. Monitor Display: real-time display of all details about the system. Trace Operation: a complete oscilloscope with 4 analogue channels and 4 digital channels. Use to save and print traces and settings. System Analysis: used to study the systems frequency response to identify and correct any mechancal resonance phenomena. JOG modes for speed (Jogging Operation) and position (Operation Pulse Feed Jogging) are also available.
GRAPHIC MONITOR Thanks to the integrated oscilloscope function, some important system parameters, such as speed and torque, can be displayed on the PC monitor. Data can be downloaded and saved in compatible Excel format. The time setting range is 10 ms to 2 s. Single values acquired and displayed can be read using the cursor.
NOTES
v max
stroke
td Formula s (ta + td) t2 v max ta Ma 1000 F sullo stelo | Fp + Fe + Fi + F | | Fp + Fe + F | | Fp + Fe - Fi + F | F sullo stelo | - Fp - Fe + Fi + F | | - Fp - Fe + F | | - Fp - Fe - Fi + F | Example 200 = 250 (0.2 + 0.2) 12 250 = 1250 0.2 60 1250 = 75 1000 | 590 + 40 + 75 + 0 | = 705 | 590 + 40 + 0 | = 630 | 590 + 40 - 75 + 0 | = 555
a Fi Ftot
Piston rod acceleration and deceleration mm/s2 Force of inertia of the mass N
Total force N - In acceleration - At constant v - In deceleration The calculation assumes the load is raised. In descent it would be: Ftot Total force N - In acceleration - At constant v - In deceleration
1-279
When choosing an electric cylinder, it is necessary to follow a set procedure. First you need to determine the following for each stage of the operating cycle (piston rod extension, any pause time, retraction, and so on): - piston rod stroke - stroke time available - cylinder inclination with respect to the horizontal axis - mass to move - any coefficient of friction between mass and su face - external forces to overcome Using these values you can choose one or more cylinders suitable for the purpose based on piston rod thrust and load velocity. When a force needs to be exerted with the piston rod still (e.g. to create a locking vice), a BRUSHLESS motor must be chosen, because STEPPING motors are not suitable. Both BRUSHLESS and STEPPING motors are suitable in other cases. Once the electric cylinder (including motor and drive) has been chosen, you can make a detailed assessment of it based on the inertia of the moving part of the cylinder and the motor that are not known beforehand.
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
ta
td
nominal torque 37M2200000 + 37D2200000 (200W) nominal torque 37M2220000 + 37D2400000 (400W) max torque 37M2200000 + 37D2200000 (200W) max torque 37M2220000 + 37D2400000 (400W)
Velocity [mm/s]
150
200
250
300
V max
BRUSHLESS motors can, for short periods, deliver torques exceeding nominal torques. The diagram below shows the ratio of maximum current and nominal input current (and hence maximum torque and nominal torque) and the duration of the possible overload. Time (s)
10000
1000
Tempo (s)
100
10
1 0
0.5
1.5
2.5
3.5 4
4.5
Formula F available > Fp + Fe + Fi + F (for a short period, upper curve) F available > Fp + Fe + F (at steady rate, lower cur ve) v available > v max
1-280
16 9.1113
49.1936 6.4849
5 12.4043
86.9290 0.6333
63 10 14.8767
96.6652 2.5332
20 23.5427
116.3671 10.1327
Denomination data J tot Moment of inertia of the moving parts of the cylinder J tot Moment of inertia for acceleration of the mass reduced at the motor J mot. Moment of inertia of the motor J rid Total moment of inertia reduced at the motor C acc Torque required to overcome inertia during acceleration Weights
Worm screw pitch (p) Weight at stroke 0 Additional weight per mm of stroke Moving mass at stroke 0 (non-rotating version) Additional moving mass per mm of stroke
Formula J0 + J1 J2 M
s 1000
Example 1.3 + 10.4 200 = 3.4 1000 0.4 60 = 24 41.2 3.4 + 24 + 41.2 = 68.6 68.6 1963 = 0.13 1 10E6 50 10 2084
6.56
mm g g g g
12
973 3.96 353 1.25
5 2043
6.62
16 2086
6.55
5 2942
6.25
63 10 3209
6.32
20 3056
6.32
246
629
696
1.84
703
956
1215
1.98
1067
The weight of the moving parts of the cylinder (piston rod, piston, etc.) that the cylinder has to support must also be taken into consideration.
Denomination data Mc Mass of the components Fpc Weight of the components C car Torque required to overcome friction, loads and external forces (consider a system efficiency of 0.8) C tot Total torque required
Unit of measurement kg N Nm
Example 0.246 + 0.00125 300 = 0.6 0.5 9.81 sine 90 = 4.9 4 (590 + 4.9 + 40 + 0) = 0.4 2 0.8 1000 0.13 + 0.4 = 053
Nm
C acc + C car
At this stage just check that: - the motor can deliver C tot during acceleration (short period) - the motor can deliver C car during movement at a constant velocity
nominal torque 37M2220000 + 37D2400000 (400W) maximum torque 37M2220000 + 37D2400000 (400W)
Unit of measurement Nm Nm
Formula C available > C tot (for a short period, upper curve) C available > C car (at steady rate, lower curve)
1-281
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
Denomination data M Mass to move s Displacement t Total time ta Acceleration time td Deceleration time Angle of inclination Coefficient of frictio Fp Weight force F Friction Fe Other external forces
Unit of measurement kg mm s s s N N N
Formula
Example 60 300 2 0.2 0.2 0 0.1 60 9.81 sine 0 = 0 60 9.81 0.1 cos 0 = 60 40
v max
corsa
ta Denomination data v max Maximum piston rod velocity Unit of measurement mm/s
td Formula s (ta + td) t2 v max ta Ma 1000 F on the piston rod | Fp + Fe + Fi + F | | Fp + Fe + F | | Fp + Fe - Fi + F | Example 300 = 167 (0.2 + 0.2) 22 167 = 835 0.2 60 835 = 50 1000 | 0 + 40 + 50 + 60 | = 150 | 0 + 40 + 60 | = 100 | 0 + 40 - 50 + 60 | = 50
a Fi Ftot
Piston rod acceleration and deceleration mm/s2 Force of inertia Total force - In acceleration - At constant v - In deceleration N N
ta
td
37M1110000 + 37D1221000 (24VDC) 37M1120000 + 37D1221000 (24VDC) 37M1120000 + 37D1332000 (48VDC) 37M1120000 + 37D1332000 (75VDC) 37M1120001 + 37D1332000 (24VDC) 37M1120001 + 37D1332000 (48VDC) 37M1120001 + 37D1332000 (75VDC)
V max
Velocity [mm/s]
1-282
32
Worm screw pitch mm 4 12 J0 at stroke 0 kgmm2 2.4309 1.3262 J1 for metre of stroke kgmm2/m 10.4223 17.8468 0.4053 4.0858 J2 for kg of load kgmm2/kg The moment of inertia of total mass Jtot is: Jtot = J0 + J1 x stroke [m] + J2 x load [kg] 5
5.3455
35.2305 0.6333
16 9.1113
49.1936 6.4849
12.4043
86.2990 0.6333
63 10 14.8767
96.6652 2.5332
20 23.5427
116.3671 10.1327
Denomination data J tot Moment of inertia of the moving parts of the cylinder J tot Moment of inertia for acceleration of the mass reduced at the motor J mot. Moment of inertia of the motor J rid Total moment of inertia reduced at the motor C acc Torque required to overcome inertia during acceleration Weights
Worm screw pitch (p) Weight at stroke 0 Additional weight per mm of stroke Moving mass at stroke 0 (non-rotating version Additional moving mass per mm of stroke
Formula J0 + J1 J2 M
s 1000
Example 1.3 + 10.4 300 = 4.4 1000 0.4 60 = 24 36 4.4 + 24 + 36 = 64.4 64.4 1311 = 0.1 1 10E6 50 63
16 2086 6.55 703 5 2942 6.25 956 10 3209 6.32 1215 1.98 20 3056 6.32 1067
mm g g g g
The weight of the moving parts of the cylinder (piston rod, piston, etc.) that the cylinder has to support must also be taken into consideration.
Denomination data Mc Mass of the components Fpc Weight of the components C car Torque required to overcome friction, loads and external forces (consider a system efficiency of 0.8 C tot Total torque required
Unit of measurement kg N Nm
Formula Mc 9.81 sen pitch (Fp + Fpc + Fe + F) 2 0.8 1000 C acc + C car
Example 0.246 + 0.00125 300 = 0.6 0.6 9.81 sine 0 = 0 4 (0 + 0 + 40 + 60) = 0.1 2 0.8 1000 0.2
Nm
At this stage just check that the motor can deliver C tot during acceleration (up to maximum speed).
n max
2500
3000
3500
4000
4500
5000 5500
6000
Unit of measurement Nm
1-283
ACTUATORS
VERIFICATION OF THE RECIRCULATING BALL SCREW AND THE BEARING Verification of the recirculating ball screw takes into consideration the maximum axial load and the weighted average axial load The peak value of axial load in a movement cycle must not exceed the static axial load Fo shown on the data sheet. The average axial load in a movement cycle must not exceed the dynamic axial load F shown on the data sheet. If these conditions are not met, the recirculating ball screw and/or the bearing will be subject to greater wear and hence a shorter life. The calculation of average axial load takes into consideration movements at constant speed during the cycle (nil acceleration and deceleration) and the respective axial loads on the piston rod. The Fm value thus calculated is used in the diagrams on pages 1-251 and 1-252 Life characteristics as a function of the mean axial load to determine the expected life of the cylinder. Fm = 3
ACTUATORS
SF
VX Vm x
q 100
Fm = 3
Fx13 x
VX1 Vm
q1 100
+ Fx23 x
+ Fx33 x
+ ...
Fx = Axial load at stage x Fm = Mean forward axial load Fo = Static axial load of the screw q = Time segment Vx = Speed in the phase x Vm = Average speed
1-284
PAGE 1-286
PAGE 1-290
P SENSOR TESTER
PAGE 1-291
1-285
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
Description Reed sensor DSM2-C525 HS E.HALL PNP sensor DSM3-N225 E. HALL NPN sensor DSM3-M225
m mm2
DC
Version NPN
AC
Version PNP
1-286
W0950000253 W0950014360
12 to 100 12 to 100
m mm2
DC
Version NPN
AC
Version PNP
1-287
ACTUATORS
Code W0950000252
Bore 12 to 100
Version Reed connector + bracket - CB Hall PNP connector + bracket - CB Hall NPN connector + bracket - CB
ACTUATORS
* For use on the rodless cylinder guide V 25 or when standard sensors do not detect the magnet, e.g. near metal masses.
TECHNICAL DATA
Type of contact Switch Supply voltage (Ub) Power Voltage variation Voltage drop Input current Output current Switching frequency Short-circuit protection Over-voltage suppression Polarity inversion protection EMC LED display Magnetic sensitivity Repeatability Degree of protection (EN 60529) Vibration and shock resistance Operating life Temperature range Sensor capsule material 2.5 m/2 m connecting cable Connecting cable with M8x1 Wire NO. Category ATEX Certification REED N.O. 10 to 30 AC/DC 3 (peak valve = 6) # 100 # 400 EN 60 947-5-2 Yellow 2.8 mT 25% 1.9 mT 20% (for HS) # 0.1 mT IP 67 30 g, 11 ms, 10 to 55 Hz, 1 mm 107 impulses -25 to +75 PA66 + PA6I/6T PVC; 2 x 0.12 mm2 Polyurethane; 2 x 0.14 mm2 2 HALL EFFECT N.O. PNP 10 to 30 DC 3 # 10% of Ub #2 # 10 # 100 # 5000 Yes Yes Yes EN 60 947-5-2 Yellow 2.8 mT 25% 2.1 mT 20% (for HS) # 0.1 mT IP 67 30 g, 11 ms, 10 to 55 Hz, 1 mm 109 impulses -25 to +75 PA66 + PA6I/6T PVC; 3 x 0.14 mm2 Polyurethane; 3 x 0.14 mm2 3 -
ATEX HALL EFFECT N.O. PNP 18 to 30 DC # 1.7 # 10% of Ub # 2.2 # 10 # 70 1000 Yes Yes Yes EN 60 947-5-2 Yellow 2.6 # 0.1 mT (Ub and ta fixed IP 68, IP 69K 30 g, 11 ms, 10 to 55 Hz, 1 mm 109 impulses -20 to +45 PA PVC; 3 x 0.12 mm2 3 II 3G Ex nA op is IIC T4 Gc X II 3D Ex tc IIIC T135C Dc IP67 X
V W V mA mA Hz
WIRING DIAGRAM
1-288
SENSOR 4
1-289
ACTUATORS
ACCESSORIES T-SLOT
ACTUATORS
Code W0950000160
ACCESSORIES T-SLOT
SLOTTED FIXINGPLATE
Code 0950003000 Description Fixing block Weight [g] 2
NOTES
1-290
SENSOR TESTER
This sensor tester features the following: a green light and acoustic signal indicating correct operation sensors can be checked without having to be disassembled M8 and M12 connections, and terminal board for direct connection to the wires PNP or NPN switching button 9V battery power supply automatic switch-off
TECHNICAL DATA
Container material Degree of protection Connections Additional connections Power supply Internal voltage Green light Yellow light Red light PA 6.6 blue IP00 M8 and M12 plug-socket type with 40 cm cable 3 terminals for wire connection 9V DC (battery type 6LR61) 15V DC tester switched on sensor in operation battery fla
COMPONENTS a b c d e f g h i CONTAINER (PA 6.6 blue) START BUTTON WIRE CONNECTION + (brown) WIRE CONNECTION (blue) OUTPUT CONNECTION (black) PNP/NPN SELECTOR M8x1 CONNECTOR M12x1 CONNECTOR LED COVER
Code W0950060000
1-291
SENSOR TESTER
ACTUATORS
DISTRIBUTORS
DISTRIBUTORS
P P P
PAGE
2-2
DISTRIBUTORS
2-1
VALVES SUMMARY
PAGE 2-4
PAGE 2-8
PAGE 2-10
DISTRIBUTORS
P VALVES, SERIES 70
PAGE 2-12
VALVES SUmm Ar y
PAGE 2-38
P VALVES, NAMUR
PAGE 2-43
PAGE 2-46
PAGE 2-47
PAGE 2-50
PAGE 2-56
PAGE 2-58
PAGE 2-63
2-2
PAGE 2-66
P VALVES
PAGE 2-68
P VALVES MACH 11
PAGE 2-74
P VALVES MACH 16
PAGE 2-80
PAGE 2-87
PAGE -100 2
PAGE -101 2
PAGE -107 2
PAGE -114 2
PAGE -122 2
PAGE -123 2
PAGE -126 2
2-3
VALVES SUmmAry
DISTRIBUTORS
DISTRIBUTORS
minivalves with 3/2 NO NC poppet, Installation in any position Push-in fitting for pipe 4 mm and m5 on the valve body Low actuation force r apid, accurate signal mechanical actuation The 2 places adapter allows manual actuation of 1 or 2 VmE valves with manual 22 panel actuators. Thus it is possible to obtain 3/2, 5/2, 5/3 open centre and 5/3 pressure centre pneumatic functions. On request, it is possible to place a NC-NO electric switch next to VmE valve for mixed solenoid/pneumatic signals.
TECHNICAL DATA
Valve fittin port Fluid Type Versions Operators: mechanical manual Operating pressure Operating temperature range Nominal diameter Conductance C Critical ratio b Flow rate at 6 Bar DP 0.5 Bar Flow rate at 6 Bar DP 1 Bar Actuation force Plunger at 6 Bar r ecommended lubricant Installation Compatibility with oils Push-in fittin for pipe diam. 4 and m5 (axial or side) Filtered air without lubrication; lubrication, if used, must be continuous With poppet mechanical and manual With Plunger Plunger for wall-mounting roller lever Unidirectional roller lever Depending on the type of actuation panel selected 0.5 to 10 -10 to +60 2.5 16.5 0.03 35 60 8 ISO and UNI FD22 In any position Please refer to page 6-7 of the tecnical documentation
COMPONENTS a VALVE BODy: Aluminium b BUTTON: chemically nickel-plated brass c DISTANCE PLATES: Brass d GASKETS: NBr e PUSH-IN FITTING CAr Tr IDGES: stainless steel, brass and plastic f SPr INGS: stainless steel
2-4
m5
m5
Weight [g] 42 36
Weight [g] 34 34
Weight [g] 42 36
Weight [g] 34 34
Weight [g] 54 48
Weight [g] 46 46
2-5
DISTRIBUTORS
DISTRIBUTORS
Weight [g] 60 54
Weight [g] 52 52
Weight [g] 58 52
Weight [g] 50 50
Weight [g] 56 50
Weight [g] 52 50
2-6
MANUAL VME VALVES ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM NOTES: For 5/2 pneumatic operation, assemble a 3/2 NC plunger valve and a 3/2 NO one on the adapter. For 5/3 pneumatic operation with open centres, assemble two 3/2 NC plunger valves on the adapter. For 5/3 pneumatic operation with pressure centres, assemble two 3/2 NO plunger valves on the adapter.
NEW
OLD
ORDERING CODES
Symbol Reference a Code W3501000100 W3501000111 W3501001101 W3501001111 W3501000101 W3501000110 W3501001100 W3501001110 0351000050 W0351000015 W0351000011 W0351000030 W0351000031 W0351000032 W0351000033 W0351000034 W0351000035 W0351000036 W0351000037 W0351000016 W0351000018 W0351000013 W0351000017 W0351000014 W0351000049 W0351000050 W0351000021 W0351000056 Description 3/2 NC Axial fitting 4 3/2 NC Axial fitting m5 3/2 NC Side fitting 4 3/2 NC Side fitting m5 3/2 NO Axial fitting 4 3/2 NO Axial fitting m5 3/2 NO Side fitting 4 3/2 NO Side fitting m5 2 places adaptor thickness 6.8 mm r ed handler with horizontally pivoted lever Fat push button + 2 red/black coloured disks u Bistable fat push button without disk Black selector short lever at 2 positions with return Black selector short lever at 2 positions Black selector short lever at 3 positions with return Black selector short lever at 3 positions Black selector long lever at 2 positions with return Black selector long lever at 2 positions Black selector long lever at 3 positions with return Black selector long lever at 3 positions 2 positions key selector with extractable key in 2 positions 2 positions key selector with extractable key in 0 r ed mushroom-head push button 40 Black mushroom-head push button 40 r ed mushroom-head push button with lock 40 : reducer from 30 to 22.5 mm s Adapter for bore 30 G2326 : Key for ESC selectors Green disk for push button d Weight [g] 42 36 34 34 42 36 34 34 5 25 15 20 20 20 20 26 26 26 26 50 50 27 27 29
b c d e e f f g h i u It cant be supplied. As working replaced by selector with bistable short lever at 2 positions e. : Usable only with technopolymer body selectors. s Usable only with metal body selectors. j k l
2-7
DISTRIBUTORS
The valves series PEV with pedal are available in a wide range: 5/2 1/4 monostable and bistable with guarded pedal 3/2 m5 monostable, pedal not guarded 3/2 4 monostable, pedal not guarded 3/2 m5 in monostable and bistable configuratio with guarded pedal 3/2 4 in monostable and bistable configuratio with guarded pedal
DISTRIBUTORS
TECHNICAL DATA
Valve fittin port Type Operating pressure Operating temperature range Nominal diameter Conductance C Critical ratio b Flow rate at 6.3 bar DP 0.5 bar Flow rate at 6.3 bar DP 1 bar Fluid Compatibility with oils bar mpa psi C mm Nl/min bar bar/bar Nl/min Nl/min 4 mono/ bistable guarded monostable not guarded m5 1/4 monostable not guarded mono/ bistable guarded mono/ bistable guarded 2.5 to 10 0.25 to 1 36 to 145 10 + 60 2.5 2.5 7.5 16.5 16.5 264.26 0.03 0.03 0.32 60 60 640 95 95 840 Filtered air without lubrication; lubrication, if used, must be continuous Please refer to page 6-7 of the tecnical documentation
FLOW CHARTS 1/4 Flow rates (NI/min) Flow rates (NI/min) m5/ 4 mm
KEY TO CODES
PEV FAMILY PEV valve with pedal F DIMENSIONS 1/4 3 0 m5 4 F 3 FUNCTION 3/2 3 5 5/2 PE OPERATORS 14 pedal operated C RESETTING (12) mechanical springs mechanical block bistable WP FURTHER DETAILS WP not guarded PR guarded
PE
S C B
2-9
DISTRIBUTORS
DISTRIBUTORS
The two hand safety valve generates an output signal only if two synchronised pneumatic input signals are received. If one input signal is interrupted, the output signal is interrupted as well. The most common application involves connecting a manual button-controlled valve to each of the inputs and using the output signal as a start-of-cycle control for a pneumatically-operated machine. The two hand safety valve can be secured with through screws or a DIN bar adaptor. The complete pushbutton panel includes the dual manual control valve, two manual pushbuttons, and an emergency stop valve, all housed in a metal box to be mounted on a wall or stand. The pushbutton housing is supplied on request for anyone wishing to get a personalised pneumatic connection or drill holes to secure the unit.
TECHNICAL DATA
Compressed air couplings Fluid Version Standard mm Push-in fittin for 4 pipe Filtered, unlubricated compressed air, max 50 mm Single-control Complete pushbutton panel EN574 type IIIA, TV approvated according to 2006/42/EC Certifie TV-A-mHF/mG/10-5159 (code W3605000001) Certifie Bureau Veritas CV 003-12-2011 (code 0227700000) 0.4 l 0.05 pneuamtic spring operated 2.5 to 8 - 10 to +60 2.7 85 In any direction Please refer to page 6-7 of the tecnical documentation
Synchronisation, max. time between two signals De-activation time, with pipe L = max 1000 mm Actuation r eset Operating pressure Temperature range Nominal diameter Flow rate at 6 bar (0.6 mpa - 87 psi) DP 1 bar (0.1mPa -1.45 psi) mounting position Compatibility with oils
s s
bar C mm Nl/min
Materials Body: technopolymer Internal parts: brass and technopolymer Gaskets: NBr Spring: alloy steel
34.5
25.7
56
14.8
7.6
a b
PUSHBUTTON HOUSING
Code W3120000212 Description Pushbutton housing
100
2 2
400
100
2-10
30
3.8
5.5
Code 0227700000
MAIN COMPONENTS Code Description W3605000001 Dual manual safety valve W0351000011 monostable protected button - black disk W0351000014 Emergency stop button W3501000100 VmE1-01 NC 4 W3501001100 VmE2-01 NO 4 0351000050 Valve-button connecting base r L10 4 2L11001
Quantity 1 2 1 2 1 3 2
ACCESSORIES
CONNECTION BRACKETS ON THE BAR (DIN EN50022) ~50
~50 14
~9
~9
14
2-11
DISTRIBUTORS
VALVES SERIES 70
This is metal Works full range. Available in three sizes: 1/8, 1/4, 1/2. Three versions: 3/2; 5/2; 5/3, four different types of actuation (mechanical, manual, pneumatic and electric). Series 70 valves can be used for a wide range of applications as they can be mounted in line, on the wall, on the cylinder using a special bracket, or in series on a multiple or manifold base.
DISTRIBUTORS
TECHNICAL DATA
Thread on the valve ports Operating pressure: monostable bistable asserved minimum pilot pressure Operating temperature range Nominal diameter Conductance C Critical ratio b Flow rate at 6 bar DP 0.5 bar Flow rate at 6 bar DP 1 bar Installation Fluid r ecommended lubricant maximum coil nut torque Compatibility with oils bar bar bar bar C mm Nl/min bar bar/bar Nl/min Nl/min
1/8 1/8
1/4 1/4
1/2 1/2
Nm
2.5 to 10 1 to 10 vacuum to 10 2.5 10 to +60 5 7.5 15 121.43 264.26 971.43 0.32 0.27 0.43 400 750 3200 550 1100 4600 In any position (vertical assembly is not recommended for bistable valves subjected to vibration) Filtered air without lubrication; lubrication, if used, must be continuous ISO e UNI FD 22 1 Please refer to page 6-7 of the tecnical documentation
COMPONENTS a VALVE BODy: Aluminium b CONTr OL/END CAP: Hostaform c SPOOL: chemically nickel-plated aluminium d DISTANCE PLATES: plastic e GASKETS: NBr f PISTONS: Hostaform g PISTON GASKET: NBr h FILTEr : sintered bronze i SPr INGS: special steel j OPEr ATOr : Brass pipe - Stainless steel core
2-12
FLOW CHARTS Flow rates (Nl/min) VALVES SEr IES 70, 1/8
Pressures (bar)
Pressures (bar)
DISTRIBUTORS
Vacuum to 10 2.5 to 10 -10 to +60 15 5 7.5 121.43 264.26 971.43 0.32 0.27 0.43 400 750 3200 550 1100 4600
DISTRIBUTORS
KEY TO CODES
MAV FAMILY MAV manual valves 2 DIMENSIONS 1/8 2 3 1/4 4 1/2 3 FUNCTION 3 3/2 5 5/2 6 5/3 8 2 x 3/2 PP OPERATORS 14 PP drawer VL axial lever LE 90 lever BRE arranged for manual panel actuators S RESETTING (12) pneumatic/ mechanical springs* mechanical springs bistable differential stable for 5/3 NC FURTHER DETAILS NC normally closed NO normally open OO no indication CC closed centres OC open centres PC pressure centres
A S B D O
*on demand
Symbol
Symbol
2-14
Symbol
Symbol
Symbol
Abbrev. mAV 26 LES CC mAV 26 LES OC mAV 26 LES PC mAV 26 LEO CC mAV 26 LEO OC mAV 26 LEO PC
2-15
Code 7010001400
Symbol
Code 7010001700
DISTRIBUTORS
DISTRIBUTORS
Symbol
Symbol
Symbol
Code 7010001800
Abbrev. mAV 23 Br E NC
Symbol
Code 7010001900
Abbrev. mAV 25 Br E OO
2-16
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM FOR PILOT-ASSISTED HAND-OPERATED VALVES SERIES 70 WITH PANEL ACTUATORS
NEW
OLD
ORDERING CODES
Symbol Reference a a b c d e e f f g h i u It cant be supplied. As working replaced by selector with bistable short lever at 2 positions e. : Usable only with technopolymer body selectors. s Usable only with metal body selectors. j k l Code 7010001800 7010001900 0351000050 W0351000015 W0351000011 W0351000030 W0351000031 W0351000032 W0351000033 W0351000034 W0351000035 W0351000036 W0351000037 W0351000016 W0351000018 W0351000013 W0351000017 W0351000014 W0351000049 W0351000050 W0351000021 W0351000056 Description Pilot-assisted plunger 3/2, 1/8 Pilot-assisted plunger 5/2, 1/8 2 places adaptor thickness 6.8 mm r ed handler with horizontally pivoted lever Fat push button + 2 red/black coloured disks u Bistable fat push button without disk Black selector short lever at 2 positions with return Black selector short lever at 2 positions Black selector short lever at 3 positions with return Black selector short lever at 3 positions Black selector long lever at 2 positions with return Black selector long lever at 2 positions Black selector long lever at 3 positions with return Black selector long lever at 3 positions 2 positions key selector with extractable key in 2 positions 2 positions key selector with extractable key in 0 r ed mushroom-head push button 40 Black mushroom-head push button 40 r ed mushroom-head push button with lock 40 : reducer from 30 to 22.5 mm s Adapter for bore 30 G2326 : Key for ESC selectors Green disk for push button d Weight [g] 124 150 5 25 15 20 20 20 20 26 26 26 26 50 50 27 27 29
2-17
DISTRIBUTORS
DISTRIBUTORS
Symbol
Symbol
Symbol
Code 7020001400
Symbol
Code 7020001700
2-18
Symbol
Symbol
NOTES
2-19
DISTRIBUTORS
DISTRIBUTORS
KEY TO CODES
MEV FAMILY MEV mechanically operated valves 2 DIMENSIONS 1/8 2 3 FUNCTION 3 3/2 5 5/2 T A OPERATORS 14 plunger bidirectional roller unidirectional roller sensitive plunger sensitive roller sensitive aerial frontal roller lever S RESETTING (12) mechanical springs pneumatic/mechanical spring* NC FURTHER DETAILS NC normally closed OO 5/2
TA BR UR TS RS AS LL
S A
*on demand
Symbol
Code 7001000100
Weight [g] 88
Symbol
Code 7001000110
2-20
Symbol
Code 7001000500
Abbrev. mEV 23 Br S NC
Symbol
Code 7001000510
Abbrev. mEV 25 Br S OO
Symbol
Code 7001000600
Abbrev. mEV 23 Ur S NC
Symbol
Code 7001000610
Abbrev. mEV 25 Ur S OO
Symbol
Code 7001000200
Symbol
Code 7001000210
2-21
DISTRIBUTORS
DISTRIBUTORS
Symbol
Code 7001000400
Symbol
Code 7001000410
Symbol
Code 7001000700
Symbol
Code 7001000710
Symbol
Code 7001000900
Symbol
Code 7001000910
2-22
KEY TO CODES
PNV FAMILY PNV pneumatic valves 2 DIMENSIONS 1/8 2 3 1/4 4 1/2 3 FUNCTION 3 3/2 5 5/2 6 5/3 PN OPERATORS 14 PN pneumatic S RESETTING (12) mechanical springs bistable differential stable for 5/3 pneumatic/mechanical spring* NC FURTHER DETAILS OO 5/2 NC normally closed NO normally open CC closed centres OC open centres PC pressure centres
S B D O A
*on demand
Symbol
Code 7010010400
Weight [g] 82
Symbol
Code 7010010200
Weight [g] 82
2-23
DISTRIBUTORS
DISTRIBUTORS
Symbol
Code 7010011100
Symbol
Symbol
Code 7010010100
Weight [g] 96
Symbol
NOTES
2-24
Symbol
Code 7020010400
Symbol
Code 7020010200
Symbol
Code 7020011100
Symbol
Symbol
Code 7020010100
Symbol
2-25
DISTRIBUTORS
DISTRIBUTORS
Symbol
Code 7030010400
Symbol
Code 7030010200
Symbol
Code 7030011100
Symbol
Symbol
Code 7030010100
Symbol
2-26
KEY TO CODES
SOV FAMILY SOV solenoid/ pneumatic 2 DIMENSIONS 2 1/8 3 1/4 4 1/2 3 FUNCTION 3 3/2 5 5/2 6 5/3 SO OPERATORS 14 SO solenoid SE solenoid assisted S RESETTING (12) mechanical springs bistable differential pneumatic pneumatic/mechanical spring* NC FURTHER DETAILS NC normally closed NO normally open CC closed centres OC open centres PC pressure centres OO 5/2
S B D P A
*on demand
Symbol
Code 7010020400
Symbol
2-27
DISTRIBUTORS
DISTRIBUTORS
Symbol
Symbol
Symbol
Symbol
Abbrev. SOV 26 SOS CC SOV 26 SOS OC SOV 26 SOS PC SOV 26 SES CC SOV 26 SES OC SOV 26 SES PC
2-28
Symbol
Code 7020020400
Symbol
Symbol
Symbol
2-29
DISTRIBUTORS
DISTRIBUTORS
Symbol
Symbol
Abbrev. SOV 36 SOS CC SOV 36 SOS OC SOV 36 SOS PC SOV 36 SES CC SOV 36 SES OC SOV 36 SES PC
NOTES
2-30
Symbol
Code 7030020400
Symbol
Symbol
Symbol
2-31
DISTRIBUTORS
DISTRIBUTORS
Symbol
Symbol
Abbrev. SOV 46 SOS CC SOV 46 SOS OC SOV 46 SOS PC SOV 46 SES CC SOV 46 SES OC SOV 46 SES PC
NOTES
2-32
2-33
DISTRIBUTORS
DISTRIBUTORS
1/8
Reference a b c d e f g h i Code 0226004150 0226004201 0226004200 0226004300 0226004600 0226004000 0226004500 0226004001 0226006600
1/4
Code 0226005150 0226005201 0226005200 0226005300 0226005600 0226005000 0226005500 0226005001 Description modular manifold base End plate without Or End plate with Or Intermediate part for upper feed Adapter for omega bar Intermediate diaphragm Blanking plate 3/2 cap Dimensional adapter
2-34
a MODULAR BASE
1/8 1/4
Code 0226004150 0226005150 Description Comp. mANIFOLD 1/8 Comp. mANIFOLD 1/4 Weight [g] 110 131
2-35
DISTRIBUTORS
f INTERMEDIATE DIAPHGRAM
1/8 1/4
Code 0226004000 0226005000 Description Intermediate diaphgram 1/8 Intermediate diaphgram 1/4 Weight [g] 2 3
DISTRIBUTORS
NOTES
2-36
GASKET KIT
Code 0226004701 0226005701 Description Gasket kit for 1/8 base Gasket kit for 1/4 base Weight [g] 5 5
2-37
DISTRIBUTORS
The series 70 valves on base, available in the airand solenoid-actuated versions, is an excellent clean solution for use when it is necessary to intervene on the valves without disconnecting the pipes. Here, the inlet, output and utility ports are in the base.
DISTRIBUTORS
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure: monostable bistable pilot-assisted minimum pilot pressure Operating temperature range Nominal diameter Conductance C Critical ratio b Flow rate at 6 bar DP 0.5 bar Flow rate at 6 bar DP 1 bar maximum torque coil nut bar bar bar bar C mm Nl/min bar bar/bar Nl/min Nl/min Nm 2.5 to 10 1 to 10 Vacuum to 10 2.5 -10 to +60 5 107.69 0.29 320 450 1
COMPONENTS a VALVE BODy: Aluminium b CONTr OL/BASE: Hostaform c SPOOL: chemically nickel-plated aluminium d DISTANCE PLATES: plastic e GASKETS: NBr f PISTONS: Hostaform g PISTON GASKET: NBr h FILTEr : sintered Bronze i SPr INGS: special steel j OPEr ATOr : Brass pipe Stainless steel core
FLOW CHART
2-38
Reference a
b c d e f
Code 0223100201 0223100401 0223100601 0223100801 0223101001 0223106301 0223106303 0223106302 0223106500 0226004600
Description 2-position base 1/8 on base 4-position base 1/8 on base 6-position base 1/8 on base 8-position base 1/8 on base 10-position base 1/8 on base Separate feed kit Exhaust regulation kit Exhaust feed kit Blanking plate Adapter for omega bar
KEY TO CODES
P N V FAMILY PNV pneumatic SOV elettro-pneumatic B DIMENSIONS B 1/8 on base 5 FUNCTION 5 5/2 6 5/3 P N OPERATORS 14 pneumatic solenoid solenoid assisted S RESETTING (12) mechanical springs bistable differential O O FURTHER DETAILS 5/2 closed centres open centres pressure centres
PN SO SE
S B D
OO CC OC PC
2-39
DISTRIBUTORS
DISTRIBUTORS
MONOSTABLE 5/2 VALVES SEr IES 70, ON BASE
BISTABLE 5/2
Symbol
Code 7011011100
Symbol
MONOSTABLE 5/3
NOTES
Symbol
2-40
MONOSTABLE 5/2
Symbol
Symbol
BISTABLE 5/3
Symbol Code 7011022100 7011022200 7011022300 7011022400 7011022500 7011022600 Abbrev. SOV B6 SOS CC SOV B6 SOS OC SOV B6 SOS PC SOV B6 SES CC SOV B6 SES OC SOV B6 SES PC Weight [g] 204 204 204 202 202 202
ACCESSORIES
r efer to page 2-46 for coils and connectors
2-41
DISTRIBUTORS
a MULTIPLE BASE
DISTRIBUTORS
Code 0223100201 0223100401 0223100601 0223100801 0223101001
Description 2-position base 1/8 on base 4-position base 1/8 on base 6-position base 1/8 on base 8-position base 1/8 on base 10-position base 1/8 on base
Code 0223106301
Weight [g] 65
Code 0223106303
Weight [g] 75
Code 0223106302
Weight [g] 75
e BLANKING PLATE
Code 0223106500
Weight [g] 15
Code 0226004600
Weight [g] 46
2-42
NAMUR VALVES
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure: monostable, electric bar 2.5 to 10 bistable, electric bar 1to10 pilot-assisted, electric bar Vacuum to 10 minimum actuation pressure: monostable, pneumatic bar 2.5 bistable, pneumatic bar 1 Operating temperature range C 10 to +60 Nominal diameter mm 7.5 Conductance C Nl/min bar 264.26 Critical ratio b bar/bar 0.27 Flow rate at 6 bar DP 0.5 bar Nl/min 750 Flow rate at 6 bar DP 1 bar (0.1 mpa - 14.5 psi) Nl/min 1100 r esponse time at 6 bar: Tr A/Trr monostable, pneumatic at 6 bar ms 7 / 15 Tr A/Trr bistable, pneumatic at 6 bar ms 7 / 7 Tr A/Trr monostable electric at 6 bar ms 19 / 45 Tr A/Trr bistable electric at 6 bar ms 21 / 21 Compatibility with oils Please refer to page 6-7 of the tecnical documentation
KEY TO CODES
P N V FAMILY PNV pneumatic SOV electro-pneumatic A DIMENSIONS A NAmUr 5 FUNCTION 5 5/2 4/2 4 P N OPERATORS 14 pneumatic solenoid S RESETTING (12) mechanical springs bistable O O FURTHER DETAILS OO 5/2 NC normally closed
PN SO
S B
COMPONENTS a VALVE BODy: Aluminium b CONTr OL/BASE: Hostaform c SPOOL: chemically nickel-plated aluminium d DISTANCE PLATES: plastic e GASKETS: NBr nitrile rubber f PISTONS: Hostaform g PISTON GASKET: NBr nitrile rubber h INTEr FACE GASKETS: NBr nitrile rubber i SPr INGS: special steel j OPEr ATOr : Brass pipe Stainless steel core
FUNCTIONING DIAGRAM 4/2 NAMUR VALVE During the piston retraction stage, the air for chamber A is taken from the air leaving chamber B. This prevents the dirty air from getting in from the outside enviroment.
2-43
NAmUr VALVES
DISTRIBUTORS
DISTRIBUTORS
Symbol
Code 7021010110
Symbol
Code 7021010210
NAmUr VALVES
Symbol
Code 7021020110
Symbol
Code 7021020210
Symbol
Code 7021010100
Symbol
Code 7021010200
2-44
Symbol
Code 7021020100
Symbol
Code 7021020200
NOTES
2-45
NAmUr VALVES
DISTRIBUTORS
COILS
Voltage tolerance: -10% + 15% Insulation class: F155 Degree of protection: IP65 DIN 40050 with connector Avoid prolonged exposure to atmospheric agents Code W0215000151 W0215000101 W0215000111 W0215000121 W0215000131 Abbrev. Coil 22 8 BA 2W-12VDC Coil 22 8 BA 2W-24VDC Coil 22 8 BA 3.5VA-24VAC Coil 22 8 BA 3.5VA-110VAC Coil 22 8 BA 3.5VA-220VAC Coil temperature 100% ED: from 70C to 20C Ambient temperature According to Atex 94/9 CE rule, group 2, category 3 GD Nominal voltage 12Vcc 24Vcc 24V 50/60Hz 110V 50/60Hz 220V 50/60Hz Absorption Inrush 2W 2W 5.3VA 5.3VA 5.3VA
DISTRIBUTORS
COIL CONNECTORS
Code W0970510011 W0970510012 W0970510013 W0970510014 W0970510015 W0970510016 W0970510017 W0970510070 Type Standard LED 24V LED 110V LED 220V LED + VDr 24V LED + VDr 110V LED + VDr 220V Atex II 3 GD Colour Black Transparent Transparent Transparent Transparent Transparent Transparent Black Cable PG9 PG9 PG9 PG9 PG9 PG9 PG9 PG9
Improved IP65 protection, even after prolonged exposure to atmospheric agents. Applicable to valves with a technopolymer control.
2-46
PLT-10 solenoid valves are the latest development in modern pneumatic design, where the main trends focus on miniaturisation, enhanced performance, reduced power and reliability. Numerous versions are available, all with an ISO 15218 pneumatic interface. The power required to operate the PLT-10 has been greatly reduced, ranging from 0.3 to 0.8 Watts. It is available with a LED indicating when it is active. monostable manual control is also possible. None of the versions will get damaged if the polarity is accidentally inverted.
TECHNICAL DATA
Type Operating temperature range (Te) Fluid temperature (Tg) Fluid Operating life Weight Voltage tolerance max operating frequency Switching factor Insulation class Index of protection Power connection C C 3/2 NC 5 to 50 5 to 50 Filtered, lubricated or unlubricated air Over 50 million cycles 12 10 % 30 Hz 100 % F155 IP51 PLUG IN
g DV f ED
COMPONENTS a Tr ANSPAr ENT COVEr: PA612-transparent n mANUAL SPr ING: AISI 302 (only for version with manual operated) b ASSEmBLy SCr EWS: galvanized steel o SPr ING: AISI 302 c COVEr: PA66 p WINDING: PPS - Copper wire d PIN e mOBILE COr E OVEr- STAmPING: FKm/FPm q FIXED COr E: AISI 430F r COIL-COVEr GASKET: NBr f mOBILE COr E: AISI 403F s ELECTr ONIC BOAr D g COIL OVEr- STAmPING: PA66 (only for version with electronic board) h BODy-COIL GASKET: NBr 70 i ASSEmBLy SCr EWS: galvanized steel j BODy GASKET: NBr k BODy: PA66 l mANUAL GASKET: NBr (only for version with manual operated) m mANUAL CONTr OL: OT58 nickel-plated brass (only for version with manual operated)
2-47
DISTRIBUTORS
PLT-10 WITH BASE AND CONNECTION ON THE SAME SIDE WITHOUT mANUAL WITH mANUAL
DISTRIBUTORS
Code
Weight [g] 12 12
With LED
24VDC 24VDC
0.9 0.9
0.6 0.6
3 to 7 3 to 7
9 9
93 93
12 12
SPEED-UP e LED
24VDC 24VDC
3/0.3 3/0.3
1.2 1.2
2 to 7 2 to 7
16 16
51 51
12 12
PLT-10 WITH BASE AND CONNECTION ON OPPOSITE SIDES WITHOUT mANUAL WITH mANUAL
Code
Weight [g] 12 12
With LED
24VDC 24VDC
0.9 0.9
0.6 0.6
3 to 7 3 to 7
9 9
93 93
12 12
SPEED-UP e LED
24VDC 24VDC
3/0.3 3/0.3
1.2 1.2
2 to 7 2 to 7
16 16
51 51
12 12
2-48
KEY TO CODES
7 2 2 FAMILY Solenoid valves series PLT-10 1 2 1 POSITIONING Base and connection on same side Base and connection opposite sides 1 POWER CONNECTION 1 Plug-in 3 THROUGH 3 0.6 mm 6 1.2 mm 3 POWER 3 0.7 W 5 0.9 W 8 3/0.3 W 4 VOLTAGE 4 24VDC 0 LED 0 1 LED 1 MANUAL CONTROL 0 1 manual monostable 0 0 VERSION 00 Standard
1 POSN.
+ POSN.
ACCESSORIES
PLUG-IN CONNECTOR
Code Description W0970512000 mACH 11 PLUG-IN connector L = 300
SPARE PARTS
INTERFACE GASKET
Code 0226009701 Description PLT-10 GASKET
N.B. 100 for pack When mounting on technopolymer bodies, use these screws instead of the ones supplied with the PLT-10. ATTENTION: approximative dimensions for not added glass plastic materials Its always advisable to effect assembling tests.
2-49
Code W0400100101 W0400100102 W0400100103 W0400100104 W0400100105 W0400100106 W0400100107 W0400100108 W0400100109 W0400100110
Description Base 1 posn. for PLT-10 Base 2 posn. for PLT-10 Base 3 posn. for PLT-10 Base 4 posn. for PLT-10 Base 5 posn. for PLT-10 Base 6 posn. for PLT-10 Base 7 posn. for PLT-10 Base 8 posn. for PLT-10 Base 9 posn. for PLT-10 Base 10 posn. for PLT-10
DISTRIBUTORS
DISTRIBUTORS
Series PLT-10 solenoid valves can be mounted on bases complete with electrical and pneumatic connections, from 4 to 24 positions. The electric contacts of each valve are linked to a single multiple connector via a printed circuit board. The connector has 9 pins or 25 pins, depending on the model and the number of valves that can be mounted. Versions with 25-pin connectors can interface with standard fiel buses by means of Profibus-D , Can-Open and Device-Net modules for multimach. (see page 2-178). The compressed-air supply is common to all the valves and can be provided on either side of the base by means of a 1/8 fitting Connection to the utilities is via automatic integrated cartridges for 4 pipe. The solenoid valve outlet is free, in a slot in the base. The bases can be secured from above using m3 screws, or on a DIN bar using a bracket (see accessories). The bases can mount various types of PLT-10 solenoid valves: 3/2 NC, 3/2 NO, with or without a manual actuator. With this modular system, you can select the desired sequence of valves (NC, NO, blind) and change it at any time.
TECHNICAL DATA
Supply voltage max input W 24 VDC 0.7 per position for PLT-10 STD without LED 0.9 per position for PLT-10 STD with LED 3/0.3 per position for PLT-10 NC with Speed-up 3/0.7 per position for PLT-10 NO with Speed-up Led mounted on the PLT-10 (on versions of solenoid valve where envisaged) 5 to 50 IP 40 24 9, of which 1 common, for versions with 4 and 8 positions 25, of which 1 common, for versions with 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24 positions
Valve actuation indicator Operating temperature range Protection degree (with valves and connectors mounted) maximum number of mountable PLT-10s Number of contacts
COMPONENTS a Anodized aluminium base b multi-pin electrical connector c Automatic integrated cartridges for 4 pipe d Electrical connectors for PLT-10 solenoid valves mounted on printed circuit board e Securing screw f Technopolymer cover
Position Nr PLT Position Nr PLT of electrical contact of electrical contact 1 PLT1 1 PLT1 2 PLT2 2 PLT2 3 PLT3 3 PLT3 4 PLT4 4 PLT4 5 PLT5 5 PLT5 6 PLT6 6 PLT6 7 PLT7 7 PLT7 8 PLT8 8 PLT8 9 PLT9 9 COmm ON (-) 10 PLT10 11 PLT11 12 PLT12 13 PLT13 14 PLT14 15 PLT15 16 PLT16 17 PLT17 18 PLT18 19 PLT19 20 PLT20 21 PLT21 22 PLT22 23 PLT23 24 PLT24 25 COmm ON (-) Pilot numbering from left to right, starting from the position closest to the connection.
2-50
A a Solenoid valve b Pneumatic circuit cap for blind position c Electric circuit cap for blind position (use two identificatio labels) d Identificatio label e Electrical connector CODES AND DIMENSIONS FOR BASES 9 AND 25 PINS
A From above using m3 screws B On a DIN bar, using the bracket and screws provided The bases come with the rear holes plugged by provided dowels.
Description 4-posn. base PLT 10 9-PIN mult conn. 8-posn. base PLT 10 9-PIN mult conn. 4-posn. base PLT 10 25-PIN mult conn. 8-posn. base PLT 10 25-PIN mult conn. 12-posn. base PLT 10 25-PIN mult conn. 16-posn. base PLT 10 25-PIN mult conn. 20-posn. base PLT 10 25-PIN mult conn. 24-posn. base PLT 10 25-PIN mult conn.
N of PINS 9 9 25 25 25 25 25 25
N of positions 4 8 4 8 12 16 20 24
L3 18 18 30 30 30 30 30 30
Weight [g] 160 235 210 280 355 430 500 575
2-51
DISTRIBUTORS
g DV f ED
DISTRIBUTORS
OPERATING CHART
NC
NO
DE-ENERg IZED
ENERg IZED
DE-ENERg IZED
DE-ENERg IZED
ENERg IZED
DE-ENERg IZED
COMPONENTS a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r
2-52
TRANSPARENT COVER: PA612-transparent ASSEMBLy SCREWS: galvanized steel PIN MOBILE CORE OVER-STAMPINg: FKM/FPM MOBILE CORE: AISI 403F COIL OVER-STAMPINg: P A66 BODy-COIL g ASKET: NBR70 ASSEMBLy SCREWS: galvanized steel BODy g ASKET: NBR BODy: PA66 MANUAL g ASKET: NBR (only for version with manual operated) MANUAL CONTROL: OT58 nickel-plated brass (only for version with manual operated) MANUAL SPRINg: AISI 302 (only for version with manual operated) SPRINg: AISI 302 WINDINg: PPS - Copper wire FIxED CORE: AISI 430F COIL-COVER g ASKET: NBR ELECTRONIC BOARD (only for version with electronic board)
PLT-10 NC-NO FOR MULTIPLE ELECTRIC CONNECTION WITHOUT mANUAL WITH mANUAL
Weight [g] 12 12
With LED
722123541000 722123541100
0.6 0.6
3 to 7 3 to 7
9 9
93 93
12 12
722126841000 722126841100
2 to 7 2 to 7
16 16
51 51
12 12
Weight [g] 12 12
2-53
DISTRIBUTORS
ACCESSORIES
CONNECTION BRACKETS ON BAR OMEGA (DIN EN 50022)
Code 0227301600 Description Connection brackets on din BAr HDm/Cm Weight [g] 30
Supplied complete with one m4x45 screws and one m6 grub screw Individually packed
DISTRIBUTORS
CABLES
Code 0226107201 0226107101 0226107102 Description 10-wire cable 19-wire cable 25-wire cable Weight [g] 86 122 130
2-54
PRE-WIRED 90 CONNECTOR
Code 0226910100 0226910250 0226910500 0226930100 0226930250 0226930500 Description Connector + 9-wire 90 cable L = 1 m Connector + 9-wire 90 cable L = 2.5 m Connector + 9-wire 90 cable L = 5 m Connector + 25-wire 90 cable L = 1 m Connector + 25-wire 90 cable L = 2.5 m Connector + 25-wire 90 cable L = 5 m Weight [g] 90 220 434 132 320 636
9 PIN
Colour of the corresponding wire green/black white blue/black blue yellow/black yellow red/black green white/black
Lenght = 140 mm
2-55
DISTRIBUTORS
3/2 NC/NO direct control microvalves Possible assembly on single and multiple bases monostable manual actuation as standard Assembly in any position Operation with filtere lubricated or unlubricated air maximum ambient temperature: 50C Low power absorption
DISTRIBUTORS
TECHNICAL DATA SOLENOID VALVES PIV.m 15 mm
Voltage tolerance Frequenza tensione alternativa (AC) max operating frequency Solenoid rating r esponse time Type of protection Power connection Insulation class Ambient temperature Fluid temperature Fluid Operating life materials % Hz Hz ms 10 to +15 50/60 30 100% ED z 10 IP 65 EN 60529 9.4 mm micro centre distance 155 10 to + 50 10 to + 50 Filtered lubricated or unlubricated air 100 million cycles Body: PPS Spring: 302 stainless steel FKm/FPm gaskets 30 monostable In any position
C C
KEY TO CODES
P I V FAMILY 1 3 6 1 AIR HOLE 1 mm 1.1 mm 1.5 mm 3 NUMBER OF WAYS 3 ways 3 M DIMENSIONS 15 x 15 M 0 THREAD 0 on base 1 VERSION 24 VDC 24 VAC 110 VAC 220 VAC N C FURTHER DETAILS NC normally closed NO normally open
1 3 5 7
2-56
2-57
DISTRIBUTORS
PIV.I - PIV.T and PIV.B solenoid valves Assembly on base Bistable manual actuation Normally closed/normally open solenoid valves 2/2 3/2 Installation in any position Particularly suitable for high operating frequencies and low response times
DISTRIBUTORS
TECHNICAL DATA
Absorption Voltage available Voltage tolerance max operating frequency Solenoid rating r esponse time Type of protection Type of coil Insulation class Ambient temperature Fluid temperature Fluid Woking life Weight maximum coil nut torque % Hz % ms
PIV.I ON BASE
PIV.T ON BASE
PIV.B ON BASE 10W - 13VA 24VDC / 24-110-220 VAC 50/60 Hz 10 to +15 15 100 10 to 15 IP 65 Coil side 30 DIN 43650 155 15 to 50 15 to 50 Filtered lubricated or unlubricated air 250 1
C C
g Nm
5W - 5VA 3.8W - 6.5VA 12-24 VDC / 24-110-220 VAC 24VDC / 24-110-220 VAC 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 10 to +15 10 to +15 30 30 100 100 8 to 15 8 to 15 IP 65 IP 65 Coil side 22 8 Coil side 22 9 DIN 43650 DIN 43650 155 155 15 to 50 15 to 50 15 to 50 15 to 50 Filtered lubricated Filtered lubricated or unlubricated air or unlubricated air 25 million cycles 25 million cycles 80 to 120 (according to the version) 85 1 1
COMPONENTS a manual control: technopolymer b Body: technopolymer c Sleeve locking plate d Spring: stainless steel e Sleeve: brass OT 58 f r ing nut for coil fixin g Gasket: NBr h mobile core i Spring: stainless steel j Spring: stainless steel k Gasket: NBr
2-58
W4025002100 W4025002300
PIV73T0B NC PIV83T0B NC
W4026003000
PIVy3B0S NC
2-59
W4025002101 W4025002301
PIV73T0B NO PIV83T0B NO
DISTRIBUTORS
KEY TO CODES
P I V FAMILY 4 7 8 Y 5 AIR HOLE 1.2 mm 1.6 mm 1.8 mm 2.4 mm 3 NUMBER OF WAYS 2 2 ways 3 3 ways T CONNECTION I T B 22x22 operator 8 22x22 operator 9 30x30 operator 13 0 0 THREAD on base O B S O VERSION on base with conveyed exhaust on base standard N C FURTHER DETAILS NC normally closed NO normally open
DISTRIBUTORS
ACCESSORIES
MULTIPLE BASES FOR PIV.I SOLENOID VALVES, OPERATOR 8
Code W0400111101 W0400111102 W0400111103 W0400111104 W0400111105 W0400111106 W0400111107 W0400111108 W0400111109 W0400111110 Description Base 1 position Base 2 positions Base 3 positions Base 4 positions Base 5 positions Base 6 positions Base 7 positions Base 8 positions Base 9 positions Base 10 positions Abbrev. EB 6001 EB 6002 EB 6003 EB 6004 EB 6005 EB 6006 EB 6007 EB 6008 EB 6009 EB 6010 Weight [g] 22 50 76 102 128 154 180 206 232 258
2-60
2-61
DISTRIBUTORS
DISTRIBUTORS
NOTES
2-62
PIV.I PIV.B in-line solenoid valves Threaded ports: m5, G1/8, G1/4 2/2 3/2 solenoid valves - normally closed/normally open Installation in any position Particularly suitable for high operating frequencies and low response times.
TECHNICAL DATA
Absorption Voltage available Voltage tolerance max operating frequency Solenoid rating r esponse time Type of protection Type of coil Insulation class Ambient temperature Fluid temperature Fluid Working life Weight maximum coil/nut torque Note on use: The 2/2 NC and 2/2 NO valves work only with inlet pressure $ outlet pressure.
PIV.I IN LINE 5W to 5VA 24Vdc - 24-110-220 Vac - 50/60 Hz 10 to 15 30 100 8 to 15 IP 65 Coil side 22 8 DIN 43650 155 15 to 50 15 to 50 Filtered lubricated or unlubricated air 25 million cycles 35 to 40 (depending on version) 1
PIV.B IN LINE 10W - 13VA 24Vdc - 24-110-220 Vac - 50/60 Hz 10 to 15 15 100 10 to 15 IP 65 Coil side 30 DIN 43650 155 15 to 50 15 to 50 Filtered lubricated or unlubricated air 130 1
% Hz % ms
C C
Nm
COMPONENTS a Body: aluminium b Springs: steel c Sleeve d Gasket: NBr e Springs: steel f mobile core g Gasket: FKm/FPm h Coil locking ring
2-63
DISTRIBUTORS
DISTRIBUTORS
m5 G1/8 G1/8 m5
10 10 6.5 6
10 10 6.5 7
1/8
W4026005001 W4026005101 W4026005111 W4026005010 W4026005020 W4026005000 W4026005100 W4026005110 W4026005120 W4026004000 W4026004010 W4026004020 W4026004001
PIV73B8S NO PIV73B4S NO PIV93B4S NO PIV93B8S NC PIVW3B8S NC PIV73B8S NC PIV73B4S NC PIV93B4S NC PIVW3B4S NC PIV92B4S NC PIVX2B4S NC PIVZ2B4S NC PIV92B4S NO
KEY TO CODES
P I V FAMILY 4 7 9 W X Z 7 AIR HOLE 1.2 mm 1.6 mm 2.4 mm 3 mm 4 mm 6 mm 2 NUMBER OF WAYS 2 2 ways 3 3 ways B CONNECTION I B 22 x 22 operator 8 30 x 30 operator 13 5 4 8 4 THREAD m5 G1/4 G1/8 S 5 VERSION standard N C FURTHER DETAILS NC normally closed NO normally open
2-64
ACCESSORIES
COIL, SIDE 30 mm - FOR PIV.B SOLENOID VALVES
Voltage tolerance: 10 to +15% Insulation class: m180 Degree of protection: IP65 EN60529 with connector Avoid prolonged exposure to the atmospheric agents Code W0216001001 W0216001011 W0216001021 W0216001031 Abbrev. Coil 30 13 10W-24VDC Coil 30 13 13VA-24VAC Coil 30 13 13VA-110VAC Coil 30 13 13VA-220VAC Nominal voltage 24Vcc 24V 50/60Hz 110V 50/60Hz 220V 50/60Hz Absorption (average) 10W 13VA 13VA 13VA
CONNECTOR, SIDE 22 mm
Code W0970510011 W0970510012 W0970510013 W0970510014 W0970510015 W0970510016 W0970510017 W0970510070 Type Standard LED 24V LED 110V LED 220V LED + VDr 24V LED + VDr 110V LED + VDr 220V Atex II 3 GD Colour Black Transparent Transparent Transparent Transparent Transparent Transparent Black Cable PG9 PG9 PG9 PG9 PG9 PG9 PG9 PG9
CONNECTOR, SIDE 30 mm
Code W0970520033 W0970520034 W0970520035 W0970520036 W0970520037 W0970520038 W0970520039 Type Standard LED 24V LED 110V LED 220V LED + VDr 24V LED + VDr 110V LED + VDr 220V Colour Black Transparent Transparent Transparent Transparent Transparent Transparent Cable PG11 PG11 PG11 PG11 PG11 PG11 PG11
2-65
DISTRIBUTORS
Solenoid valve to CNOmO 060580. 3/2 version normally closed Bistable and monostable manual actuation Assembly on manifold base
DISTRIBUTORS
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure Operating temperature range Solenoid rating Fluid System Nominal flo rate Tr A/Trr at 6 bar maximum coil nut torque bar C max 10 10 to 60 100% ED Filtered lubricated or unlubricated air With poppet 40 22/32 10
Nl/min ms Nm
COMPONENTS
DIMENSIONS
a VALVE BODy: HOSTAFOrm b GASKETS: NBr c OPEr ATOr : Brass pipe Stainless steel core MODULAR CONFIGURATION OF CNOMO BASES a Two fixin screws (included in input kit) b CNOmO manifold base kit c CNOmO manifold base input kit
Description Cnomo 3/2 with monostable manual actuation Cnomo 3/2 with bistable manual actuation
2-66
ACCESSORIES
CNOMO MANIFOLD BASE INPUT KIT
Code 0227000200 Description Cnomo manifold base input kit
COILS, SIDE 30 mm
Electric contact DIN 43650 Shape A Voltage tolerance: 10% to +10% Insulation class: F155 Degree of protection: IP65 EN 60529 with connector Solenoid rating: 100% ED maximum coil temperature at 100% ED use 70C at 20 ambient temperature Code W0210010100 W0210011100 W0210012100 W0210013100 Abbrev. Coil 30 8 4W-24VDC Coil 30 8 4VA-24VAC Coil 30 8 4VA-110VAC Coil 30 8 4VA-220VAC Nominal voltage 24Vcc 24V 50/60Hz 110V 50/60Hz 220V 50/60Hz Absorption Inrush Holding 5W 4W 10VA 4VA 10VA 4VA 10VA 4VA
CONNECTOR ON SIDE 30 mm
Code W0970520033 W0970520034 W0970520035 W0970520036 W0970520037 W0970520038 W0970520039 Type Standard LED 24V LED 110V LED 220V LED + VDr 24V LED + VDr 110V LED + VDr 220V Colour Black Transparent Transparent Transparent Transparent Transparent Transparent Cable PG11 PG11 PG11 PG11 PG11 PG11 PG11
2-67
DISTRIBUTORS
VALVES
VALVES mINImACH
DISTRIBUTORS
Space-saving valve, ideal for in industrial automation applications. made according to the well-proven design of the mach series, the minimach has a painted aluminium body to ensure extra sturdiness and reliable operation in even the harshest of environments. The internal seals are made of FKm/FPm and are compatible with all oils used in compressors. The pneumatic couplings are m5 threaded, allowing the user to choose the diameter, type and angle of the fitting. The valve can be mounted in line or on a panel or multiple-port base. The following versions are available: 3/2 normally open or normally closed 5/2 monostable or bistable 5/3 closed centres, open centres, pressure centres. Electropneumatic actuation with a 24V DC pilot.
TECHNICAL DATA
Valve port thread Type of actuation maximum external diameter of fittings Operating temperature range Fluid Pressure range Flow rate at 6 bar P 1 3/2 Flow rate at 6 bar P 1 5/2 Flow rate at 6 bar P 1 5/3 Voltage range Power Solenoid rating manual operator TrA/Trr 3/2 at 6 bar TrA/Trr 5/2 monostable at 6 bar TrA/Trr 5/2 bistable at 6 bar TrA/Trr 5/3 at 6 bar Insulation class Degree of protection Installation Compatibility with oils m5 electric-pneumatic 11 -10 to +60 14 to +140 Filtered air without lubrication; lubrication, if used, must be continuous 0.3 to 0.7 3 to 7 44 to 102 140 170 80 24 VDC 10% 0.9 100% ED monostable 8/23 8/30 15/15 9/30 F155 IP 51 In any position. As for the bistable ones, if subject to vibration, the vertical assembly is not advisable Please refer to page 6-7 of the tecnical documentation
ms ms ms ms
COMPONENTS a VALVE BODy: chemically nickel-plated aluminium b CONTrOL/END CAP: Hostaform c SPOOL: chemically nickel-plated aluminium d DISTANCE PLATES: tecnopolymer e GASKETS: FKm-FPm f PISTONS: Hostaform g PISTON GASKET: Polyurethane h FILTEr: sintered bronze i SPrINGS: special steel j PILOT: with integrated coil
2-68
DISTRIBUTORS
HOW TO FIX THE VALVE TO THE BASE Proceed as follows: 1. screw the pins A onto the valve 2. secure them with the ready-mounted grub screws B on the base (0.5 Nm max) ImPOr TANT To secure properly, press the valve down onto the base while tightening the two grub screws. Do not tighten one grub screw completely before starting to tighten the other.
VALVES mINImACH
DISTRIBUTORS
HOW TO FIX THE BASE A B C D From the top using m4 screws From below using m5 screws From the side using m4 screws From the top on the DIN bar via the m4 screws and bracket code 0225004600 (using 1 screw per bracket) KEY TO CODES
M S V FAMILY MSV minivalves solenoid 0 DIMENSIONS 0 m5 5 FUNCTION 3 3/2 5 5/2 6 5/3 S O OPERATORS 14 SO solenoid B RESETTING (12) B bistable S mechanical springs O O FURTHER DETAILS NC normally closed NO normally open OO 5/2 standard CC closed centres OC open centres PC pressure centres 2 4 V D C 24VDC
2-70
Symbol
Code 7080020532
Symbol
Code 7080020132
7080020632
36.2
BISTABLE 5/2
MONOSTABLE 5/3
Symbol
Code 7080020112
Weight [g] 57
Symbol
Code 7080020212
Weight [g] 57
7080020312
57
7080020412
57
2-71
VALVES mINImACH
DISTRIBUTORS
DISTRIBUTORS
Code 0225010201 0225010401 0225010601 0225010801
Description Base 2 posn. for 3/2 valves minimach Base 4 posn. for 3/2 valves minimach Base 6 posn. for 3/2 valves minimach Base 8 posn. for 3/2 valves minimach
Position 2 4 6 8
Code 0226009500
Description Base 2 posn. for 5/2-5/3 valves minimach Base 4 posn. for 5/2-5/3 valves minimach Base 6 posn. for 5/2-5/3 valves minimach Base 8 posn. for 5/2-5/3 valves minimach
Position 2 4 6 8
Code 0226009501
Weight [g] 11
2-72
ACCESSORIES
PLUG-IN CONNECTOR
SPARE PARTS
PLUG-IN PILOT
Code W0970512000
Code 0225004600
Weight [g] 46
Code 0226009000
INTERMEDIATE DIAPHRAGM
Code 0226009010
Code 0226009001
2-73
DISTRIBUTORS
MACH 11 VALVES
The mach 11 in-line valves with m7 threaded connection come in the following versions: 5/2 monostable and bistable 5/3 with closed, open or pressure centres. Control: pneumatic solenoid/pneumatic 24 V With an exceptional compact design only 11 mm wide, and excellent high performance, these valves can be used in numerous applications in industrial automation.
mACH 11 VALVES
DISTRIBUTORS
TECHNICAL DATA
Valve port thread Pilot thread maximum external diameter of fittings Operating temperature range Fluid Screw for valve wall-mounting Flow rate at 6 bar DP 1 bar Pressure range m7 m5 Pneumatic: m7 = 11 - m5 = 9 - Electric: m7 - m5 = 11 -10 to +60 Filtered air without lubrication; lubrication, if used, must be continuous m3 400 Electric pilot-assisted Pneumatic Electric monostable: 2 to 7 pilot pressure: 2 to 7 monostable control pres.values: 2 to 10 bistable: 2 to 7 valve: vacuum to 10 bistable control pres. values: 1 to 10 5/3: 2 to 7 control pressure 5/3: 2 to 10 valve: vacuum to 10 24 VDC 10% 24 VDC 10% 0.9 0.9 F155 F155 IP 51 IP 51 100% ED 100% ED 10 / 45 10 / 45 4 / 9 22 / 22 22 / 22 4 / 4 22 / 22 22 / 22 4 / 4 Please refer to page 6-7 of the tecnical documentation
mm C
Voltage range Power Insulation class Degree of protection Solenoid rating Tr A/Trr monostable at 6 bar Tr A/Trr bistable at 6 bar Tr A/Trr 5/3 monostable at 6 bar Compatibility with oils
Nl/min bar W ms ms ms
COMPONENTS a VALVE BODy: Aluminium b CONTr OL/BASE: Hostaform c SPOOL: Aluminium d GASKETS: Polyurethane e PISTONS: Hostaform f PISTON GASKET: Polyurethane g FILTEr : sintered bronze h PILOT: with integrated coil i SPr INGS: special steel j r EmOVABLE IDENTIFICATION PLATE
2-74
MODULARITY
KEY TO CODES
M S V FAMILY MSV mini-solenoid valve MSV mini-pneumatic valve 1 DIMENSIONS 1 m7 5 FUNCTION 5 5/2 6 5/3 S O OPERATORS 14 SO solenoid SE solenoid assisted PN pneumatic B RESETTING (12) B bistable S mechanical springs O O FURTHER DETAILS OO 5/2 standard CC closed centres OC open centres PC pressure centres 2 4 V D C 24VDC
2-75
mACH 11 VALVES
DISTRIBUTORS
DISTRIBUTORS
MONOSTABLE 5/3
Symbol Code 7061010210 7061010310 7061010410 Abbrev. mPV 16 PNS CC mPV 16 PNS OC mPV 16 PNS PC Weight [g] 62 62 62
BISTABLE 5/2
Symbol Code 7061010110 Abbrev. mPV 15 PNB OO Weight [g] 52
2-76
MONOSTABLE 5/3
Symbol Code 7061020212 7061020312 7061020412 7061030212 7061030312 7061030412 Abbrev. mSV 16 SOS CC 24VDC mSV 16 SOS OC 24VDC mSV 16 SOS PC 24VDC mSV 16 SES CC 24VDC mSV 16 SES OC 24VDC mSV 16 SES PC 24VDC Weight [g] 82 82 82 82 82 82
BISTABLE 5/2
Symbol Code 7061020112 7061030112 Abbrev. mSV 15 SOB OO 24 VDC mSV 15 SEB OO 24 VDC Weight [g] 72 88
2-77
DISTRIBUTORS
DISTRIBUTORS
Description Base, 2 posn. for mach 11 Base, 3 posn. for mach 11 Base, 4 posn. for mach 11 Base, 6 posn. for mach 11 Base, 8 posn. for mach 11
Code 0227400200
Weight [g] 44
c 90 END PLATE
Code 0227400101
Weight [g] 82
Code 0227400100
Weight [g] 93
e BLANKING PLATE
f FEED BLOCK
Code 0227400500
Weight [g] 13
Code 0227400503
Weight [g] 11
2-78
g DIAPHRAGM
Code 0227400000
Weight [g] 3
Code 0227400504
Weight [g] 28
ACCESSORIES
PLUG-IN CONNECTOR
Code W0970512000 Description Plug-in connector for mach 11 L = 300
Code 0227300600
SPARE PARTS
PLUG-IN PILOT
Code Description 722113541100 PLT-10 722113541100
~9
14
2-79
DISTRIBUTORS
MACH 16 VALVES
Available in size 1/8 only, versions 5/2 and 5/3 and with pneumatic and solenoid actuation. The mach 16 valve is a typical small size valve, only 16 mm wide, with excellent performance 750 NL/min flo rate at 6 bar DP 1 bar. The valve can be used in line, on a panel or on a base (multiple or manifold) The mach design is the result of the miniaturisation concept with the same durability, sturdiness and reliability.
DISTRIBUTORS
TECHNICAL DATA
Valve port thread Type of control maximum outer diameter of gaskets for ports 1 - 3 - 5 maximum outer diameter for ports 2 - 4 Operating temperature range minimum pressure pilot-pneumatic controls Operating pressure Fluid r ecommended lubricant Solenoid pilot manual Number of ways in base Screws for wall-mounting single valve Screws for base-mounting valve Installation Flow rate at 6 bar DP 0.5 bar Flow rate at 6 bar DP 1 bar Conductance C Critical ratio b Compatibility with oils 1/8 m5 pneumatic actuation - Solenoid/pneumatic operation with integrated coil 15 15 -10 to +60 monostable with pneumatic spring: see picture on page 2-82 1.6 bar for monostable valves mechanical spring 1 bar for bistable valves 1.9 bar for valves 5/3 vacuum -10 Filtered lubricated or unlubricated air lubrication, if used, must be continuous ISO e UNI FD22 Integrated coil DIN 43650 C shape monostable on solenoid pilot (with bistable manual valve on request) 1-3-5 and pilot exhaust 2 screws m3 2 screws m2.5x30 In any position (vertical assembly is not recommended for bistable valves subjected to vibration) 540 750 149.8 0.525 Please refer to page 6-7 of the tecnical documentation
mACH 16 VALVES
COMPONENTS a VALVE BODy: Aluminium b CONTr OL/BASE: Hostaform c SPOOL: Aluminium d GASKETS: Polyurethane e PISTONS: Hostaform f PISTON GASKET: Polyurethane g INTEr FACE GASKETS: NBr nitrile rubber h PILOT: with integrated coil
FLOW CHART
2-80
MANIFOLD BASES
Reference a b c d e f g h
Description m16/VDmA Input end-plate kit m16 manifold base kit m16 separate feed manifold base kit m16 exhaust feed manifold base kit m16/VDmA output end-plate kit m16 blanking plate Intermediate diaphragm Connection bracket on DIN-bar
KEY TO CODES
M S V FAMILY MSV solenoid/pneumatic MPV pneumatic 2 DIMENSIONS 2 1/8 5 FUNCTION 5 5/2 6 5/3 S O OPERATORS 14 SO solenoid/pneumatic SE solenoid pilot PN pneumatic B RESETTING 12 pneumatic spring mechanical springs bistable O O FURTHER DETAILS OO 5/2 CC closed centres OC open centres PC pressure centres 2 4 V D C VOLTAGE 24VDC 24VAC 110VAC 220VAC
P S B
2-81
mACH 16 VALVES
DISTRIBUTORS
mACH 16 VALVES
DISTRIBUTORS
MONOSTABLE 5/2
BISTABLE 5/2
Symbol
Weight [g] 60 61
Symbol
Code 7062010110
Weight [g] 62
MONOSTABLE 5/3
OPERATING PRESSURE
Symbol
Weight [g] 73 73 73
2-82
MONOSTABLE 5/2
Symbol Code 7062020102 7062020103 7062020104 7062020105 7062020132 7062020133 7062020134 7062020135 7062030132 7062030133 7062030134 7062030135 Abbrev. mSV 25 SOP OO 24VDC mSV 25 SOP OO 24VAC mSV 25 SOP OO 110VAC mSV 25 SOP OO 220VAC mSV 25 SOS OO 24VDC mSV 25 SOS OO 24VAC mSV 25 SOS OO 110VAC mSV 25 SOS OO 220VAC mSV 25 SES OO 24VDC mSV 25 SES OO 24VAC mSV 25 SES OO 110VAC mSV 25 SES OO 220VAC Weight [g] 92 92 92 92 93 93 93 93 93 93 93 93
BISTABLE 5/2
Symbol Code 7062020112 7062020113 7062020114 7062020115 7062030112 7062030113 7062030114 7062030115 Abbrev. mSV 25 SOB OO 24VDC mSV 25 SOB OO 24VAC mSV 25 SOB OO 110VAC mSV 25 SOB OO 220VAC mSV 25 SEB OO 24VDC mSV 25 SEB OO 24VAC mSV 25 SEB OO 110VAC mSV 25 SEB OO 220VAC Weight [g] 124 124 124 124 125 125 125 125
2-83
mACH 16 VALVES
DISTRIBUTORS
MONOSTABLE 5/3
Symbol Code 7062020212 7062020213 7062020214 7062020215 7062020312 7062020313 7062020314 7062020315 7062020412 7062020413 7062020414 7062020415 7062030212 7062030213 7062030214 7062030215 7062030312 7062030313 7062030314 7062030315 7062030412 7062030413 7062030414 7062030415 Abbrev. mSV 26 SOS CC 24VDC mSV 26 SOS CC 24VAC mSV 26 SOS CC 110VAC mSV 26 SOS CC 220VAC mSV 26 SOS OC 24VDC mSV 26 SOS OC 24VAC mSV 26 SOS OC 110VAC mSV 26 SOS OC 220VAC mSV 26 SOS PC 24VDC mSV 26 SOS PC 24VAC mSV 26 SOS PC 110VAC mSV 26 SOS PC 220VAC mSV 26 SES CC 24VDC mSV 26 SES CC 24VAC mSV 26 SES CC 110VAC mSV 26 SES CC 220VAC mSV 26 SES OC 24VDC mSV 26 SES OC 24VAC mSV 26 SES OC 110VAC mSV 26 SES OC 220VAC mSV 26 SES PC 24VDC mSV 26 SES PC 24VAC mSV 26 SES PC 110VAC mSV 26 SES PC 220VAC Weight [g] 142 142 142 142 142 142 142 142 142 142 142 142 143 143 143 143 143 143 143 143 143 143 143 143
mACH 16 VALVES
DISTRIBUTORS
CONNECTOR 15 mm SHAPE C TO DIN 43650
Code W0970501021 W0970501022 W0970501025
NB: if the pilot to be replaced bears the writing CE, you have to order among the NEW pilots, otherwise order among the OLD pilots
2-84
Code 0227100201
Code 0227100150
Code 0227100301
Code 0227100302
Code 0227100200
Code 0225004500
Weight [g] 18
2-85
DISTRIBUTORS
g INTERMEDIATE DIAPHRAGM
Code 0227100000
Weight [g] 1
Code 0227300600
~9 ~9
Weight [g] 7
DISTRIBUTORS
Description Base CVm.PN-08-02-0-000 Base CVm.PN-08-04-0-000 Base CVm.PN-08-06-0-000 Base CVm.PN-08-08-0-000 Base CVm.PN-08-10-0-000 Base CVm.PN-08-12-0-000
N of positions 2 4 6 8 10 12
Code 0225004600
Weight [g] 46
INTERMEDIATE DIAPHRAGM
Code 0226007001
Weight [g] 5
Code 0227100001
Weight [g] 6
Code 0226007003
Weight [g] 5
2-86
TECHNICAL DATA
Supply voltage maximum absorption Valve actuation indicator Protection Operating temperature range Degree of protection with valves mounted Insulation class Electromagnetic compatibility maximum number of solenoid valves which can be applied n of contacts Pre-wired version Cable length n of wires Wire section Shielding Cable Cable outside diameter 24VDC - 24VAC 50 mA for each position yellow LED Fuse -10 to +60 IP65 In compliance with IEC 664-1and VDE 0110 Group C In compliance with EEC 366/89 16 19, 16 of which for solenoid valves, 2 common and 1 earth 5 19, 16 of which for solenoid valves, 2 common and 1 earth 0.22 Tin plated covering 80 to 90% Outer oil-proof and flame-proo PVC sheath 8.5
m mm2
mm
NOTES
2-87
DISTRIBUTORS
mach 16 valves can be mounted on bases with pneumatic or electrical connection. The electric contacts of the individual valves are connected by means of a printed circuit board in a sealed conduit to a single connection point suitable for up to 16 controls. The number 16 was chosen because the number of outputs of most PLC output boards is 16 or a multiple of it. The system has numerous alternatives and variants for a wide range of requirements: Base for monostable or bistable valves. Connection via a multiple connector or wired cable. Supply of individual parts or ready prepared bases or complete valve units The configuratio can be modifie at any time to convert bases for monostable valves into bases for bistable valves. The return cable can be used to connect two monostable valve units to a single multiple connector. All versions are certifie for electromagnetic compatibility and hence they bear the CE mark. The system is prearranged for mounting a slave for fiel buses, which can be added at any time. Valve units with multiple pneumatic/electrical connection are supplied complete with valves and are tested. System modularity means that the valve sequence can be ordered to meet your own requirements (see key to codes).
COMPONENTS
DISTRIBUTORS
a multiple base: extruded anodised aluminium b modular base: anodised aluminium c main assembly, version with connector d main assembly, pre-wired version e Secondary unit/additional secondary unit f 10-wire return cable g Socket for 10-wire return cable KEY TO CODES
A FAMILY A multiple base for solenoid/pneumatic connection mach 16 B manifold base for mach 16 solenoid/pneumatic connection 0 8 NO. OF POSITIONS 04 4 posn. 06 6 posn. 08 8 posn. 10 10 posn. 12 12 posn.
h LED (LED on = Solenoid valve energised) i Identificatio label (for writing on) j Bistable solenoid valve mACH 16 k monostable solenoid valve mACH 16 m 19-wire cable for pre-wired version n Blanking plate - pneumatic position: anodised aluminium
B M B electrical connection only for monostable valves electrical connection for bistable valves
W C 5 MCN electrical connection WC5 pre-wired cable 5 m ACM additional connection for monostable battery
0 8 SIZE 08 G 1/8
M M 6 V L M M6 M8 V L L6 L8 J J6 J8 K G G6 G8 O E E6 E8 F B B6 B8 C A D mSV 25 SmS OO mSV G5 SmS OO mSV H5 SmS OO mSV 25 SCS OO mSV 25 SmP OO mSV G5 SmP OO mSV H5 SmP OO mSV 25 SmB OO mSV G5 SmB OO mSV H5 SmB OO mSV 25 SCB OO mSV 26 SmS CC mSV G6 SmS CC mSV H6 SmS CC mSV 26 SCS CC mSV 26 SmS OC mSV G6 SmS OC mSV H6 SmS OC mSV 26 SCS OC mSV 26 SmS PC mSV G6 SmS PC mSV H6 SmS PC mSV 26 SCS PC blanking plate intermediate diaphragm
N.B.: The valve insertion order inside the descriptive key is the following, starting from the connector, from the left towards the right: the firs left square corresponds to the firs valve close to the connector on the base. There are 12 squares available for the description: if you order a base with less than 12 positions, complete by placing a 0 in the remaining boxes.
2-88
Symbol
V MONOSTABLE 5/2,
Symbol
Description mSV G5 SmP OO 24VDC mSV H5 SmP OO 24VDC mSV G5 SmP OO 24VAC mSV H5 SmP OO 24VAC
6 8 6 8
H 32.7 34 32.7 34
Weight [g] 96 98 96 98
2-89
DISTRIBUTORS
Description mSV G5 SmS OO 24VDC mSV H5 SmS OO 24VDC mSV G5 SmS OO 24VAC mSV H5 SmS OO 24VAC
6 8 6 8
H 32.7 34 32.7 34
Weight [g] 96 98 96 98
Symbol
DISTRIBUTORS
Description mSV G5 SmB OO 24VDC mSV H5 SmB OO 24VDC mSV G5 SmB OO 24VAC mSV H5 SmB OO 24VAC
6 8 6 8
H 32.7 34 32.7 34
K BISTABLE 5/2,
SOLENOID/PNEUMATIC, PILOT-ASSISTED
Symbol Code 7062060112 7062060113 Description mSV 25 SCB OO 24VDC mSV 25 SCB OO 24VAC Weight [g] 140 140
G MONOSTABLE
Symbol
Description mSV G6 SmS CC 24VDC mSV H6 SmS CC 24VDC mSV G6 SmS CC 24VAC mSV H6 SmS CC 24VAC
6 8 6 8
H 32.7 34 32.7 34
2-90
Symbol
Description mSV G6 SmS OC 24VDC mSV H6 SmS OC 24VDC mSV G6 SmS OC 24VAC mSV H6 SmS OC 24VAC
6 8 6 8
H 32.7 34 32.7 34
2-91
DISTRIBUTORS
Symbol
DISTRIBUTORS
Description mSV G6 SmS PC 24VDC mSV H6 SmS PC 24VDC mSV G6 SmS PC 24VAC mSV H6 SmS PC 24VAC
6 8 6 8
H 32.7 34 32.7 34
SPARE PARTS
COIL MACH 16 (OLD)
Code W4015201000 W4015201010 Description Pilot multiple connection 24 VDC Pilot multiple connection 24 VAC
N.B.: if the pilot to be replaced bears the writing CE, you have to order among the NEW pilots, otherwise order among the OLD pilots.
2-92
Pos.-Nr. 12 12
2-93
Pos.-Nr. 4 6 8 10 12 With pre-wired cable 4 6 8 10 12 . . . . . : 24VDC = direct current 24VAC = alternating current With multiple connector
L1 148.5 182.5 216.5 250.5 284.5 148.5 182.5 216.5 250.5 284.5
L3 153 187 221 255 289 153 187 221 255 289
Description CVm EP 08 04 m mCN . . . . . CVm EP 08 06 m mCN . . . . . CVm EP 08 08 m mCN . . . . . CVm EP 08 10 m mCN . . . . . CVm EP 08 12 m mCN . . . . . CVm EP 08 04 m WC5 . . . . . CVm EP 08 06 m WC5 . . . . . CVm EP 08 08 m WC5 . . . . . CVm EP 08 10 m WC5 . . . . . CVm EP 08 12 m WC5 . . . . .
Code 24VDC 0225100401 0225100601 0225100801 0225101001 0225101201 0225400401 0225400601 0225400801 0225401001 0225401201
Code 24VAC 0225110401 0225110601 0225110801 0225111001 0225111201 0225410401 0225410601 0225410801 0225411001 0225411201
Weight [g] 504 644 784 924 1264 3642 3781 3923 4070 4195
DISTRIBUTORS
DISTRIBUTORS
Pos.-Nr. 10 10
Pos.-Nr. 4 6 8 With pre-wired cable 4 6 8 . . . . . : 24VDC = direct current 24VAC = alternating current
Description CVm EP 08 04 B mCN . . . . . CVm EP 08 06 B mCN . . . . . CVm EP 08 08 B mCN . . . . . CVm EP 08 04 B WC5 . . . . . CVm EP 08 06 B WC5 . . . . . CVm EP 08 08 B WC5 . . . . .
2-94
Pos.-Nr. 4 6 8
L2 86 120 154
NOTES
2-95
DISTRIBUTORS
DISTRIBUTORS
It is possible to buy the various assembly kits separately, to obtain a wide range of customised applications. The main units of the version with connector a or the pre-wired version b can easily be assembled with the multiple base l or the modular manifold base m. The manifold base allows particular circuits on the individual valves (feed from exhaust outlets, pressure differentiation, etc.) Likewise, on the other side it is also simple to mount the secondary unit c. This possibility is very interesting because it allows you to convert a base for monostable valves into a base for bistable valves. If you fi an additional secondary unit d on a base, you obtain an additional solenoid base that can be connected by means of return cables to a main base for monostable valves. The only thing to remember is that in all cases the total number of positions (connection to solenoid valve coil) must not exceed sixteen. The 10 pin return cable f is used when a main unit and a secondary
unit, or only one additional secondary unit, are mounted together on the multiple (or manifold) base. It has to be connected to the sockets shown in the diagram. For different requirements, it is also possible to have return cables with a connector at one end only g, or just the 10-wire cable h. These types are available in different lengths. A 10-wire connector kit i is also available if you need to complete the wiring. In the version with a connector, the 19-wire flyin connector e pilots the entire assembled base. This connector must be welded onto the 19-wire cable k, which is available in different lengths. The 19-wire connector complete with cable j is available in various lengths. The male connector q allows the free electrical connection of the multiple connector to be used, in order to control the valves placed in the system or to control the bistable valves by a monostable multiple electrical connection base.
2-96
c SECONDARY KIT
Code 0226200401 0226210401 0226200601 0226210601 0226200801 0226210801 Description multiple secondary connector kit, 4 positions 24VDC multiple secondary connector kit, 4 positions 24VAC multiple secondary connector kit, 6 positions 24VDC multiple secondary connector kit, 6 positions 24VAC multiple secondary connector kit, 8 positions 24VDC multiple secondary connector kit, 8 positions 24VAC Weight [g] 166 166 210 210 257 257
2-97
DISTRIBUTORS
DISTRIBUTORS
Code 022613....
Code 0226107201
Code 0226170002
Description 19-wire cable, one end with connector L = 2.5 m 19-wire cable, one end with connector L = 5 m 19-wire cable, one end with connector L = 10 m 19-wire cable, one end with connector L = 15 m 19-wire cable, one end with connector L = 20 m 19-wire cable, one end with connector L = 30 m
Code 0226107000
Package: 10 pieces
Code 0226107001
Code 0226007001
Package: 10 pieces
2-98
Code 0225004502
Code 0225004500
q MALE CONNECTOR
Code Description W0970504021 male connector 2 mm max power for each position = 5W max total power of multiple connector = 36W Example of a male connector
Code 0226007003
SOV 1/8 SOV 1/4 SOV 1/2 SOV on base mACH 16 mACH 18 ISO 1 ISO 2 PIV valves APr : progressive starter V3V: circuit switching valve
NOTES
2-99
DISTRIBUTORS
DISTRIBUTORS
The rmV-series miniature pressure regulator with pressure gauge for valves is specificall conceived for mounting on the outlets of valves with a 1/8 port. With limited cross dimension, it can be fitte to a series of small valves. The body is 16.5 mm wide and fit exactly on the valves of the mach 16 series for multiple electrical connection. Using the rmV, it is possible to differentiate the pressure of each single output of the valves. For example, if you mount it on port 2 and not on port 4, the pressure can be reduced on port 2 only. If you mount one for each port, the pressure on port 2 will differ from that on port 4, which in turn is less than the feed pressure (outlet 1). There are three 1/8 threaded rmV ports that are pneumatically connected in parallel. A small pressure gauge is mounted in one port; another port is plugged by an A7-type fittin and a third can take a fitting The user, however, can decide whether the layout of components is to be modifie or not. He might, for example, decide to mount three fitting to create a three-port reduced-pressure distributor.
TECHNICAL DATA
Threaded input connection Threaded output connection r egulation range bar mpa psi Input pressure bar mpa psi Flow rate at 6.3 bar (0.63 mpa - 91 psi) DP 1 bar Nl/min Flow rate at free exhaust at 6.3 bar (0.63 mpa - 91 psi) l/min N Fluid maximum temperature at 10 bar (1 mpa - 145 psi) Assembly position Use instructions 1/8 male 1/8 female 1 to 8 0.1 to 0.8 14.5 to 116 2 to 10 0.2 to 1 29 to 145 140 360 Filtered lubricated or unlubricated air C -10 to +60 F +14 to + 140 On valves The pressure must always be regulated in increasing values
DIMENSIONES
Code 9061601
Description rm V 1/8
APPLICATIONS - ASSEMBLY
Fixing the reducer onto the valve 3 outputs with G1/8 thread When mounting on valve units, with a pitch of less than 23 mm, alternate the gauge positions
2-100
mach 18 valve is manufactured according to the ISO 1507-1 standard, which in turn absorbs the VDmA 24563-02 rule. It comes in 5-way versions with 2 and 3 positions with solenoid or pneumatic actuation.
TECHNICAL DATA
Fluid Operating pressure: monostable monostable 5/3 bistable pilot-assisted minimum pilot pressure Operating temperature range Conductance C Critical ratio b Flow rate at 6 bar DP 0.5 bar Flow rate at 6 bar DP 1 bar Installation Assembly r ecommended lubricant Solenoid pilot manual Compatibility with oils Filtered air without lubrication; lubrication, if used, must be continuous bar 1.5 to 10 Vacuum to 10 pneumatic/1.9 to 10 solenoid/pneumatic Vacuum to 10 pneumatic/1 to 10 solenoid/pneumatic Vacuum to 10 2 to 10 -10 to +60 114.86 0.25 340 470 In any position (vertical assembly is not recommended for bistable valves subjected to vibration) On manifold bases ISO and UNI FD 22 Integrated coil to DIN 43650 C-shape monostable on solenoid pilot (with manual monostable on request) Please refer to page 6-7 of the tecnical documentation
COMPONENTS a VALVE BODy: Aluminium b CONTr OL/END CAP: Hostaform c SPOOL: Aluminium d GASKETS: Polyurethane e PISTONS: Hostaform f PISTON GASKET: Polyurethane g FILTEr : sintered bronze h PILOT: with integrated coil i SPr INGS: special steel
FLOW CHART
2-101
DISTRIBUTORS
MODULARITY
DISTRIBUTORS
Description ISO 15407-1 input end plate kit ISO 15407-1 manifold side base kit ISO 15407-1 intermediate bases ISO 15407-1 output end plate kit ISO 15407-1 blanking plate Intermediate diaphragm Connection bracket on DIN bar ISO 15407-1 individual base kit
KEY TO CODES
M S V FAMILY MSV solenoid/pneumatic MPV pneumatic D DIMENSIONS D ISO 15407-1/ VDmA 24563-02 5 FUNCTION 5 5/2 6 5/3 S O OPERATORS 14 SO solenoid/pneumatic SE solenoid-pilot-assisted PN pneumatic S RESETTING (12) mechanical springs bistable O O FURTHER DETAILS OO 5/2 CC closed centres OC open centres PC pressure centres 2 4 V D C VOLTAGE 24VDC 24VAC 110VAC 220VAC
S B
2-102
MONOSTABLE 5/2
MONOSTABLE 5/3
Symbol
Code 7063010130
Weight [g] 80
Symbol
Weight [g] 93 93 93
BISTABLE 5/2
NOTES
Symbol
Code 7063010110
Weight [g] 78
2-103
DISTRIBUTORS
ms
DISTRIBUTORS
MONOSTABLE 5/2
Symbol Code 7063020132 7063020133 7063020134 7063020135 7063030132 7063030133 7063030134 7063030135 Abbrev. mSV D5 SOS OO 24VDC mSV D5 SOS OO 24VAC mSV D5 SOS OO 110VAC mSV D5 SOS OO 220VAC mSV D5 SES OO 24VDC mSV D5 SES OO 24VAC mSV D5 SES OO 110VAC mSV D5 SES OO 220VAC Weight [g] 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110
MONOSTABLE 5/3
Symbol Code 7063020212 7063020213 7063020214 7063020215 7063020312 7063020313 7063020314 7063020315 7063020412 7063020413 7063020414 7063020415 7063030212 7063030213 7063030214 7063030215 7063030312 7063030313 7063030314 7063030315 7063030412 7063030413 7063030414 7063030415 Abbrev. mSV D6 SOS CC 24VDC mSV D6 SOS CC 24VAC mSV D6 SOS CC 110VAC mSV D6 SOS CC 220VAC mSV D6 SOS OC 24VDC mSV D6 SOS OC 24VAC mSV D6 SOS OC 110VAC mSV D6 SOS OC 220VAC mSV D6 SOS PC 24VDC mSV D6 SOS PC 24VAC mSV D6 SOS PC 110VAC mSV D6 SOS PC 220VAC mSV D6 SES CC 24VDC mSV D6 SES CC 24VAC mSV D6 SES CC 110VAC mSV D6 SES CC 220VAC mSV D6 SES OC 24VDC mSV D6 SES OC 24VAC mSV D6 SES OC 110VAC mSV D6 SES OC 220VAC mSV D6 SES PC 24VDC mSV D6 SES PC 24VAC mSV D6 SES PC 110VAC mSV D6 SES PC 220VAC Weight [g] 156 156 156 156 156 156 156 156 156 156 156 156 156 156 156 156 156 156 156 156 156 156 156 156
2-104
BISTABLE 5/2
Symbol Code 7063020112 7063020113 7063020114 7063020115 7063030112 7063030113 7063030114 7063030115 Abbrev. mSV D5 SOB OO 24VDC mSV D5 SOB OO 24VAC mSV D5 SOB OO 110VAC mSV D5 SOB OO 220VAC mSV D5 SEB OO 24VDC mSV D5 SEB OO 24VAC mSV D5 SEB OO 110VAC mSV D5 SEB OO 220VAC Weight [g] 143 143 143 143 143 143 143 143
ACCESSORIES
CONNECTOR 15 mm DIN 43650 SHAPE C
Code W0970501021 W0970501022 W0970501025 Description Connector 15 mm C shape DIN 43650 Connector 15 mm C shape DIN 43650 LED 24V Connector 15 mm C shape DIN 43650 LED+VDr 24V
SPARE PARTS
PILOT MACH 18 (OLD)
Code W4015101000 W4015101010 W4015101020 W4015101030 Description In-line pilot 24VDC In-line pilot 24VAC 50/60 Hz In-line pilot 110VAC 50/60 Hz In-line pilot 220VAC 50/60 Hz
N.B.: if the pilot to be replaced bears the writing CE, you have to order among the NEW pilots, otherwise order among the OLD pilots.
2-105
DISTRIBUTORS
DISTRIBUTORS
Code 0227100201
Code 0227200150
Code 0227200300
Code 0227100200
f INTERMEDIATE DIAPHRAGM
Code 0227200500
Weight [g] 24
Code 0227100000
Weight [g] 2
h INDIVIDUAL BASE
Code 0227300600
~9
14
Weight [g] 7
Code 0227200800
Weight [g] 51
2-106
The assembly surface dimensions of ISO1, ISO2 and ISO 3 valves are to ISO5599-1. They are available in the 5-way versions with 2 and 3 positions and with pneumatic or solenoid actuation.
TECHNICAL DATA
Fluid Operating pressure: monostable bistable pilot-assisted minimum pilot pressure Operating temperature range Nominal diameter Conductance C Critical ratio b Flow rate at 6 bar DP 0.5 bar Flow rate at 6 bar DP 1 bar Installation Assembly r ecommended lubricant Solenoid pilot manual maximum coil nut torque Compatibility with oils bar
ISO 1
ISO 2
ISO 3
Filtered air without lubrication; lubrication, if used, must be continuous Vacuum to 10 pneumatic / 2.5 to 10 solenoid/pneumatic Vacuum to 10 pneumatic / 1 to 10 solenoid/pneumatic Vacuum to 10 2.5 -10 to +60 7.5 12 15 250 657.14 971.43 0.36 0.25 0.43 700 1800 3200 1100 2700 4600 In any position (vertical assembly is not recommended for bistable valves subjected to vibration) On single and manifold bases according to ISO 5599/1 ISO and UNI FD 22 to CNOmO/in-line pilot / m12 to CNOmO Bistable on solenoid pilot monostable on valve body 1 Please refer to page 6-7 of the tecnical documentation
Nm
COMPONENTS a VALVE BODy: Aluminium b END CAP: HOSTAFOrm c SPOOL: chemically nickel-plated aluminium d DISTANCE PLATES: plastic e GASKETS: NBr f PISTONS: HOSTAFOrm g PISTON GASKET: NBr h FILTEr : sintered bronze i SPr INGS: special steel j OPEr ATOr : Brass pipe Stainless steel core
2-107
DISTRIBUTORS
FLOW CHART ISO 1 Flow rates (Nl/min) ISO 2 Flow rates (Nl/min)
DISTRIBUTORS
Pressure (bar) VALVES ISO 5599/1, SEr IES IPV-ISV ISO 3 Flow rates (Nl/min)
Pressure (bar)
PN SO SE DO DE CO CE
S B D
OO CC OC PC
2-108
2-109
DISTRIBUTORS
DISTRIBUTORS
2-110
2-111
DISTRIBUTORS
VALVES ISO 5599/1, PNEUMATIC, SERIES ISV WITH IN-LINE SOLENOID PILOT
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure: monostable bistable pilot-assisted minimum pilot pressure Operating temperature range Nominal diameter Conductance C Critical ratio b Flow rate at 6 bar DP 0.5 bar Flow rate at 6 bar DP 1 bar Tr A / Trr monostable at 6 bar Tr A / Trr bistable at 6 bar Solenoid pilot manual Coils bar 2.5 to 10 1 to 10 Vacuum to 10 2.5 -10 to +60 7.5 250 0.36 700 1100 24 / 50 20 / 20 In line pilot Bistable on solenoid pilot 30 mm side DIN 43650 Form A ISO 22 mm side 1 ISO 1
DISTRIBUTORS
Nm
2-112
COILS AND CONNECTORS FOR ISO 5599/1 SOLENOID VALVES SERIES ISV
COILS SIDE 22 mm
Voltage tolerance: 10% to + 15% Insulation class: F155 Degree of protection: IP65 EN60529 with connector Avoid prolonged exposure to the atmospheric agents Code W0215000151 W0215000101 W0215000111 W0215000121 W0215000131 Abbrev. Coil 22 8 BA 2W-12VDC Coil 22 8 BA 2W-24VDC Coil 22 8 BA 3.5VA-24VAC Coil 22 8 BA 3.5VA-110VAC Coil 22 8 BA 3.5VA-220VAC Coil temperature 100% ED: 70C at 20C Ambient temperature According to Atex 94/9 CE rule, group 2, category 3 GD Nominal voltage 12Vcc 24Vcc 24V 50/60Hz 110V 50/60Hz 220V 50/60Hz Absorption Inrush 2W 2W 5.3VA 5.3VA 5.3VA
COILS SIDE 30 mm
Electric contact DIN43650 shape A ISO 4400 Voltage tolerance: -10% + 10% Insulation class: F155 Code W0210010100 W0210011100 W0210012100 W0210013100 Abbrev. Coil 30 8 4W-24VDC Coil 30 8 4VA-24VAC Coil 30 8 4VA-110VAC Coil 30 8 4VA-220VAC Degree of protection: IP65 EN60529 with connector Avoid prolonged exposure to the atmospheric agents According to Atex 94/9 CE rule, group 2, category 3 GD Nominal voltage 24Vcc 24V 50/60Hz 110V 50/60Hz 220V 50/60Hz Absorption Inrush 5W 10VA 10VA 10VA
Improved IP65 protection, even after prolonged exposure to atmospheric agents. Applicable to valves with a technopolymer control.
2-113
DISTRIBUTORS
DISTRIBUTORS
VALVES ISO 5599/1, SOLENOID/PNEUmATIC, SEr IES ISV WITH m12 CONNECTOr
2-114
WIRING DIAGRAM
mONOSTABLE
BISTABLE
2-115
VALVES ISO 5599/1, SOLENOID/PNEUmATIC, SEr IES ISV WITH m12 CONNECTOr
DISTRIBUTORS
BASES ISO 5599/1 FOr VALVES SEr IES IPV-ISV SIZE 1 AND 2
Reference a b c d e f g h i j k l m
DISTRIBUTORS
Code ISO 1 0228000150 0228000155 0228000200 0228000201 0228000210 0228000300 0228000301 0228000500 0228000400 0228000600 0228000100 0228000110 0228000700
Code ISO 2 0228001150 0228001155 0228001200 0228001201 0228001210 0228001300 0228001301 0228001500 0228001400 0228001100 0228001110 0228001700
Description manifold base - side ports manifold base with bottom ports Input end plate Additional input end plate Blind end plate Intermediate - top ports Intermediate - back ports Blanking plate Intermediate diaphragm ISO 1/ISO 2 port adapter Individual base - side ports Base - bottom ports Assembly kit
2-116
Description manifold base, side ports, ISO 1 manifold base, side ports, ISO 2
Description manifold base, bottom ports, ISO 1 manifold base, bottom ports, ISO 2
Description Additional input end plate, ISO 1 Additional input end plate, ISO 2
2-117
BASES ISO 5599/1 FOr VALVES SEr IES IPV-ISV SIZE 1 AND 2
DISTRIBUTORS
DISTRIBUTORS
BASES ISO 5599/1 FOr VALVES SEr IES IPV-ISV SIZE 1 AND 2
h BLANKING PLATE
ISO 1 ISO 2
Weight [g] 47 96
2-118
i INTERMEDIATE DIAPHRAGM
j DIMENSION ADAPTER
Weight [g] 4 7
Code 0228000600
Description Individual base side ports, ISO 1 Individual base side ports, ISO 2
Description Individual base bottom ports, ISO 1 Individual base bottom ports, ISO 2
m ASSEMBLY KIT
ISO 1 ISO 2
Weight [g] 47 47
2-119
BASES ISO 5599/1 FOr VALVES SEr IES IPV-ISV SIZE 1 AND 2
DISTRIBUTORS
BASES ISO 5599/1 FOr VALVES SEr IES IPV-ISV SIZE ISO 3
Reference b c h k l
DISTRIBUTORS
Description manifold base with bottom ports Input end plate Blanking plate Individual base - side ports Base - bottom ports
2-120
Code 0228002155
Code 0228002200
h BLANKING PLATE
k INDIVIDUAL BASE
SIDE PORTS
Code 0228002500
Code 0228002100
NOTES
Code 0228002110
2-121
BASES ISO 5599/1 FOr VALVES SEr IES IPV-ISV SIZE ISO 3
DISTRIBUTORS
TECHNICAL DATA
max upstream pressure Pressure range Pressure gauge range Flow rate at 6 bar DP 1 bar Operating temperature range Fixing screw on ISO 5599/1 base Installation Instructions for use
ISO 1
ISO 2
bar 13 bar 0 to 12 bar 0 to 12 Nl/min 400 550 C 10 to +60 m5 ant-extraction m6 anti-extraction In any position Downstream pressure must always be set to increasing values
DISTRIBUTORS
SANDWICH REGULATOR FOR ISO 1 VALVES
Symbol Code 0228000804 Description Sandwich regulator 1 0 to 12 bar ISO 1 Weight [g] 760
0228000814*
760
* A pilot-assisted valve needs to be used since port 1 relieves pressure, it is not under pressure
0228001814*
900
* A pilot-assisted valve needs to be used since port 1 relieves pressure, it is not under pressure
2-122
The following valves come in a version for use with UL and CSA-approved coils. Series 70 valves, sizes 1/8, 1/4 and 1/2 Series 70 valves on base Namur valves ISO 5599/1 valves, sizes 1 and 2 ISO 5599/1 valves with in-line pilot UL certification refers to the coil system and pilot; CSA certification refers to the coil only.
NOTES UL is an independent organisation involved in the safety certificatio of products for the North American market. Coils and solenoid pilots are certifie under UL 429 - Electrically operated valves. The Ur mark concerns UL-recognised components and is used for ones that are part of a larger product or system. This is why Ur can be read on the coil. The certificatio of these components is only valid if they are used in the manufacturers stated conditions (in our case voltage 10% etc.). The company that manufactures the certifie components is included in a UL-listing of certifie manufacturers. The list does not include the name metal Work, but rather the name Nass magnet (UL file mH13513), with which we have an agreement for the supply and customisation of coils and solenoid valves. The use of approved coils and pilots does not automatically certify the whole valve, nor application of a specifi machine or plant. Such approval will therefore be up to the manufacturer of the machine or plant. CSA (Canadian Standard Association) safety standards are applicable in Canada. The coil complies with CSA 22.2. The valves on which these coils can be mounted have the same code and description as those of the corresponding standard valves, followed by the suffi L. Example: Code Description Standard version 7020020400 SOV 33 SOS NO Approved version 7020020400L SOV 33 SOS NO L
All valves and units of this type have a painted or anodized aluminium control and can only mount metal Work coils having a code that begins with W0217 (approved coil). For the technical data, a diagram of the components and the code key, please refer to the section in the catalogue of the corresponding family of standard valves. UL AND CSA COILS Ur -marked coils are therefore components that can form part of a larger product of system. Approval of the component is valid in the above operating conditions only. The coils must be mounted on suitable valves, ones for which the Metal Work code ends with L.
Voltage tolerance: 10% Insulation class: F155 Degree of protection: IP65 EN60529 with connector Avoid prolonged exposure to the atmospheric agents Temperature range: from +20C at +50C (DC version) from +20C at +40C (AC version) max coil temperature at ED 100%: from +58C at +20C (DC version) from +81C at +20C (AC version)
Abbrev. Coil 22 9 2,9W 12VDC Ur Coil 22 9 2,6W 24VDC Ur Coil 22 9 6/4.9 VA 24V 50/60Hz Ur Coil 22 9 6/4.9 VA 110V 50/60Hz Ur
W0217000131
Nominal voltage 12Vcc 24Vcc 24V 50 Hz 24V 60 Hz 110V 50 Hz 110V 60 Hz 48 Vcc 230V 50 Hz 230V 60 Hz
2-123
DISTRIBUTORS
Abbrev. SOV 23 SOS NO L SOV 23 SOS NC L SOV 25 SOS OO L SOV 25 SOB OO L SOV 23 SOB OO L SOV 26 SOS CC L SOV 26 SOS OC L SOV 26 SOS PC L
Weight [g] 130 130 158 220 195 250 250 250
DISTRIBUTORS
SOV B5 SOS OO L SOV B5 SOB OO L SOV B6 SOS CC L SOV B6 SOS OC L SOV B6 SOS PC L
Abbrev. SOV 33 SOS NO L SOV 33 SOS NC L SOV 35 SOS OO L SOV 35 SOB OO L SOV 33 SOB OO L SOV 36 SOS CC L SOV 36 SOS OC L SOV 36 SOS PC L
Weight [g] 197 197 245 326 280 364 364 364
VALVES NAMUR 7021020100L 7021020200L SOV A5 SOS OO L SOV A5 SOB OO L 280 360
2-124
Abbrev. ISV 55 SOS OO L ISV 55 SOB OO L ISV 56 SOS CC L ISV 56 SOS OC L ISV 56 SOS PC L
ISV 65 SOS OO L ISV 65 SOB OO L ISV 66 SOS CC L ISV 66 SOS OC L ISV 66 SOS PC L
CNOMO SOLENOID VALVE Code Description 9453922L Cnomo 3/2 with bistable manual actuation
ELECTROPNEUMATIC CONTROL FOR: VALVES ISO 5599/1 WITH IN-LINE SOLENOID PILOT
Symbol Code 7053021100L 7053021200L 7053022100L 7053022200L 7053022300L A = 20 for 5/2 28.5 for 5/3 Abbrev. ISV 55 DOS OO L ISV 55 DOB OO L ISV 56 DOS CC L ISV 56 DOS OC L ISV 56 DOS PC L Weight [g] 396 450 516 516 516
2-125
DISTRIBUTORS
Starting from a series of sturdy, reliable valves, such as those to ISO 5599/1, some special features have been added, such as the presence of a valve status diagnostic system and the creation of a double channel guaranteeing architecture redundancy. The simplest version features one electropneumatically-operated 5/2 monostable valve. It is common knowledge that when this type of valve is in the idle state (coil not energized), port 1 is connected to port 2, and port 4 relieves. When the valve is operated (coil energized), port 1 is connected to port 4, and port 2 relieves. When the coil is de-energized again, the valve is returned to the idle state (so port 4 relieves) by means of a spring that returns the spool to the home position. In the event of a failure, the spool may remain in the actuating position, even with coil de-energized, leaving port 4 pressurized. To offset this problem, we have added a Hall-effect sensor that reads the spool position. This means that when the valve is deactivated, the sensor is on, and when the valve is activated, the sensor is off. A status in which the sensor is off and the coil de-energized indicates a problem. To reduce the probability of risk during plant maintenance, the manual actuator mounted on the Cnomo electric control is the monostable type. The sensor inside the valve is available in the standard version with a 2.5m three-wire cable (standard or ATEX certified or with an m8 connector and a 300 mm cable. This valve, which is available in 3 sizes for the ISO 5599/1 series, is a category 2 component according to ISO EN 13849 and is suitable for use in safety circuits up to PL=c. For those requiring higher PLs, we have also developed a double-channel version (redundant) that requires the use of ISO 5599/1 valves with a monitored coil arranged so that ports 2 are in parallel and ports 4 are in series. If just one of the valves de-energizes, port 4 relieves, so, even if one of the two coils remains blocked, the other guarantees relief of the compressed-air circuit. In this case, too, the presence of spool position sensors can be used to monitor the status. The double valve is also available in 3 sizes for the ISO 5599/1 series. It is a category 4 component according to ISO EN 13849 and is suitable for use in safety circuits up to PL=e. Both the single- and the double-channel valve come with: - a Type-Approval n P13104/11/mC/nb issued by Bureau Veritas in accordance with EN ISO 13849 - a certificat of compliance examination to the machinery Directive 2006/42/EC CV **No. CV 002-10-2011 released by Bureau Veritas.
2-126
DISTRIBUTORS
Class of protection Noise level max coil ring nut torque CE marking ATEX category (only for versions with an ATEX sensor) Safety function Type of sensor used B10d Category - ISO EN 13849 DC PL - ISO EN 13849
Nm
* To avoid malfunctions, we recommend using metal Work accessories ** The declaration can be downloaded from www.metalwork.it IMPORTANT: Do not mount 2 or more SAFE AIr valves in adjacent positions. A ny ferromagnetic masses must be at least 30mm from the sensor. P revent magnetic field from creating disturbance in the sensor area.
COMPONENTS a VALVE BODy: Aluminium b END CAP: Hostaform c SPOOL: chemically nickel-plated aluminium d DISTANCE PLATES: plastic e GASKETS: NBr f PISTONS: Hostaform g PISTON GASKET: NBr h FILTEr : sintered bronze i SPr INGS: special steel j OPEr ATOr : Brass pipe Stainless steel core k LOCKING rING: special steel l mAGNET: Neodymium m SENSOr : Hall effect
2-127
DISTRIBUTORS
bar C mm Nl/min bar bar/bar Nl/min Nl/min ms/ms Nl/min bar bar/bar Nl/min
DISTRIBUTORS
ISO 2 - ON rELIEF
ISO 3 - ON DELIVEr y
ISO 3 - ON rELIEF
KEY TO CODES
ISV FAMILY ISV ISO solenoid/ pneumatic 5 DIMENSIONS 5 ISO1 6 ISO2 7 ISO3 5 FUNCTION 5 5/2 SO OPERATORS 14 SO solenoid/ pneumatic SE electric pilot-assisted S RESETTING 12 mechanical springs OO FURTHER DETAILS OO 5/2 3F SENSOR 3F 2.5 m 3 wires M8 0.3 m m8 AT 2 m ATEX
2-128
2-129
DISTRIBUTORS
EXAMPLE OF A SAFETY CIRCUIT WITH A SINGLE VALVE Below is an example of a wiring diagram for controlling metal Work SAFE AIr single valves using Pilz components. Circuit components: - a Pilz safety module PNOZ s3 for controlling the emergency stop button; terminal y32 indicates the status of the module, which can be relayed to the machine control logic - an emergency stop button S1 (Pilz - PIT es Set) linked to terminals S11-S12-S22-S23 of the PNOZ s3 - a metal Work SAFE AIr solenoid valve, the 24 VDC coil of which is fed by terminal 14 of the PNOZ s3 (the other terminal of the coil is 0 V); the valves Hall-effect sensor is 24 VDC - a start/reset button S2 - a relay K1, controlled by the valve sensor; an NO contact of the relay is in series with button S2 of the PNOZ s3. Expected behaviour with the system operating correctly: - system deactivated: contact 14 is OFF the coil is de-energized the sensor is ON relay K1 is energized contact K1 is closed contact y32 is OFF - with the system activated via the start/reset button: contact 14 is ON the coil is energized the sensor is OFF relay K1 is de-energized contact K1 is open contact y32 is ON In the event of a malfunction (e.g. spool jam), the coil is de-energized but the sensor remains OFF, relay K1 remains de-energized, contact K1 remains open (preventing subsequent restarts) and contact y32 is OFF. In the event of a valve fault, the circuit in the diagram below does not allow relief of the compressed air system. Sensor status must be monitored to assess valve operation. Contact y32 indicates the status of the PNOZ s3, not the status of the sensor. All the electrical connections between the various components must comply with the applicable safety regulations. If the emergency button is operated at a frequency of 1 actuation per hour, the circuit activates a safety function with PL = c (calculations made with the PAScal programme by Pilz). responsibility for fina checking that PL lies with the person assembling the circuit.
2-130
DISTRIBUTORS
Class of protection Noise level CE marking ATEX category (only for versions with an ATEX sensor) max coil ring nut torque Safety function Type of sensor used B10d Category - ISO EN 13849 DC CCF PL - ISO EN 13849
Nm
* To avoid malfunctions, we recommend using metal Work accessories ** The declaration can be downloaded from www.metalwork.it IMPORTANT: ny ferromagnetic masses must be at least 30mm from the sensor. A P revent magnetic field from creating disturbance in the sensor area.
WIRING DIAGRAM
2-131
DISTRIBUTORS
bar C Nl/min bar bar/bar Nl/min Nl/min Nl/min bar bar/bar Nl/min ms/ms
DISTRIBUTORS
ISO 2 - ON rELIEF
ISO 3 - ON DELIVEr y
ISO 3 - ON rELIEF
KEY TO CODES
ISV FAMILY ISV ISO solenoid/ pneumatic 5 DIMENSIONS 5 ISO1 6 ISO2 7 ISO3 5 FUNCTION 5 5/2 SO OPERATORS 14 SO solenoid/ pneumatic SE electric pilot-assisted S RESETTING 12 mechanical springs DD FURTHER DETAILS DD double 5/2 3F SENSOR 3F 2.5 m 3 wires M8 0.3 m m8 AT 2 m ATEX
2-132
Code 7057021110 7057121110 7057221110 7057021410 7057121410 7057221410 7058021110 7058121110 7058221110 7058021410 7058121410 7058221410 7059021110 7059121110 7059221110 7059021410 7059121410 7059221410
Size ISO 1 ISO 1 ISO 1 ISO 1 ISO 1 ISO 1 ISO 2 ISO 2 ISO 2 ISO 2 ISO 2 ISO 2 ISO 3 ISO 3 ISO 3 ISO 3 ISO 3 ISO 3
Abbrev. ISV 55 SOS DD 3F ISV 55 SOS DD m8 ISV 55 SOS DD AT ISV 55 SES DD 3F ISV 55 SES DD m8 ISV 55 SES DD AT ISV 65 SOS DD 3F ISV 65 SOS DD m8 ISV 65 SOS DD AT ISV 65 SES DD 3F ISV 65 SES DD m8 ISV 65 SES DD AT ISV 75 SOS DD 3F ISV 75 SOS DD m8 ISV 75 SOS DD AT ISV 75 SES DD 3F ISV 75 SES DD m8 ISV 75 SES DD AT
A 112 112 112 112 112 112 146 146 146 146 146 146 186 186 186 186 186 186
B 152.5 152.5 152.5 152.5 152.5 152.5 176 176 176 176 176 176 188 188 188 188 188 188
C 100 100 100 100 100 100 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116
D 118 118 118 118 118 118 145 145 145 145 145 145 155 155 155 155 155 155
E 86 86 86 86 86 86 113 113 113 113 113 113 123 123 123 123 123 123
F1 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 3/8 G 3/8 G 3/8 G 3/8 G 3/8 G 3/8 G 1/2 G 1/2 G 1/2 G 1/2 G 1/2 G 1/2
F2 m5 m5 m5 m5 m5 m5 G 1/8 G 1/8 G 1/8 G 1/8 G 1/8 G 1/8 G 1/8 G 1/8 G 1/8 G 1/8 G 1/8 G 1/8
G 50 50 50 50 50 50 63 63 63 63 63 63 78 78 78 78 78 78
H 100 100 100 100 100 100 134 134 134 134 134 134 174 174 174 174 174 174
I 88 88 88 88 88 88 104 104 104 104 104 104 104 104 104 104 104 104
L 6 6 6 6 6 6 13 13 13 13 13 13 9 9 9 9 9 9
S 23.5 23.5 23.5 23.5 23.5 23.5 29 29 29 29 29 29 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5
Sensor 2.5 m 3 wires 0.3 m m8 2 m ATEX 2.5 m 3 wires 0.3 m m8 2 m ATEX 2.5 m 3 wires 0.3 m m8 2 m ATEX 2.5 m 3 wires 0.3 m m8 2 m ATEX 2.5 m 3 wires 0.3 m m8 2 m ATEX 2.5 m 3 wires 0.3 m m8 2 m ATEX
Weight [g] 2100 2100 2100 2100 2100 2100 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 5300 5300 5300 5300 5300 5300
NOTES
2-133
DISTRIBUTORS
EXAMPLE OF A SAFETY CIRCUIT WITH A DOUBLE VALVE Below is an example of a wiring diagram for controlling double valves SAFE AIr a metal Work using Pilz components. Circuit components: - a Pilz PNOZ mm 0.1p modular safety system - an emergency stop button S1 (Pilz - PIT es Set) linked to terminals T0-T1-I8-I9 of the PNOZ mm 0.1p - a metal Work double solenoid valve SAFE AIr , the 24 VDC coils of which are fed by terminals O0 (SV1) and O1 (SV2) of the PNOZ mm 0.1p (the other terminals of the coils are OV); the valves Hall-effect sensors are 24 VDC - the sensor signals are relayed to terminals 16 (SV1) and 17 (SV2) of the PNOZ mm 0.1p - a start/reset button S2 Expected behaviour with the system operating correctly: - system deactivated: contacts O0 and O1 are OFF the coils are de-energized the sensors are ON (and hence signals to terminals 16 and 17) if one of the sensors is OFF, the Pilz module does not allow subsequent start/reset - with the system activated via the start/reset button: contacts O0 and O1 are ON the coils are energized the sensors are OFF (and hence signals to terminals 16 and 17) The PNOZ mm0.1p module is programmed so that: - when either sensor is OFF, and the coils are de-energized, the module does not allow subsequent restarts. - when the valves are energized, the 2 sensors must go off within the valve actuation time (12 ms for ISO1s, 24 ms for ISO2s and 50 ms for ISO3s), otherwise the 2 valves are switched off again. The programme can be downloaded from www.metalwork.it (the licence for programming Pilz modules is not included). All the electrical connections between the various components must comply with the applicable safety regulations. If the emergency button is operated at a frequency of 1 actuation per hour, the circuit activates a safety function with PL = e (calculations made with the PAScal programme by Pilz). r esponsibility for fina checking that PL lies with the person assembling the circuit.
2-134
DISTRIBUTORS
ATEX EFFETTO HALL N.O. PNP from 18 to 30 DC # 1.7 # 10% of Ub # 2.2 # 10 # 70 1000 Yes Yes Yes EN 60 947-5-2 Yellow 2.6 mT # 0.1 mT (Ub and ta fixed IP 68, IP 69K 30 g, 11 ms, from 10 to 55 Hz, 1 mm 109 impulses from -20 to +45 PA PVC; 3 x 0.12 mm2 3 II 3G Ex nA op is IIC T4 Gc X II 3D Ex tc IIIC T135C Dc IP67 X
V W V mA mA Hz
ACCESSORIES
Refer to page 2-113 for coils and connectors
NOTES
2-135
DISTRIBUTORS
2-136
DISTRIBUTORS
NOTES
NOTES
2-137
DISTRIBUTORS
2-138
DISTRIBUTORS
NOTES
PAGE 2-140
P HDM + AS-Interface
PAGE 2-144
P HDM + pROFIBUS-Dp
PAGE 2-149
P HDM + c An open
PAGE 2-153
P HDM + B&R
PAGE 2-159
PAGE 2-162
P MUl TIMAc H
PAGE 2-166
SEE
PAGE 2-190
SEE
PAGE 2-190
SEE
PAGE 2-190
PAGE 2-174
PAGE 2-175
2-139
DISTRIBUTORS
hdm s are the ideal solution for those requiring the unbeatable performance, flexibility and modularity of multimach valves combined with sturdy mechanics and a high degree of protection against external agents. Each valve is enclosed in a reinforced technopolymer protective shell that acts as a shock-absorber and prevents the infiltration of di t. t he class of protection is iP65. t he smooth, rounded design makes hdm s ideal for applications requiring frequent washing without the deposit of residues. All the pneumatic connections are on one side, with built-in push-in fittings. t he user interface is on another side so that the fitter and the se vice engineer have everything at hand. f lexibility is total: there are 1-16 valves, input and output terminals for pipes of different sizes and intermediate modules for separate inputs and outputs. o ne very important new feature is that valves of different capacities can be mounted as required. t hree different valve sizes can be combined at will. t his means a valve can be replaced at any time by another one offering a different performance. it only takes a few seconds to replace or add a valve. t o do this, merely loosen the two grub screws fixing the valve to the adjacent ones. Since the electrical signal is relayed from one valve to the next by means of gold-plated contacts connected to an electronic board, the electrical connections are entirely automatic. t he ratio of the hdm s flow rate to its dimensions is unrivalled miniaturisation and efficiency have reached a peak
DISTRIBUTORS
hdm + mul ti- Pol E conn Ection
TECHNICAL DATA
v alve port connections 4,6,8,10 mm automatic fitting for po ts 2 and 4 / power supply port for 10 or 12 mm automatic fitting / 3/8 thread for exhaust po t, m5 thread for exhaust pilot port c onnection on the end-plate for the supply of pilots Automatic fitting 4 m maximum number of pilots 16 maximum number of valves 16 ( same as the max. no. of pilots ) o perating temperature range c -10 to +60 f luid f iltered air without lubrication; lubrication, if used, must be continuous f low rate at 6.3 bar DP 1 bar n l/min 11.5 mm 4 11.5 mm 6 14 mm 8 23 mm 8 23 mm 10 version 5/2 and 3/2 200 500 650 1000 1200 version 5/3 200 300 300 500 500 Pressure range bar X (pilot supply) 1-11 (valve supply) t erminal 1-1 3 to 7 vacuum at 10 t erminal 1 3 to 7 v oltage range 24 vdc 10% Power W 0.9 c ontrol Pn P o n Pn insulation class f 155 degree of protection iP65 (with conveyed exhust) Solenoid rating 100% Ed tr A/trr 2x3/2 monostable at 6 bar ms 8 / 45 tr A/trr 5/2 monostable at 6 bar ms 8 / 33 tr A/trr 5/2 bistable at 6 bar ms 20 / 20 tr A/trr 5/3 cc monostable at 6 bar ms 20 / 20 n ote on use insert the pipes in the fittings, before passing air through the valves, otherwise the basket may be pulled out of its seat by the flow of ai . c ompatibility with oils Please refer to page 6-7 of the tecnical documentation
COMPONENTS
a b c d e f g h k l m n o p q
2-140
Exhaust - Solenoid pilot 82/84 v alve supply - port 1 t hreaded connection of exhausts 3/5 v alve supply - port 11 Electrical control supply X Blind end-plate or right end-plate 1-11 Screw for valve wall-mounting u tility port for pipe 4, 6, 8 or 10 mm manual control l Ed (l Ed on, solenoid valve energised) Pneumatic symbol identification of the monostable or bistable manual contro v alve ordering code v alve identification cod Blank space for valve number
n o p q
THE MULTIMACH WORLD: FLEXIBILITY t he numbers permit rapid identification of the function and assembly position of the single elements represented as follows. Refer to page 2-162 for valves, intermediates elements and common accessories.
A f ixing from above using the 1 or 1-11 input terminal and the blind terminal. B C f ixing from above using the 1 or 1-11 input terminal and the blind terminal, using the m5 threads on the bottom and the rear of the terminals. D f ixing from above using the 1 or 1-11 input terminal and the blind terminal, using the m5 threads on the front of the terminals. An opening for the pipes is made in the plate. E f ixing on the din bar with end-plate 1 or 1-11 and blind and plate, using the push-in bracket code 0227301600. F l ateral fixing using the blind te minal, and its the m4 threads on the side lateral. Note: The sole fixing admitted is the one showed. KEY TO CODES
H D M VALVE h eavy duty multimach iP65 2 INPUT END-PLATE 2 End-plate 1-11 pipe 10 3 End-plate 1 pipe 10 2S End-plate 1-11 pipe 12 8 ELECTRICAL BASE 8 d -Sub 25 wire M MANUAL TYPE monostable manual control Bistable manual control I6 - W 8 - W 6 - O 4 - L 8 - 5 TYPE OF VALVE n 2 3/2 nc n 2 3/2 no 3/2 no + 3/2 nc 5/2 monostable 5/2 bistable 5/3 monostable 5/2 monostable right-end-plate 1-11 pipe 12 blind end-plate Passing-intermede Blind intermediate Exhaust section c artridge 4 c artridge 6 c artridge 8 - 14 mm c artridge 8 - 23 mm c artridge 10 1 4 - 1 6 FURTHER DETAILS 14 iP65 25-wire shell 16 n 2 brackets for din bar
M B
I W L V K O *F 4 5 6 7 20 4 6 8 8S 10
2-141
DISTRIBUTORS
WIRING DIAGRAM
Bistable or n 2 3/2 5/2 mostable type v 5/2 mostable type f
DISTRIBUTORS
not E: t he type f monostable valve uses one Pin only (like the v ) but occupies 2 signals.
Common (P25)
t his end-plate allows for supplies to be differentiated Port 2 Port 4 Pilot supply
2-142
Acce SSORIeS
CABLES
Code 0226180107
Weight [g] 65
Code Description 0226107201 10-wire cable 0226107101 19-wire cable 0226107102 25-wire cable Specify the number of metres desired.
Description c onnector iP 65 + 25-wire 45 cable l = 1 m c onnector iP 65 + 25-wire 45 cable l = 2.5 m c onnector iP 65 + 25-wire 45 cable l = 5 m
Code 0226107000
2-143
DISTRIBUTORS
+ AS-Interface
t he hdm +AS-interface system has been designed in such a way that the pneumatic input terminal contains all the electronics, signals and AS-i connectors. it is a very compact and sturdy system where everything is housed in a thick casing aluminium to protect the delicate components against impact. t he valves and accessories are hdm standard, which means that you only need to replace the input terminal to convert the valve island with multiple connector into an AS-i island. All the advantages of the hdm system can be exploited: the possibility of mounting valves of different size, with fittings for pipes 4, 6 or 8; the insertion of intermediate modules with separate power supply or outlets; aluminium valves with chemical nickel plating enclosed in a protective casing in reinforced technopolymer, with an index of protection iP65. t he arrangement of the functions continues the traditional optimisation of the hdm s: the user interface of the valves and bus all on one side, so that the fitter and se vice engineer have everything within easy reach: all compressed air connections on the other side; the connectors for AS-i cables on the opposite side longitudinally, so that several valve islands can be arranged in line, fixed on a din bar. t here are many AS-i terminal variants to meet all possible requirements: with 1 node, for controlling up to 4 valve solenoid pilots; with 2 nodes, for controlling up to 8 solenoid pilots; with 1 note for output and input for controlling up to 4 solenoid pilots and receiving up to 4 input signals. t he input connectors are m8 or m12; with 2 nodes for output and input for controlling up to 8 solenoid pilots and receiving up to 8 input signals with m8 connectors; power supply with the AS-i yellow cable only; power supply with two cables: the yellow AS-i cable and the black power supply cable. traditional v.2.1 addressing or extended AB v.3.0 address for an increase in the node numbers which can be connected up to 62 and for a better diagnostics Note: if you use valves 8S type or 10 exploiting their flow capacity it is necessary that the feeding pressure is at least 6 bar (to avoid the pressure to decrease too much on the pilots).
DISTRIBUTORS
TECHNICAL DATA
v alve port connections maximum number of pilots maximum number of valves o perating temperature range f luid f low rate at 6.3 bar DP 1 bar 4,6,8,10 mm automatic fitting for po ts 2 and 4 / power supply port for 10 or 12* automatic fitting 3/8 thread for exhaust port, m5 thread for exhaust pilot port t erminal with 1 node = 4 / terminal with 2 node = 8 t erminal with 1 node = 4 ( same as the max. no. of pilots ) / terminal with 2 node = 8 ( same as the max. no. of pilots ) -10 to +60 f iltered air without lubrication; lubrication, if used, must be continuous 11.5 mm 4 11.5 mm 6 14 mm 8 23 mm 8 23 mm 10 200 500 650 1000 1200 200 300 300 500 500 X (pilot supply) 1-11 (valve supply) 3 to 7 bar vacuum at 10 bar 3 to 7 bar 24 vdc 10% 0.9 f 155 iP 65 (with conveyed exhaust, and unused in Put S sealed with caps/plugs) 100% Ed 8 / 45 8 / 33 20 / 20 20 / 20 insert the pipes in the fittings, before passing air through the valves, othe wise the basket may be pulled out of its seat by the flow of ai . *with right-end-plate 1-11 Please refer to page 6-7 of the tecnical documentation
c n l/min version 5/2 and 3/2 version 5/3 t erminal 1-11 t erminal 1
Pressure range
v oltage range Power for each pilot Solenoid Pilot insulation class degree of protection Solenoid rating tr A/trr 2x3/2 monostable at 6 bar tr A/trr 5/2 monostable at 6 bar tr A/trr 5/2 bistable at 6 bar tr A/trr 5/3 cc monostable at 6 bar n ote on use
ms ms ms ms
COMPONENTS
a c d f g h k l m n o p q r s t 2-144 Exhaust - Solenoid pilot 82/84 t hreaded connection of exhausts 3/5 v alve supply - port 1-11-X Blind end-plate or right-end-plate 1-11 Screw for valve wall-mounting u tility port for pipe 4, 6, 8, 10 mm manual control l Ed (l Ed on, solenoid valve energised) Pneumatic symbol identification of the monostable or bistable manual contro v alve ordering code v alve identification cod Blank space for valve number Black cable for 24v (if present) AS-int Erf Ac E yellow cable AS-int Erf Ac E led
n o p q
THE MULTIMACH WORLD: FLEXIBILITY t he numbers permit rapid identification of the function and assembly position of the single elements represented as follows. Refer to page 2-162 for valves, intermediates elements and common accessories.
2 nod ES
1 nod E
A f ixing from above using the 1 or 1-11 input terminal and the blind terminal. B C f ixing from above using the 1 or 1-11 input terminal and the blind terminal, using the m5 threads on the bottom and the rear of the terminals. D f ixing from above using the 1 or 1-11 input terminal and the blind terminal, using the m5 threads on the front of the terminals. An opening for the pipes is made in the plate. E f ixing on the din bar with end-plate 1 or 1-11 and blind and plate, using the push-in bracket code 0227301600. F l ateral fixing using the blind te minal, and its the m4 threads on the side lateral. Note: The sole fixing admitted is the one showed.
2-145
DISTRIBUTORS
KEY TO CODES
H D M VALVE h eavy duty multimach iP65 3 INPUT END-PLATE 3 End-plate 1 A S - 4 ELECTRICAL BASE v ersion with standard address AS-4 1 node, 4 out, yellow cable AS-8 2 nodes, 8 out, yellow cable AO-4 1 node, 4 out e 4 in m8, yellow cable AP-4 1 node, 4 out e 4 in m12, yellow cable AZ-4 1 node, 4 out, yellow cable and black cable AZ-8 2 nodes, 8 out, yellow cable and black cable AE-4 1 node, 4 out e 4 in m8, yellow cable and black cable AE-8 2 nodes, 8 out e 8 in m8, yellow cable and black cable M MANUAL TYPE M monostable manual control B Bistable manual control I6 - W 8 - W 6 - O 4 - L 8 - 5 TYPE OF VALVE I n 2 3/2 nc W n 2 3/2 no L 3/2 no + 3/2 nc V 5/2 monostable K 5/2 bistable O 5/3 monostable *F 5/2 monostable 4 right-end-plate 1-11 pipe 12 5 blind end-plate 6 Passing-intermede 7 Blind intermediate 20 Exhaust section 4 c artridge 4 6 c artridge 6 8 c artridge 8 - 14 mm 8S c artridge 8 - 23 mm 10 c artridge 10 1 6 FURTHER DETAILS 16 n 2 brackets for din bar
DISTRIBUTORS
hdm + AS- interface WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTE: t he type f monostable valve uses one Pin only (like the v ) but occupies 2 signals.
Bistable or n2 3/2
node 2
node1
Common
* m7 plug for 2nd node addressing. n .B. f or versions with 2 nodes only ** 21 for AS-8
2-146
c END-PLATE 1 AO-4, M8
Code 0227301218 Description Weight [g] End-plate hdm 1 Ao -4 759 1 node, 4 o ut and 4 in m8, yellow cable
c END-PLATE 1 AE-4, M8
Code 0227301214 Description Weight [g] End-plate hdm 1 AE-4 761 1 node, 4 o ut and 4 in m8, yellow cable and black cable
2-147
DISTRIBUTORS
c END-PLATE 1 AE-8, M8
Code 0227301216 Description Weight [g] End-plate hdm 1 AE-8 773 2 nodes, 8 o ut and 8 in m8, yellow cable and black cable
DISTRIBUTORS
0227301210
* m7 plug for 2nd node addressing. n .B. f or versions with 2 nodes only ** 21 for AZ-8
Acce SSORIeS
AS-interface ADDRESS CONNECTOR KIT
SpAReS
AS-interface CONNECTOR KIT
Code 0226950150
Code 0226950151
M8 - M12 PLUG
2-148
+ pROFIBUS-Dp
t he hdm +Profi Bu S system has been designed in such a way that the pneumatic input terminal contains all the electronics, signals and connectors. it is a very compact and sturdy system where everything is housed in a thick casing aluminium to protect the delicate components against impact. t he valves and accessories are hdm standard, which means that you only need to replace the input terminal to convert the valve island with multiple connector into an Profi Bu S island. All the advantages of the hdm system can be exploited: the possibility of mounting valves of different size, with fittings for pipes 4, 6 or 8; the inse tion of intermediate modules with separate power supply or outlets; aluminium valves with chemical nickel plating enclosed in a protective casing in reinforced technopolymer, with an index of protection iP65. t he arrangement of the functions continues the traditional optimisation of the hdm : the user interface of the valves and bus all on one side, so that the fitter and se vice engineer have everything within easy reach: all compressed air connections are on the other side, and the electrical connectors and selectors are at the end of the island. It is advisable to earth the system to prevent electrical or electrostatic discharge from damaging the electronic circuit.
TECHNICAL DATA
v alve port connections c onnection on the end-plate 1-11 for the supply of pilots maximum number of pilots maximum number of valves o perating temperature range c f luid f low rate at 6.3 bar DP 1 bar n l/min version 5/2 and 3/2 version 5/3 Pressure range t erminal 1-11 terminal 1 v oltage range Power for each pilot Solenoid Pilot insulation class degree of protection Solenoid rating tr A/trr 2x3/2 monostable at 6 bar tr A/trr 5/2 monostable at 6 bar tr A/trr 5/2 bistable at 6 bar tr A/trr 5/3 cc monostable at 6 bar n ote on use W 4,6,8,10 mm automatic fitting for po ts 2 and 4 / power supply port for 10 or 12* automatic fitting 3/8 thread for exhaust port, m5 thread for exhaust pilot port Automatic fitting 4 m 16 16 (same as the max. no. of pilots) -10 to +60 f iltered air without lubrication; lubrication, if used, must be continuous 11.5 mm 4 11.5 mm 6 14 mm 8 23 mm 8 23 mm 10 200 500 650 1000 1200 200 300 300 500 500 X (pilot supply) 1-11 (valve supply) 3 to 7 bar vacuum at 10 bar 3 to 7 bar 24 vdc 10% (slave protected against overload and reverse polarity) 0.9 f 155 iP65 (with conveyed exhust, and that - in case of no use - the Bu S out connector gets plugged) 100% Ed 8 / 45 8 / 33 20 / 20 20 / 20 insert the pipes in the fittings, before passing air through the valves,othe wise the gasket may be pulled out of its seat by the flow of ai . *with right-end-plate 1-11 Please refer to page 6-7 of the tecnical documentation
ms ms ms ms
c ompatibility with oils Profibus DP module for HDM valves Protection max input power (all valves on ) Addressing h ighest settable address number default address Peripheral defect diagnosis defects reported module status in the event of peripheral defect data bit value o utput status in the absence of communication
o utputs protected against overloads and shortcircuits 500 mA By rotary selectors 99 3 l ocal l Ed indicator and relay to master o utput shortcircuit or overload. Auxiliary power supply failure. Profibus communication active t he peripheral defect bit is active and accessible at the master station. 0 = not enabled 1 = enabled disabled
2-149
DISTRIBUTORS
COMPONENTS a b c d e f g h k l m n o p q r Exhaust - Solenoid pilot 82/84 v alve supply - port 1 t hreaded connection of exhausts 3/5 v alve supply - port 11 Electrical control supply X Blind end-plate or right-end-plate-1-11 Screw for valve wall-mounting u tility port for pipe 4, 6, 8 or 10 mm manual control l Ed (l Ed on, solenoid valve energised) Pneumatic symbol identification of the monostable or bistable manual contro v alve ordering code v alve identification cod Blank space for valve number Profibus te minal
DISTRIBUTORS
hdm + P rofi Bu S-dP
2-150
THE MULTIMACH WORLD: FLEXIBILITY t he numbers permit rapid identification of the function and assembly positio of the single elements represented as follows. Refer to page 2-162 for valves, intermediates elements and common accessories.
A f ixing from above using the 1 or 1-11 input terminal and the blind terminal. B C f ixing from above using the 1 or 1-11 input terminal and the blind terminal, using the m5 threads on the bottom and the rear of the terminals. D f ixing from above using the 1 or 1-11 input terminal and the blind terminal, using the m5 threads on the front of the terminals. An opening for the pipes is made in the plate. E f ixing on the din bar with end-plate 1 or 1-11 and blind and plate , using the push-in bracket code 0227301600. F l ateral fixing using the blind te minal, and its the m4 threads on the side lateral. Note: The sole fixing admitted is the one showed.
KEY TO CODES
H D M VALVE h eavy duty multimach iP65 2 INPUT END-PLATE 2 End-plate 1-11 3 End-plate 1 P ELECTRICAL BASE P profibus dP M MANUAL TYPE monostable manual control Bistable manual control I6 - W 8 - W 6 - O 4 - L 8 - 5 TYPE OF VALVE I n 2 3/2 nc W n 2 3/2 no L 3/2 no + 3/2 nc V 5/2 monostable K 5/2 bistable O 5/3 monostable *F 5/2 monostable 4 right-end-plate 1-11 pipe 12 5 blind end-plate 6 Passing-intermede 7 Blind intermediate 20 Exhaust section 4 c artridge 4 6 c artridge 6 8 c artridge 8 - 14 mm 8S c artridge 8 - 23 mm 10 c artridge 10 1 6 FURTHER DETAILS n 2 brackets for din bar
M B
16
* do don tconn Ect Pin 1 andfor external used only * not conn Ect : feeding Pin 3: to be for terminationthe external terminating resistors. feeding of resistances - f or correct communication, use Profibus cables at least 1 metre long. - t he shield should be evenly distributed around the thread. Should this not be possible, the shield can be connected to prin 5. Both of these methods can also 1 Adressing be used in combination. B t erminal resistances
C r eset button faulty D r esettable 1 Adressing fuse E indicator l Ed B terminal resistances F eset button C r Grounding faulty D r esettable fuse E indicator l ed F Grounding
Bistable or n2 3/2 not E: t he type f monostable valve uses one Pin only (like the v ) but occupies 2 signals.
c ommon
2-151
WIRING DIAGRAM
DISTRIBUTORS
DISTRIBUTORS
c END-PLATE 1 PROFIBUS-DP
hdm + P rofi Bu S-dP
Code 0227301230 Description End-plate hdm 1 Profi Bu S Weight [g] 730
Acce SSORIeS
M12 MALE CONNECTOR OUT-BUS M12 FEMALE CONNECTOR IN-BUS
Code 0240009035
Code 0240009036
M8 - M12 PLUG
Code 0240009037
2-152
+ c An open
TECHNICAL DATA
valve port connections c onnection on the end-plate 1-11 for the supply of pilots maximum number of pilots maximum number of valves o perating temperature range c f luid f low rate at 6.3 bar DP 1 bar n l/min version 5/2 and 3/2 version 5/3 Pressure range terminal 1-11 terminal 1 voltage range Power for each pilot Solenoid Pilot insulation class degree of protection Solenoid rating tr A/trr 2x3/2 monostable at 6 bar tr A/trr 5/2 monostable at 6 bar tr A/trr 5/2 bistable at 6 bar tr A/trr 5/3 cc monostable at 6 bar n ote on use W 4,6,8,10 mm automatic fitting for po ts 2 and 4 / power supply port for 10 or 12* automatic fitting 3/8 thread for exhaust port, m5 thread for exhaust pilot port Automatic fitting 4 m 16 16 (same as the max. no. of pilots) -10 to +60 f iltered air without lubrication; lubrication, if used, must be continuous 11.5 mm 4 11.5 mm 6 14 mm 8 23 mm 8 23 mm 10 200 500 650 1000 1200 200 300 300 500 500 X (pilot supply) 1-11 (valve supply) 3 to 7 bar vacuum at 10 bar 3 to 7 bar 24 vdc 10% (slave protected against overload and reverse polarity) 0.9 f 155 iP65 (with conveyed exhausts and with not used connectors plugged) 100% Ed 8 / 45 8 / 33 20 / 20 20 / 20 insert the pipes in the fittings, before passing air through the valves,othe wise the gasket may be pulled out of its seat by the flow of ai . * with right-end-plate 1-11 Please refer to page 6-7 of the tecnical documentation
ms ms ms ms
c ompatibility with oils CANopen module for HDM valves Protection max input power (all valves on ) Addressing h ighest settable address number default address Peripheral defect diagnosis defects reported module status in the event of peripheral defect data bit value o utput status in the absence of communication INPUT module for HDM valves Sensor supply voltage max sensor power (distribuited over eight connectors) t ype of input Protection Active in Put signalling
o utputs protected against overloads and shortcircuits 800 mA By diP SWitch 127 1 l ocal l Ed indicator and relay to master o utput shortcircuit or overload. Auxiliary power supply failure. c An open communication active. t he peripheral defect bit is active and accessible at the master station. 0 = not enabled 1 = enabled disabled
mA
24 vdc 10% (depending on the supply of the c An open module) 40 Pn P for sensor 2-3 wires according to En 60947-5-2 Protected inputs against overload and short-circuit o ne l Ed for each in Put
2-153
hdm + c An open
DISTRIBUTORS
t he hdm +c An open system has been designed in such a way that the pneumatic input terminal contains all the electronics, signals and connectors. it is a very compact and sturdy system where everything is housed in a thick casing aluminium to protect the delicate components against impact. t wo versions of end-plate are available: one can handle up to 16 controls (16 o ut) and one up to 16 controls and 8 inputs (16 o ut + 8 in). t he input connectors are m12. t wo inputs can be connected to each connector. t he functions are arranged to ensure the same optimisation as the hdm s. t he user interface is all on one side to facilitate the work of the fitter and se vice engineer. All pneumatic connections are on one side; the electrical connectors and selectors are on top of the island.
COMPONENTS a b c d e f g h k l m n o p q r Exhaust - Solenoid pilot 82/84 v alve supply - port 1 t hreaded connection of exhausts 3/5 v alve supply - port 11 Electrical control supply X Blind end-plate or right-end-plate 1-11 Screw for valve wall-mounting u tility port for pipe 4, 6, 8 or 10 mm manual control l Ed (l Ed on, solenoid valve energised) Pneumatic symbol identification of the monostable or bistable manual contro v alve ordering code v alve identification cod Blank space for valve number c An open terminal
DISTRIBUTORS
hdm + c An open
2-154
THE MULTIMACH WORLD: FLEXIBILITY t he numbers permit rapid identification of the function and assembly positio of the single elements represented as follows. Refer to page 2-162 for valves, intermediates elements and common accessories.
KEY TO CODES
H D M VALVE h eavy duty multimach iP65 2 INPUT END-PLATE 2 End-plate 1-11 3 End-plate 1 CAN O ELECTRICAL BASE CAN O c An open 16 out Put CAN I/O c An open 8 in Put e 16 out Put M MANUAL TYPE monostable manual control Bistable manual control I6 - W 8 - W 6 - O 4 - L 8 - 5 TYPE OF VALVE I n 2 3/2 nc W n 2 3/2 no L 3/2 no + 3/2 nc V 5/2 monostable K 5/2 bistable O 5/3 monostable *F 5/2 monostable 4 right-end-plate 1-11 pipe 12 5 blind end-plate 6 Passing-intermede 7 Blind intermediate 20 Exhaust section 4 c artridge 4 6 c artridge 6 8 c artridge 8 - 14 mm 8S c artridge 8 - 23 mm 10 c artridge 10 1 6 FURTHER DETAILS n 2 brackets for din bar
M B
16
WIRING DIAGRAM
PoWER SUPPLY
2-155
hdm + c An open
DISTRIBUTORS
A f ixing from above using the 1 or 1-11 input terminal and the blind terminal. B C f ixing from above using the 1 or 1-11 input terminal and the blind terminal, using the m5 threads on the bottom and the rear of the terminals. D f ixing from above using the 1 or 1-11 input terminal and the blind terminal, using the m5 threads on the front of the terminals. An opening for the pipes is made in the plate. E f ixing on the din bar with end-plate 1 or 1-11 and blind and plate , using the push-in bracket code 0227301600. F l ateral fixing using the blind te minal, and its the m4 threads on the side lateral. Note: The sole fixing admitted is the one showed.
2-o
DISTRIBUTORS
3-o
END-PLATE 1 CANopen O
Code 0227301253 Description End-plate 1 hdm c An open out Put Weight [g] 746
hdm + c An open
2 - i/o
3 - i/o
2-156
Acce SSORIeS
STRAIGHT CONNECTOR FOR CANopen POWER SUPPLY
Code W0970513001 Description Acc. 5-pin m12x1 straight connector
Pin 1 2 3 4 5
2-157
hdm + c An open
DISTRIBUTORS
DISTRIBUTORS
hdm + c An open
Pin 1 2 3 4
Y-DISTRIBUTOR WITH CABLE AND M12 STRAIGHT CONNECTORS FOR CANopen INPUT
Code 0240009031 0240009032 Description y-d istributor cable 0.6 m y-d istributor cable 1.5 m
2-158
+ B&R
X2X
X2X
X2X
2-159
hdm + B& r
DISTRIBUTORS
An advanced field bus system inte facing with the multimach world. B&r has developed a new standard for automation, called formul A X. f or further details about features, functions and qualities of this system, reference must be made to the B&r documentation, also available on the web site www.br-automation.com An overview is given below. t he X-system is a system handling analogue and digital inputs and outputs for local or remote use, which B&r defines as decentralised backplane. different types of modules are available. We present those designed for connection with multimach and hdm valve islands. We only indicate the B&r s code root, since each type of module comes in different variants, that differ by number of signals handled, that can be 8, 16 or 24, and by type of signal, that can be input, output or input/output indifferently. c ommon to all the modules is the presence of 4 connections: a signal input, a signal output for the following modules, a power input (24v dc ), a power output for the following modules.
hdm + B& r
Refer to page 2-162 for valves, intermediates elements and common accessories.
DISTRIBUTORS
KEY TO CODES
H D M VALVE h eavy duty multimach iP65 2 INPUT END-PLATE 2 End-plate 1-11 3 End-plate 1 B & R ELECTRICAL BASE B&R f it for B&r M MANUAL TYPE monostable manual control Bistable manual control I6 - W 8 - W 6 - O 4 - L 8 - 5 TYPE OF VALVE I n 2 3/2 nc W n 2 3/2 no L 3/2 no + 3/2 nc V 5/2 monostable K 5/2 bistable O 5/3 monostable *F 5/2 monostable r ight-end-plate 1-11 4 pipe 12 5 Blind end-plate 6 Passing-intermede Blind intermediate 7 20 Exhaust section c artridge 4 4 6 c artridge 6 8 c artridge 8 - 14 mm 8S c artridge 8 - 23 mm 10 c artridge 10 1 6 FURTHER DETAILS n 2 brackets for din bar
M B
16
2-160
NOTES
2-161
hdm + B& r
DISTRIBUTORS
hdm valve can be included in islands with any available input terminal. So the same valve can be connected to the multiple connection terminal, the AS-interface terminal, the Profi bus dP, terminal or the c An -o pen terminal. Note: if you use valves 8S type or 10 exploiting their flow capacity, it is appropriate to choose the inlet end plate 1-11 type by feeding the pilots separately (to avoid the pressure to decrease too much on the pilots). If you use simultaneously more than one valve 8S or 10 it is necessary to potentiate the pneumatic feeding by inserting end plates having 12 mm pipe and/or through intermediate modules
DISTRIBUTORS
hdm - v Al v ES, int Erm EdiAt ES El EmEnt S And Acc ESSori ES
MANUAL CONTROLS
mono St ABl E ov Errid E Por t 2 servo-assisted Press and hold the manual control in position (not necessary for bistable type K valve) r elease the manual control: - t he manual control returns to the home position. - valves type i, W, l , v, f, and o reposition. - t he type K valve remains switched
mono St ABl E ov Errid E Por t 4 servo-assisted Press and hold the manual control in position (not necessary for bistable type K valve) r elease the manual control: - t he manual control returns to the home position. - valves type i, W, l , v and f reposition. - t he type K valve remains switched With type f and v valves, this manual control is not present.
BiSt ABl E ov Errid E Por t 2 servo-assisted Press the manual control right in then turn it clockwise 90 degrees and l eave it in position. r otate the manual control 90 degrees anticlockwise, and then release it. - t he manual control returns to the home position. - valves type i, W, l , v, f, and o reposition. - t he type K valve remains switched
BiSt ABl E ov Errid E Por t 4 servo-assisted Press the manual control right in then turn it 90 degrees clockwise and l eave it in position. r otate the manual control 90 degrees anticlockwise, and then release it: - t he manual control returns to the home position. - valves type i, W, l and o reposition. - t he type K valve remains switched With type f and v valves, this manual control is not present.
t he reference code for the monostable control ends in 0 (2 for type f ). Example: 707203053
t he reference code for the monostable control ends in 1 (3 for type f ). Example: 707203053
a VALVE DIMENSIONS
Symbol
I4 W4 L4 V4 *F4 K4 O4
Code 7071030530 7071030531 7071030630 7071030631 7071030730 7071030731 7071030130 7071030131 7071030132 7071030133 7071030110 7071030111 7071030210 7071030211
Manual control monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable
130
130
115
115
130
130
2-162
a VALVE DIMENSIONS
Symbol
I6 W6 L6 V6 *F6 K6 O6
Code 7072030530 7072030531 7072030630 7072030631 7072030730 7072030731 7072030130 7072030131 7072030132 7072030133 7072030110 7072030111 7072030210 7072030211
Manual control monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable
130
130
115
115
130
130
Symbol
I8 W8 L8 V8 *F8 K8 O8
Code 7073030530 7073030531 7073030630 7073030631 7073030730 7073030731 7073030130 7073030131 7073030132 7073030133 7073030110 7073030111 7073030210 7073030211
Manual control monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable
140
140
130
130
140
140
a VALVE DIMENSIONS
8S
Symbol
Code 7077030530 7077030531 7077030630 7077030631 7077030730 7077030731 7077030130 7077030131 7077030132 7077030133 7077030110 7077030111 7077030210 7077030211
Manual control monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable
260
260
241
241
253
262
2-163
a VALVE DIMENSIONS
DISTRIBUTORS
a VALVE DIMENSIONS
10
Symbol
Code 7078030530 7078030531 7078030630 7078030631 7078030730 7078030731 7078030130 7078030131 7078030132 7078030133 7078030110 7078030111 7078030210 7078030211
Manual control monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable
250
250
231
DISTRIBUTORS
231
243
252
f INTERMEDIATE THROUGH
g INTERMEDIATE BLIND
Code 0227301301
Code 0227301302
d RIGHT-END-PLATE
1-11 PIPE 12
Code 0227301303
Code 0227301221
2-164
e BLIND END-PLATE
Code 0227301500 Description Blind end-plate hdm Weight [g] 230
Acce SSORIeS
At the 3/5-exhaust port of the intermediate throughreference 6 and of the exhaust switch reference 20
rl 17
SpAReS
GRUB SCREW KIT
Code 0227301800 Description Grub screw for multimach hdm /cm
2-165
DISTRIBUTORS
MUl TIMAc H
DISTRIBUTORS
multimach is not a mere valve, it is an electropneumatic distribution island - a single block ready for connection to power and air delivery pipes and a multi-pin cable. All the pneumatic connections are situated on one side with built-in push-in fittings. t he user interface is on the other side so that the fitter or se viceman has everything within an easy reach: manual controls, active valve signalling lights, compressed air system diagram, valve identification plates. t he user can count on four different orientations for the electric connector. multimach provides full flexibility in the application of valves: 1 to 24 valves, power plates and drain for pipes of various sizes, electric 9- or 25-pin plug connector. But the real novelty, is the possibility of mounting valves of different flow rates: three di ferent valves can be mounted at a time and a valve can be replaced with another of a different flow rate. t his revolutionary concept enables the user to optimise space and costs and adapt the unit to different performance requirements. t he ratio between the flow rate of the multimach system and sizes is incomparable: the top in terms of miniaturisation and efficienc .
TECHNICAL DATA
v alve port connections c onnection on the end-plate for the supply of pilots o perating temperature range c f luid Screw for valve - wall-mounting f low rate at 6 bar DP 1bar n l/min v oltage range Power W insulation class degree of protection Solenoid rating Pressure range t erminal 1-11 bar t erminal 1 bar t erminal 1 reduced bar tr A/trr 2x3/2 monostable at 6 bar ms tr A/trr 5/2 monostable at 6 bar ms tr A/trr 5/2 bistable at 6 bar ms tr A/trr 5/3 cc monostable at 6 bar ms n ote on use c ompatibility with oils 4,6,8 mm automatic fitting for po ts 2 and 4 / power supply port for 8 or 10 automatic fitting 3/8 thread for exhaust port, m5 thread for exhaust pilot port Automatic fitting -10 to +60 f iltered air without lubrication; lubrication, if used, must be continuous According to the end-plate used: see page 2-155 11 mm 4: 200 11 mm 6: 500 14 mm 8: 700 24 vdc 10% 1.2 f 155 iP51 100% Ed X (pilot supply) 1-11 (valve supply) 3 to 7 max vacuum at 10 bar 3 to 7 3 to 7 8 / 45 8 / 33 20 / 20 20 / 20 insert the pipes in the fittings, before passing air through the valves, otherwise the basket may be pulled out of its seat by the flow of ai . Please refer to page 6-7 of the tecnical documentation
COMPONENTS a b c d e f g h i j k l m n Exhaust Solenoid pilot v alve supply - port 1 Electrical multiple connection with 9 or 25 pins t hreaded connection of exhausts 3/5 v alve supply Electrical control supply l Ed (l Ed on, solenoid valve energised) r emovable identification label Blind end-plate Screw for valve wall-mounting u tility port for pipe 8 mm u tility port for pipe 6 mm u tility port for pipe 4 mm manual control
2-166
THE MULTIMACH WORLD: FLEXIBILITY the numbers per mit rapid identification of the function and assembly position of the single elements represented as follows
A B C D
fixing with reduced end-plate 1, codE 0227300300, supplied complete with bracket fixing with end-plate 1-11 codE 0227300200 or with end-plate codE 0227300201 fixing with end-plate 1-11 codE 0227300200 or with end-plate 1 codE 0227300201 using the m4-thread found on the m5 end-plate fixing on the din bar with end-plate 1-11 codE 0227300 using the reduced end-plate 1 codE 0227300300 or end-plate codE 0227300201 using the push-in bracket codE 0227300600. if you have to remove the base from the bar, this is rapid and can be performed without using any tools.
KEY TO CODES
M 5 1 VALVE multimach iP51 2 INPUT END-PLATE End-plate 1-11 End-plate 1 reduced End-plate 1 8 ELECTRICAL BASE 8 Axial 25-wire connector base 9 Axial 9-wire connector base 10 25-wire rear connector base 11 9-wire rear connector base I6 - W 8 - W 6 - O 4 - L 8 - 5 TYPE OF VALVE I n 2 3/2 nc W n 2 3/2 no L 3/2 no + 3/2 nc V 5/2 monostable K 5/2 bistable O 5/3 monostable 5 Blind end-plate 6 Passing-intermede 7 Blind intermediate 20 Exhaust section 4 car tridge 4 6 car tridge 6 8 car tridge 8 1 2 - 1 4 FURTHER DETAILS 12 9-wire connector 14 25-wire connector 16 Brackets for din bar
2 3 4
2-167
mul timAch
DISTRIBUTORS
a VALVE DIMENSIONS 4
Symbol
I4 W4 L4
DISTRIBUTORS
Code 7068030532
7068030632
monostable
118
7068030732
monostable
118
V4 K4 O4
7068030132
monostable
100
7068030112
monostable
114
7068030212
monostable
115
a VALVE DIMENSIONS 6
Symbol
I6 W6 L6 V6 K6 O6
Code 7069030532
7069030632
monostable
110
7069030732
monostable
110
7069030132
monostable
90
7069030112
monostable
107
7069030212
monostable
108
a VALVE DIMENSIONS 8
Symbol
I8 W8 L8 V8 K8 O8
2-168
Code 7070030532
7070030632
monostable
124
7070030732
monostable
124
7070030132
monostable
105
7070030112
monostable
120
7070030212
monostable
121
b END-PLATE 1-11
c END-PLATE 1
Code 0227300200
Code 0227300201
t his end-plate allows for supplies to be differentiated: port 2, port 4 and pilot supply
Code 0227300300
Code 0227300500
f INTERMEDIATE THROUGH
g INTERMEDIATE BLIND
Code 0227300301
Weight [g] 92
Code 0227300302
Weight [g] 89
2-169
d REDUCED END-PLATE 1
e BLIND END-PLATE
DISTRIBUTORS
DISTRIBUTORS
Code 0227300303
Weight [g] 95
Code 0226180001
Weight [g] 54
Code 0226180002
Weight [g] 51
Code 0226180003
Weight [g] 73
Code 0226180004
Weight [g] 77
Code 0226180102
Weight [g] 31
2-170
~9
14
Code 0226180101
Weight [g] 48
Weight [g] 8
Description c onnector kit + wire 1-6* c onnector kit + wire 7-12** c onnector kit + wire13-30***
Weight [g] 3 4 5 Code W0970530084 Description Silencer for fittin , 8 Weight [g] 15
f or valve connection from 1st to 6th position counting from the connector * ** f or valve connection from 7th to 12th position, counting from the connector *** f or valve connection from 13th to 30th position, counting from the connector
At the 3/5-exhaust port of the reduced end-plate 1 ref. 4 and of the intermediate through of the exhaust switch ref. 20
CABLES
NOTES
Cod. Description 0226107201 10-wire cable 0226107101 19-wire cable 0226107102 25-wire cable Specify the number of metres desired
2-171
DISTRIBUTORS
PRE-WIRED 90 CONNECTOR
DISTRIBUTORS
Description c onnector + 9-wire axial cable l = 1 m c onnector + 9-wire axial cable l = 2.5 m c onnector + 9-wire axial cable l = 5 m c onnector + 25-wire axial cable l = 1 m c onnector + 25-wire axial cable l = 2.5 m c onnector + 25-wire axial cable l = 5 m
Description c onnector + 9-wire 90 cable l = 1 m c onnector + 9-wire 90 cable l = 2.5 m c onnector + 9-wire 90 cable l = 5 m c onnector + 25-wire 90 cable l = 1 m c onnector + 25-wire 90 cable l = 2.5 m c onnector + 25-wire 90 cable l = 5 m
9 pIn
Colour of the corresponding wire green/black white blue/black blue yellow/black yellow red/black green white/black
Code 0226107000
GRUB SCREW
l enght = 140 mm Code 0227300800 Description Grub screw for multimach Code 2L17001 Description rl 17 Tube from 3 to 10
2-172
WIRING DIAGRAM OF THE 9-PIN CONNECTOR note: available with positive common wire on request.
WIRING DIAGRAM OF THE 25-PIN CONNECTOR note: available with positive common wire on request. note: available with positive common wire on request.
2-173
mul timAch
DISTRIBUTORS
An advanced field bus system inte facing with the multimach world. B&r has developed a new standard for automation, called formul A X. f or further details about features, functions and qualities of this system, referance must be made to the B&r documentation, also available on the web site www.br-automation.com r efer to page 2-159 for details of iP20 and iP67 intelligent connectors and X67 modules. B&r smart connectors can be connected to multimach islands using the multimach connector support for B&r presented below.
DISTRIBUTORS
APPLICATIONS OF B&R MODULES TO THE MULTIMACH CONNECTOR SUPPORT r efer to page 2-156 for valves, intermediates elements and common accessories. MULTIMACH CONNECTOR SUPPORT FOR B&R
Code 0226180005 Description 25-pin connector support kit for B&r Weight [g] 140
2-174
THE VALVE IN DETAIL c lever multimach valves can be used to form autonomous and intelligent valve island subsystems. Each valve has a microchip that performs a series of functions connected with operation and dialogue with the valves before and after it. v alves communicate via serial transmission. cm refers to the communication protocol patented by metal Work. it is a field-bus in its own right, designed specifically for v y easy control of islands of pneumatic solenoid valves. cm valves have a diagnosis system that detects electrical faults. it can also be used to verify during installation that all connections are correct. cm s communicate with the Pc /Plc via multi-core cables, which means applications with cm s do not require the use of other field-buses or master and slaves. Addressing of single outputs is not required as the connection number of each solenoid pilot is assigned automatically based on the position occupied by the valve.
SMART VALVE Each valve comes with a microchip that controls operation and dialogue with the other valves.
LOCAL DIAGNOSTICS Each c lever multimach valve has a l Ed diagnostic system that identifies immediately whether a pilot is energized, the contact is interrupted or there is a short-circuit.
le D 14 OFF On (green) On (green) OFF ReD (flashing OFF On (red) OFF GReen (flashing le D 12 OFF OFF On (green) On (green) OFF ReD (flashing OFF On (red) OFF DeSc RIpTIOn OF THe FAUl n o fault, Ev 1-Ev 2=off n o fault, Ev 1=on - Ev 2=off n o fault, Ev 1-Ev 2=on n o fault, Ev 1=off - Ev 2=on Solenoid pilot Ev 1 interrupted or disconnected Solenoid pilot Ev 2 interrupted or disconnected Solenoid pilot Ev 1 short circuit Solenoid pilot Ev 2 short circuit data update time out, communication faulty
2-175
DISTRIBUTORS
INPUT MODULES By choosing the specially designed c lever c enter you can add in Put /out Put signal management modules, wich can be used for: diGitAl in Put S, as cylinder sensors for example diGitAl out Put S An Alo Gu E in Put S (but the l Eds do not light up) An Alo Gu E out Put S (but the l Eds do not light up) t hey can be combined, even on the same module. you can choose between Pn P or n Pn connections via a dip switch-type selector. All the in Put S/out Put S must be the same type, i.e. all Pn P or n Pn .
DISTRIBUTORS
CLEVER CENTER t he c lever c enter input terminal converts signals in parallel from the connector pins into a serial transmission to the valves. it interprets the return signals from the valve, relays signals to any slave islands and sends diagnosis messages back to the Pc /Plc .
MAXIMUM EXPANSION u p to 4 modules can be connected, giving a total of 32 input signals. o rdering code
0227302900
EXAMPLE OF A CM LAYOUT t he c lever c enter can relay command signals to other islands of slaves. t ransmission, in serial mode, is via a cable with m8 connectors. c ommands can be sent from the first slave island to other slave islands in cascade, again via cables with m8 connectors. Addresses are assigned automatically, based on intuitive sequential logic. t his means that other slaves can be added downstream at any time, until all 32 available outputs are in use.
Slave 2
Slave 4
NOTES
2-177
DISTRIBUTORS
TECHNICAL DATA
v alve port connections c onnection on the end-plate 1-11 for the supply of pilots maximum number of pilots maximum number of valves o perating temperature range c f luid f low rate at 6 bar DP 1bar n l/min Pressure range t erminal 1-11 t erminal 1 v oltage range 4,6,8 mm automatic fitting for po ts 2 and 4 / power supply port for 10 automatic fitting 3/8 thread for exhaust port, m5 thread for exhaust pilot port Automatic fitting 4 m 32 32 (same as the max. no. of pilots) -10 to +60 f iltered air without lubrication; lubrication, if used, must be continuous 11 mm 4 = 200 11 mm 6 = 500 14 mm 8 = 800 X (pilot supply) 1-11 (valve supply) 3 to 7 bar vacuum at 10 bar 3 to 7 bar 24 vdc 10% (slave protected against overload and reverse polarity) 0.9 f 155 iP65 (with conveyed exhust, and that - in case of no use) n ominal icc 30 mA - instantaneous icc (+ # 25 ms) 650 mA 1.5 l ocal through l Ed and out fault reporting. f or defects signalled look at the manual. o utlets protected against overload and short-circuit 100% Ed ,10 8 / 45 8 / 33 20 / 20 20 / 20 insert the pipes in the fittings, before passing air through the valves otherwise the gasket may be pulled out of its seat by the flow of ai . Please refer to page 6-7 of the technical documentation
DISTRIBUTORS
Power for each pilot Solenoid Pilot insulation class degree of protection dc input current without valve modules max input current with all valves on diagnosis Solenoid rating maximum latency time of the serial transmission tr A/trr 2x3/2 monostable at 6 bar tr A/trr 5/2 monostable at 6 bar tr A/trr 5/2 bistable at 6 bar tr A/trr 5/3 cc monostable at 6 bar n ote on use c ompatibility with oils INPUT module for CM islands Sensor supply voltage max sensor power input impedance max input voltage t ype of input Protection Active input signalling
ms ms ms ms ms
mA K v cc
24 vdc 10% 200 (distributed over eight connectors) 3.9 -5 to +30 Pn P/n Pn configurable via dip switc Protected inputs against overload and short-circuit o ne l Ed for each in Put
COMPONENTS a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r
2-178
Exhaust - Solenoid pilot 82/84 v alve supply - port 1 t hreaded connection of exhausts 3/5 v alve supply - port 11 Electrical control supply X Blind end-plate Screw for valve wall-mounting u tility port for pipe 8 mm u tility port for pipe 6 mm u tility port for pipe 4 mm manual control l Ed (l Ed on, solenoid valve energised) Pneumatic symbol identification of the monostable or bistable manual contro v alve ordering code v alve identification cod Blank space for valve number c lever c enter terminal
THE CLEVER MULTIMACH WORLD: FLEXIBILITY t he numbers permit rapid identification of the function and assembly position of the single elements represented as follows
A f ixing from above using the 1 or 1-1 input terminal and the blind terminal. B C f ixing from above using the 1 or 1-1 input terminal and the blind terminal, using the m5 threads on the bottom and the rear of the terminals. D f ixing from above using the 1 or 1-1 input terminal and the blind terminal, using the m5 threads on the front of the terminals. An opening for the pipes is made in the plate. f ixing on the din bar with end-plate 1 or 1-11 and blind and plate , using the push-in bracket code 0227301600. E l ateral fixing using the blind te minal, and its the m4 threads on the side lateral. F Note: The sole fixing admitted is the one showed.
2-179
DISTRIBUTORS
M B
M8 14 15 16
DISTRIBUTORS
MANUAL CONTROLS c m cl Ev Er mul tim Ach
mono St ABl E ov Errid E Por t 2 servo-assisted Press and hold the manual control in position (not necessary for bistable type K valve) r elease the manual control: - t he manual control returns to the home position. - valves type i, W, l , v and o reposition. - t he type K valve remains switched
mono St ABl E ov Errid E Por t 4 servo-assisted Press and hold the manual control in position (not necessary for bistable type K valve) r elease the manual control: - t he manual control returns to the home position. - valves type i, W, l , v and o reposition. - t he type K valve remains switched With type v valves, this manual control is not present.
BiSt ABl E ov Errid E Por t 2 servo-assisted Press the manual control right in then turn it clockwise 90 degrees and l eave it in position. r otate the manual control 90 degrees anticlockwise, and then release it. - t he manual control returns to the home position. - valves type i, W, l , v and o reposition. - t he type K valve remains switched
BiSt ABl E ov Errid E Por t 4 servo-assisted Press the manual control right in then turn it 90 degrees clockwise and l eave it in position. r otate the manual control 90 degrees anticlockwise, and then release it: - t he manual control returns to the home position. - valves type i, W, l v and o reposition. - t he type K valve remains switched With type v valves, this manual control is not present.
n .B.: t he pilot power supply X must be present. t he reference code for the monostable control ends in 0.
Example: 707403053
Example: 707403053
a indicator l Ed b Grounding
2-180
WIRING DIAGRAM FOR THE CLEVER CENTER TERMINAL - INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
diAGr Am
mAl E
f EmAl E
a indicator l Ed b Grounding c input selector type Pn P/n Pn WIRING DIAGRAM FOR THE ADDITIONAL TERMINAL
a indicator l Ed b Grounding
2-181
DISTRIBUTORS
a VALVE DIMENSIONS
4
Symbol Code 7074030530 7074030531 7074030630 7074030631 7074030730 7074030731 7074030130 7074030131 7074030110 7074030111 7074030210 7074030211 Manual control monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable Weight [g] 130
I4 W4 L4
DISTRIBUTORS
130
130
115
V4 K4 O4
130
130
a VALVE DIMENSIONS
6
Symbol Code 7075030530 7075030531 7075030630 7075030631 7075030730 7075030731 7075030130 7075030131 7075030110 7075030111 7075030210 7075030211 Manual control monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable Weight [g] 130
I6 W6 L6 V6 K6 O6
130
130
115
130
130
a VALVE DIMENSIONS
8
Symbol Code 7076030530 7076030531 7076030630 7076030631 7076030730 7076030731 7076030130 7076030131 7076030110 7076030111 7076030210 7076030211 Manual control monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable Weight [g] 140
I8 W8 L8 V8 K8 O8
2-182
140
140
130
140
140
2-o
3-o
OUTPUT END-PLATE 1
t erminator Code Description 0227302200 End-plate cm kit 1-11 out t his end-plate allows for supplies to be differentiated: port 2, port 4 and pilot supply n ote: terminator included Weight [g] 722 Code 0227302201
INPUT END-PLATE 1
terminator Code Description 0227302223 End-plate cm kit 1-11 in t his end-plate allows for supplies to be differentiated: port 2, port 4 and pilot supply n ote: terminator included Weight [g] 722 Code 0227302225
2 - Add
3 - Add
ADDITIONAL END-PLATE 1
Code 0227302224
Code 0227302226
t his end-plate allows for supplies to be differentiated: port 2, port 4 and pilot supply
2-183
2 - i/o
3 - i/o
DISTRIBUTORS
e BLIND EN-PLATE
f INTERMEDIATE THROUGHT
DISTRIBUTORS
Code 0227302500
Code 0227302301
g INTERMEDIATE BLIND
Code 0227302302
Code 0227302303
Code 0226180108
Weight [g] 60
Code 0226180109
Weight [g] 80
2-184
Code 0227301600
Weight [g] 30
Code W0970530084
Weight [g] 15
Supplied complete with one m4x45 screws and one grub screw individually packed
At the 3/5-exhaust port of the intermediate through reference 6 and the exhaust switch reference 20
M8 8-INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE
in Put Pn P 1 = + 24 vdc 3 = ovdc 4 = in Put out Put Pn P 1 = + 24 vdc 3 = ovdc 4 = in Put diP SWitch in Put n Pn 1 = + 24 vdc 3 = ovdc 4 = in Put out Put n Pn 1 = + 24 vdc 3 = ovdc 4 = in Put diP SWitch
Code 0227302900
CABLES
M8 INPUT CONNECTOR
M8 PLUG
Pin 1 3 4 Cable colour Brown Blue Black
Code 0240009039
Description Plug m8
Code 0240009009
2-185
8 - m8
DISTRIBUTORS
DISTRIBUTORS
Code 0226950500
Code 0226980500
WIRING DIAGRAM FOR THE 44-PIN CUP CONNECTOR KIT 44 pIn FeMAle pRe-WIReD FOR vAlve
Position of electrical contact 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 Corresponding wire colour white brown green yellow gray pink blue violet gray/pink red/blue white/green brown/green white/yellow yellow/brown white/gray gray/brown white/pink pink/brown white/blue brown/blue white/red brown/red white/black brown/black gray/green yellow/gray pink/green yellow/pink green/blue yellow/blue green/red yellow/red green/black gray/blue gray/red red red red yellow/black pink/red pink/blue black black black Function o ut 1 o ut 2 o ut 3 o ut 4 o ut 5 o ut 6 o ut 7 o ut 8 o ut 9 o ut 10 o ut 11 o ut 12 o ut 13 o ut 14 o ut 15 o ut 16 o ut 17 o ut 18 o ut 19 o ut 20 o ut 21 o ut 22 o ut 23 o ut 24 o ut 25 o ut 26 o ut 27 o ut 28 o ut 29 o ut 30 o ut 31 o ut 32 f ault reporting nc nc +24v dc +24v dc +24v dc c onfig. n P/n Pn nc nc 0 v dc 0 v dc 0 v dc
2-186
Description m8 prewired connector for valve islands conn. cm m8 prewired connector for valve islands conn. cm m8 prewired connector for valve islands conn. cm m8 prewired connector for valve islands conn. cm
l l l l
M8 INPUT CONNECTOR
Code 0240009010 Description m8 3-pin straight connector
l enght = 140 mm
2-187
DISTRIBUTORS
2-188
DISTRIBUTORS
NOTES
FIELDBUS SUMMARY
P HDM + AS-Interface
SEE
PAGE 2-144
P HDM + PROFIBUS-DP
SEE
PAGE 2-149
P HDM + CANopen
SEE
PAGE 2-153
P HDM + B&R
SEE
P PROFIBUS-DP/CANopen/DEVICE NET FOR MULTIMACH AND BASES FOR PLT-10 MULTIPLE CONNECTION
PAGE 2-190
P MULTIMACH + B&R
SEE
PAGE 2-174
PAGE 2-195
PAGE 2-199
DISTRIBUTORS
The expandable modular slaves for Multimach and bases for PLT-10 multiple connection follow the same application philosophy of total modularity common to the Multimach system. With full freedom, the slave can be configured by fitting the various modules offered: Slaves are available for 3 alternate bus systems: PROFIBUS-DP, CAN-OPEN, DEVICE NET. Each of these can manage 24 outputs. The slaves are mounted on a 35 mm DIN bar, next to the Multimach unit. The electric connection between the slave and the unit is simply obtained with a kit comprised of pre-wired, 25-pin Sub-D connectors with a 25-core cable. Other modules up to a maximum of 15 (31 for DeviceNet) can be fitted alongside the slaves to manage other inputs and outputs. These modules are electrically connected together, using a small plate-connector (housed under the modules, inside the DIN bar). There are 4 other types of modules available: for 8 digital inputs; for 8 digital outputs; for 4 analogue inputs and for 4 analogue outputs. With this system, a maximum of 144 Inputs/Outputs can be managed with just one slave!
DISTRIBUTORS
TECHNICAL DATA
Supply voltage EMC and ESD test Resistance to vibration and impacts test Operating temperature range Storage temperature Admitted relative humidity Assembly 24 VDC + 20% - 15% in compliance with IEC 801-2/IEC 801/4 (up to level 3: 8kV/2kV) according to IEC68-2-6/IEC 68-2-27 (1g/12g) 0 to 60 - 40 to + 85 95% 35 mm DIN bar
C C
2-190
Technical data CANopen-Interface Transmission speed Max number of modules which can be connected Output interface Number of outputs Nominal supply voltage Maximum current for each output Absorption 24 V (out excluded)
9 pins SubD 10 k Baud up to 1 Mbaud 31 (depending on the maximun corrent) 25 pins SubD 24 24 VDC 1A, max total 4A 800 mA
2-191
DISTRIBUTORS
Technical data PROFIBUS-Interface Transmission speed Max number of modules which can be connected Output interface Number of outputs Output data Nominal supply voltage Maximum current for each output Absorption 24V (out excluded)
RS485: 9 pins SubD 9.6 kBaud up to 12 Mbaud 31 (depending on the maximun corrent) 25 pins SubD 24 4 Byte (3used +1) 24 VDC 1A, max total 4A 800 mA
DISTRIBUTORS
Technical data DEVICE-NET-Interface Transmission speed Max number of modules which can be connected Output interface Number of outputs Nominal supply voltage Maximum current for each output Absorption 24 V (out excluded)
DeviceNet Open Style 125, 250, 500 k Baud 31 (depending on the maximun corrent) 25 pins SubD 24 24 VDC 1A, max total 4A 800 mA
Technical data Nominal input voltage Number of inputs Input data Input voltage at 1 Output voltage at 0 Response time Internal Bus voltage Absorption 5V BUS
Technical data Nominal voltage Number of outputs Output data Absorption for each channel Internal Bus voltage Absorption 5V BUS
2-192
Technical data Number of outputs Output data Output range Resolution Output resistance Conversion time Internal Bus voltage Absorption 5V BUS
4 8 Byte Voltage 010V, 10V, 15V Current 020 mA, 420 mA, 20 mA 12 BIT Minimum voltage 1 k, Maximum current 500 0.45 ms 5V 75 mA
NOTES
2-193
DISTRIBUTORS
4 8 Byte Voltage 0 to 50 mV, 0...10V, 4 mV, 4V, 10V, Current 0/420 mA, +/-20 mA Temperature Pt100, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni1000 Resistance 60 , 600 , 3000 , 16000 Thermoelements J, K, N, R, T, S 12/16 Bit 20M voltage, 85 current 570 ms 5V 280 mA
DISTRIBUTORS
In order to make the best use of the available slave outputs, they can be distributed over several valve units using double-output connectors. The above drawing refers to one possible configuration, but the user can combine cables and connectors as required. The connector mounted on the slave is used to distribute the outputs on two cables. A cable for a certain number of outputs goes to connectors and . Some wires are soldered to the connector pins and the unused ones can be soldered to the wires of another cable from the second output carrying signals to the next unit.
25-PIN PLUG CONNECTOR KIT, DOUBLE OUTPUT FOR MULTIMACH AND PLT-10
Code 0226180105
Code 0226180106
CABLES
Code 0226180102
Code Description 0226107201 10-wire cable 0226107101 19-wire cable 0226107102 25-wire cable Indicate the desired length in metres
2-194
The Profibus DP IP 67 is a robust metallic slave that can be connected flexibly sin M12 connectors to outputs and solenoid valves and/or inputs. Each connector can be used freely for: 1 Output + 1 diagnostic Input 2 Outputs 1 Output + 1 Input 2 Inputs 1 Input + 1 diagnostic Input Each slave can handle a total of 16 signals, each according to one of the above combinations. Diagnostics provides information on the type and location of the error of each channel with: de-activation of the coupling point involved and not the complete module; signal to the controller; display with local LEDs. One single slave or an island of solenoid valves complete with slave and connectors can be ordered. The catalogue shows the 1/8 and 1/4 valve islands in the 70 series and the ISO5599 valve islands, size 1 and size 2. TECHNICAL DATA
Application Supply voltage Degree of protection Temperature Field Bus Data 8 inputs or outputs + 8 inputs or outputs or diagnostic 24 VDC (18V......30,2V), according to EN 61131-2 IP67 0 to 55C (32 to 131 F) Profibus-DP EN 5017 synchronous or Freeze-Mode 12MBit/s rotating switches BCD, 0......99 pnp proximnity sensors or EN 61131-2 compatable mechanical limit switch 24 VDC (18-30.2V) to EN 61131-2; 200 mA for M12 coupling point. One LED for each 24 VDC (18-30.2V) output, to EN 61131-2; cumulative I 9A 1.6 A, system protected by fuse in case of short-circuit 10W 20 Hz Ohm, 20 Hz induction One LED for each output RUN-LED LED + alarm signal to master Red LED for channel on M12 coupling point PIN 2 diagnostic with red LED for M12 coupling point and signal to master N.B.: for the disposition of the contact, please look at the connectors at the following pages
Transmission protocol Transmission mode Transmission speed Addresses Inputs Output Technical Data Type Supply Indicator Output Technical Data Voltage Maximum current for each actuator Maximum current contemporary Maximum signal exchange frequency Indicator LED Autotest Field bus Insufficient voltage signa Short-circuit sensor INPUT or OUTPUTS Autotest Desina (pin 2)
COMPONENTS a b IN-OUT diagnostic connectors c Led Power, Error, Run d IN feeding connector e OUT feeding connector f IN BUS connector g OUT BUS connector h Rotaring switches for addressing i Diagnostic LED for single channel
BUS IN/OUT 1 = VP 2 = A (green) 3 = DGN 4 = B (red) 5 = Sch Thread, Sch POWER-SUPPLY IN/OUT 1 = GND 2 = GND 3 = PE 4 = Sensor feeding 5 = Actuator feeding
IN/OUT CONNECTORS 1 = +24 VDC 2 = Diagnostic input Digital input -. Closure contact Opening contact Digital output 3 = O VDC 4 = Digital input -. Closure contact Opening contact Digital output 5 = PE
2-195
DISTRIBUTORS
SLAVE IP67
Code 0240008001 Description 8 I/O + 8 I/O/autotest Profibu
DISTRIBUTORS
IP67 SLAVE, COMPLETE WITH SERIES 70 VALVES
A B C 1/8 Manifold 25 105 142 1/8 Multiple 25 105 142 1/4 Manifold 27 112 156 1/4 Multiple 27 112 156 D 225 225 239 239 E 20 20 25 25 F G K P Q 305 24 R Q + K + (A x *n-1) Q + K + (A x *n-1)
*n = number of mounted valves N.B.: the unit is supplied complete with cables for valves
KEY TO CODES
B U S P P Profibu V V IP67 B C B 70 1/8 70 1/4 O O Multiple base 02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 0 2 2 positions 4 positions 6 positions 8 positions 10 positions 12 positions 14 positions 16 positions D H Z M J G E B A D D SOV 23 SOS NO - SOV 33 SOS NO SOV 23 SOS NC - SOV 33 SOS NC SOV 23 SOB 00 - SOV 33 SOB 00 SOV 25 SOS 0 - SOV 35 SOS 00 SOV 25 SOB 00 - SOV 35 SOB 00 SOV 26 SOS CC - SOV 36 SOS CC SOV 26 SOS OC - SOV 36 SOS OC SOV 26 SOS PC - SOV 36 SOS PC Blanking plate
2-196
ISO1 ISO2
A 43 56
B 80 90
C 140 165
D 158 180
E 28 35
F 10.5 12.5
G 76.4 77.5
H 22 26
L 11 14
M 47 61
N 150 178
P 230 240
R H + L + (A x *n) H + L + (A x *n)
*n = number of mounted valves N.B.: the unit is supplied complete with cables for valves
KEY TO CODES
B U S P P Profibu V V IP67 D E D ISO1 ISO2 1 1 Manifold base side 02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 0 2 2 positions 4 positions 6 positions 8 positions 10 positions 12 positions 14 positions 16 positions M J G E B A MM ISV 55 SOS 00 - ISV 65 SOS 00 ISV 55 SOB 00 - ISV 65 SOB 00 ISV 56 SOS CC - ISV 66 SOS CC ISV 56 SOS OC - ISV 66 SOS OC ISV 56 SOS PC - ISV 66 SOS PC Blanking plate
2-197
DISTRIBUTORS
ACCESSORIES
90 ELBOW WITHOUT CABLE STRAIGHT FITTING WITHOUT CABLE
Code 0240009001
Code 0240009021
DISTRIBUTORS
Code 0240009033
Code 0240009034
Code 0240009035
PLUG M12
Code 0240009036
Code 0240009040
2-198
The Profibus DP COM ACT input module is a sturdy and compact IP67 slave that can be used for connecting up to 8 inputs. A series of diagnostic functions provides information on the state of operation through lights and signals to the controller.
TECHNICAL DATA
Application Power supply Index of protection Temperature range Field Bus technical data Transmission protocol Transmission mode Transfer rate Addresses Input technical data Type Power supply Signal Input 0 signal voltage Input 1 signal voltage Diagnosis Field bus INPUT short-circuit sensor 8 PNP inputs 24 VDC (13-28 V) IP67 -20 to +70C RH 5-95% - no condensate DP-VO Profibus to EN 50170 Synchronous or Freeze-Mode Up to 12 MBit/s Rotary switches, 1...99 PNP proximity sensors or IEE 1131-2 compact mechanical stop 24 VDC (18 to 28 V) One green LED for each input 2...5 V 10...30 V NET LED+alarm signal to master Red LED for each channel at M8 connection point M8 (600 mA)
SLAVE IP67
Code 0240008002 Description IP67 M8 PROFIBUS INPUT
2-199
DISTRIBUTORS
PIN ASSIGNMENT
PROFIBUS CONNECTORS BUS OUT M12 female connector B coding for profibu 1 - 5 VDC power 2 - Bus A 3 - GND 4 - Bus B 5 - Screen BUS IN M12 male connector B coding for profibu 1 - 5 VDC power 2 - Bus A 3 - GND 4 - Bus B 5 - Screen
DISTRIBUTORS
POWER CONNECTOR INPUT PROFIBUS-DP IP67 M8 M12 male connector A coding 1 - Power supply module and input 2 - NC 3 - GND 4 - GND 5 - INPUT
LED ASSIGNMENT
NETWORK (red): slave not configured or not communicating with master (green): slave configured and communicating with master
Channel LEDs (inputs) (green): input enabled (red): sensor faulty, +24V power supply short-circuit
2-200
Code 0240009035
Code 0240009036
M8-M12 PLUG
Code 0240009009
M8 INPUT CONNECTOR
Code 0240009010
Code W0970513001
Code W0970513002
Code W0970513003
NOTE
Code W0970513004
2-201
DISTRIBUTORS
UNITS
UNITS
P P P P P P
PAGE
3-2
UNITS
3-1
SUMMARY
P INTRODUCTION
PAGE 3-4
P KEY TO CODES
PAGE 3-7
P FILTER
PAGE
3-8
P DEPURATOR
PAGE 3-11
PAGE 3-14
UNITS
P REGULATOR
PAGE 3-17
PAGE 3-20
P FILTER-REGULATOR
PAGE 3-23
P LUBRICATOR
PAGE 3-27
P SHUT-OFF VALVE
PAGE 3-30
P PROGRESSIVE STARTER
PAGE 3-33
P PRESSURE SWITCHES
PAGE 3-35
P AIR TAKE-OFF
PAGE 3-37
3-2
P FR+LUB
PAGE 3-38
P V3V+FR+LUB
PAGE 3-40
P FIL+DEP
PAGE 3-42
P FIL+LUB
PAGE 3-44
P ACCESSORIES
PAGE 3-46
3-3
SUMMARY Syntesi
UNITS
P SPARE PARTS
PAGE 3-47
Syntesi is an important milestone achieved by Metal Work, the result of thirty years experience producing air-treatment units. It has been studied in minute detail to obtain the best possible performance in a reduced space and with limited weight. The capacity is much higher than that of other units of the same size. This modular unit features a very simple yet effective system that requires no brackets, stay bolts or yoke for assembling the elements. The basic version of Syntesi incorporates numerous functions that are not provided or are only optional with traditional units. Examples are padlockable knobs, additional pneumatic ports on the front and back, flow options from left to right or vice versa, regulators with compensation system - which are accurate even when the upstream pressure changes, with rapid downstream pressure relief - full indelible marking, automatic condensate drain even in size 1, and 360 visual inspection of oil and condensate levels.
TECHNICAL DATA
Threaded port Max. input pressure Flow rate Min/max temperature at 10 bar; 1 MPa; 145 psi Padlockable knob Fluid Mounting position Direction of flow Additional air take-off, for pressure gauges or fittings Wall fixing screws Certification for potentially explosive atmosphere according to 94/9/CE bar MPa psi C 1/8
SIZE 1
1/4 15 1.5 217
SIZE 2
1
3/8 3/8 1/2 3/4 13 1.3 188 See catalogue of the various elements from -10 to +50 from -10 to +50 The knobs of the regulators, filter regulators and standard sectioning valves can all be padlocked Compressed air or other inert gases See catalogue of the various elements Flow options right to left or vice versa 1/8, front and rear, on all modules 1/4, front and rear, on all modules No. 2 M4 screws No. 2 M5 screws Ex II 3 GD c T5 T 100C -20C<Ta<50C
UNITS
3-4
NOTES
The various elements of Syntesi can be fixed together and connected to the air feed and delivery circuit using nickel brass or passivated aluminium bushes . The bushes are easy to remove by unscrewing the two front screws . This solution has numerous advantages: - Reduced overall dimensions. - Free composition of multiple elements, without the need for brackets, stay bolts or yoke. - The metal threads of the fittings, including taper thread, allow high torques. - Maximum flexibility, a unit can be transformed at any time by adding an element or replacing a port with another one, e.g. 1/4 instead of 1/8. - The pneumatic inlet port can be the same or different from the outlet port. Standard ports Syntesi are: 1/8, 1/4, 3/8 for size 1; 3/8, 1/2, 3/4, 1 for size 2; intermediate, air take-off. For the insertion of the bushings on the size 2 it could be necessary to push with the assistance of a vice. Additional ports . On the front and back of all Syntesi is an (1/8 for size 1, 1/4 for size 2) port for use with pressure gauges or pressure switches or, considering the high flow rate, as additional air take-off . These ports are downstream of the element, so, for example, a regulator port can supply air at a set pressure or a filter port can supply filtered air (not valid for actived carbon filter and depurator). Wall fixing. Only two through screws are needed. No bulky brackets or additional flanges are required. Regulator fixing bracket. The regulators and filter regulators can be fixed in position using a steel bracket . Padlockable knob . The knobs on the regulators, filter regulator and sectioning valves can all be padlocked. The steel plate is included in the supply. You can insert up to two padlocks on size 1, and up to three padlocks on size 2.
3-5
UNITS
MOUNTING OPTIONS On the wall, using two screws Using a bracket On a panel
UNITS
FIXING TO FRONT PORTS
ROTARY BUSHINGS
LASER MARKING
Do not use a spanner for fixin taper threaded elements to the front ports. Mount by hand and apply a liquid sealant (not teflo ).
The following is marked indelibly on the body: - Metal Work trademark - Code - Maximum pressure and temperature - Degree of filtratio or pressure range, where relevant - Week and year of manufacture - Atex category - Made in Italy
3-6
2 Size 2
3-7
UNITS